1. shopping
2. auctions

PROJECT MANUAL
For
LEONARDO IMPROVEMENTS – CATERING KITCHEN
JOB No. 652306
2014
COMMUNITY & ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT
ENGINEERING DIVISION
349 SOUTH 200 EAST STREET, SUITE 100
P.O. BOX 145506
SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84114-5506
DIRECTOR
Eric D. Shaw
CITY ENGINEER
Jeff Snelling, S.E.
SALT LAKE CITY CORPORATION
Salt Lake City, Utah
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
LEONARDO IMPROVEMENTS – CATERING KITCHEN
JOB No. 652306
PREPARED BY
Community & Economic Development
Engineering Division
349 South 200 East, Suite 100
Salt Lake City, UT 84111
2014
Project Title Page
00 01 01 - 1
TABLE OF
CONTENTS
LEONARDO IMPROVEMENTS – CATERING KITCHEN
JOB No. 652306
Reference
Number Title
No. of
Pages
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 01 01
00 01 07
00 01 10
00 01 15
00 11 16
00 21 13
00 22 13
00 22 18
00 22 19
00 41 00
00 43 00
00 43 36
00 43 37
00 43 38
00 52 00
00 54 15
00 61 13
00 61 14
00 62 11
00 62 16
00 65 13
00 73 10
00 73 50
00 91 13
Project Title Page ............................................................................................................... 1
Seals Page ........................................................................................................................... 1
Table of Contents ............................................................................................................... 3
List of Drawing Sheets ....................................................................................................... 2
Invitation to Bid.................................................................................................................. 3
Instructions to Bidders ..................................................................................................... 10
Supplementary Instructions to Bidders .............................................................................. 1
Supplementary Instructions (VP) ....................................................................................... 2
Solicitation for Pre-Qualification of Contractor for the Leonardo Improvements
– Catering Kitchen ............................................................................................................. 2
Bid Form............................................................................................................................. 6
Bid Schedule....................................................................................................................... 1
Proposed Subcontractor Form............................................................................................ 2
Work Under Contract Report ............................................................................................. 2
Bidder Status Report .......................................................................................................... 2
Agreement .......................................................................................................................... 8
Value program Supplemental Agreement ......................................................................... 4
Performance Bond .............................................................................................................. 6
Payment Bond .................................................................................................................... 6
Submittal Transmittal Form ............................................................................................... 3
Certificate of Insurance Form ............................................................................................ 1
Certificate of Substantial Completion ............................................................................... 2
Modifications to the General Conditions........................................................................... 8
Requirements of the Department of Public Utilities ....................................................... 4
Addenda.............................................................................................................................. 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00 Summary of Work .............................................................................................................. 4
01 22 00 Unit Prices .......................................................................................................................... 2
01 32 33 Photographic Documentation............................................................................................. 2
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ......................................................................................................... 9
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls..................................................................................... 5
01 73 00 Execution ............................................................................................................................ 9
01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal ................................................................ 4
Revised March 15, 2013
Table of Contents
00 01 10 - 1
01 77 00
01 78 23
01 79 00
Closeout Procedures ........................................................................................................... 7
Operation and Maintenance Data....................................................................................... 5
Demonstration and Training .............................................................................................. 4
EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 Selective Demolition .......................................................................................................... 6
WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 64 00 Plastic Paneling .................................................................................................................. 4
OPENINGS
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ....................................................................................... 7
08 71 00 Door Hardware ................................................................................................................. 13
FINISHES
09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing........................................................................................... 4
09 29 00 Gypsum Board.................................................................................................................... 7
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings .................................................................................................. 9
09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories .......................................................................................... 4
09 96 56 Quartz Epoxy Flooring....................................................................................................... 7
09 91 23 Interior Painting .................................................................................................................. 6
EQUIPMENT
11 40 00 Food Service Equipment .................................................................................................. 33
FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 10 00 Fire Protection .................................................................................................................... 8
PLUMBING
22 14 10 Plumbing Piping ................................................................................................................. 6
22 14 30 Plumbing Specialties ........................................................................................................ 17
22 44 50 Plumbing Equipment.......................................................................................................... 5
22 44 60 Special Plumbing Equipment Systems .............................................................................. 7
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements ...................................................................................... 13
23 05 29 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ....................................................................... 11
23 05 40 Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control ....................................................................... 12
23 05 48 Mechanical Seismic Control .............................................................................................. 5
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ...................................................................................... 6
23 07 00 Mechanical Insulation ........................................................................................................ 8
23 33 00 Ductwork and Accessories ............................................................................................... 13
23 37 13 Air Inlets and Outlets ......................................................................................................... 3
ELECTRICAL
26 00 01 Electrical General Provisions ........................................................................................... 10
Revised March 15, 2013
Table of Contents
00 01 10 - 2
26 00 70
26 00 72
26 01 00
26 01 20
26 01 35
26 01 40
26 01 55
26 01 60
26 05 44
26 51 00
Electrical Connections for Equipment ............................................................................... 3
Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints ....................................................................... 7
Conduit Raceways .............................................................................................................. 6
Conductors and Cables..................................................................................................... 10
Electrical Boxes and Fittings ............................................................................................. 4
Wiring Devices ................................................................................................................... 7
Motor Starters ..................................................................................................................... 4
Panel Boards ....................................................................................................................... 3
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling ....................................... 4
Interior Lighting ............................................................................................................... 22
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 07 21 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System ......................................................................... 13
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised March 15, 2013
Table of Contents
00 01 10 - 3
DOCUMENT 00 01 15
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
LEONARDO IMPROVEMENTS – CATERING KITCHEN
JOB No. 652306
DRAWINGS
Sheet
No.
Title
GENERAL
G001
Cover Sheet
ARCHITECTURAL
AE101
Floor Plan
AE102
Enlarged Floor Plan & Details
AE103
Enlarged Reflected Ceiling Plan & Details
FOOD SERVICE
FS101
Food Service Equipment Plan
FS102
Food Service Equipment Building Requirement Plan
FS103
Food Service Equipment Plumbing Requirement Plan
FS104
Food Service Equipment Electrical Requirement Plan
FS105
Food Service Equipment Custom Equipment Details
MECHANICAL
MH001
Mechanical Legend and Abbreviations
FS401
Enlarged Fire Protection Plan
MH102
Mechanical Plan
MH501
Mechanical Details
P101
Plumbing B2 Plan
PL102
Plumbing B2 Plan
PL401
Enlarged Plumbing Plan
PL501
Plumbing Details
List of Drawing Sheets
00 01 15 - 1
Sheet
No.
Title
ELECTRICAL
EG001
Symbol Schedule
EG501
Electrical Details
EE101
Overall Floor Plan
EE102
Overall Roof Plan
EL101
Lighting Plan
EP101
Power Plan
EP801
Schedules
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
1.
Manual of Standard Plans published by the Utah Chapter of the American Public Works
Association.
2.
S.L.C. Atlas 5 Acre Plat "C" (28,39)
3.
Etc.
END OF DOCUMENT
List of Drawing Sheets
00 01 15 - 2
DOCUMENT 00 11 16
INVITATION TO BID
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. Bidders are invited to bid on the Construction Contract named and numbered as:
Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen, Job No. 652306.
B. For information about the award of this Construction Contract, contact Karen Carruthers,
Contract Administrator at 801-535-6355.
C. For information about technical requirements, contact Jeff Sokol at 801-535-6480.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The location of the work is: 209 East 400 South
B. The work to be performed consists of furnishing and installing the equipment, facilities,
services, and appurtenances indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work generally
includes, but is not limited to, the following: Approximately 1,535 square foot retrofit of
the existing space in the Leonardo Building. The remodel will create a new commercial
kitchen. Work includes construction of a fully functional kitchen in the basement of the
Leonardo Building with all the associated kitchen/mechanical/electrical requirements.
1.3
BIDDERS' PRE-QUALIFICATION
A. Bidders are required to be pre-qualified for the Work.
1.4
BASIS OF BIDS
A. Bids shall be on a lump sum basis. Unsealed or segregated Bids will not be accepted.
1.5
CONTRACT TIME
A. The Work will be Substantially Complete within 75 calendar days after the Notice to
Proceed.
1.6
EXAMINATION AND PROCUREMENT OF DOCUMENTS
A. Complete sets of Contract Documents may be examined and obtained from the
ENGINEER at 349 South 200 East, Suite 100, Salt Lake City, Utah 84111 or from
www.bidsync.com. A non-refundable deposit of $50.00 will be required for each
complete set. The deposit must be a cashier's or company check payable to Salt Lake
City Corporation. Major credit cards are also acceptable. CDs containing the Contract
Documents will be provided at no cost.
B. To ensure that notification of addenda is received, BIDDERS should register as a plan
holder on bidsync.
1.7
PRE-BID CONFERENCE
A. A pre-bid conference will be held at 9:00 a.m. on September 23, 2014, at 349 South 200
East, Suite 600, Salt Lake City, Utah. All contractors intending to submit a bid are
Revised October 15, 2013
Invitation to Bid
00 11 16 - 1
invited to attend to obtain relevant information concerning the project. Bidders are
advised that information affecting drawings, specifications, conditions, scope of the
Work, etc. may be discussed. OWNER assumes no obligation to disclose information
discussed at the pre-bid conference to Bidders who do not attend. Absent Bidders
assume all risk of failure to attend.
1.8
BID SECURITY
A. Bid security must equal at least 5 percent of the total amount of the Bid. A photocopy
or facsimile transmission of bid security will not be accepted. Bid security will be
returned to each unsuccessful Bidder after tabulation and award of the Construction
Contract.
1.9
BID LOCATION AND OPENING
A. Sealed bids will be received at the
office of the City Recorder
at Room 415, City and County Building, 451 South State Street, Salt Lake
City, Utah 84111 until 1:50 p.m. or in the City Council Chambers,
Room 315, City and County Building, 451 South State Street, between 1:50
p.m. and 2:00 p.m., Utah time, as conclusively established by the clock at the Bid
Bids delivered to
any other location will not be accepted. Bids
opening location, on Wednesday, October 1, 2014.
received after 2:00 p.m. will not be accepted. Bids will be publicly opened and read in
Room 315, City and County Building, 451 South State Street at about 2:00 p.m., Utah
time, on October 1, 2014, by the City Recorder.
B. On the outside of the envelope, Bidder shall indicate the nature of the bid and include
Bidder's return mailing address.
1.10 RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS
A. OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all bids or to waive any informality or
technical error in any bid if OWNER deems it to be in its best interest.
1.11 VALIDITY PERIOD FOR BIDS
A. Bids shall remain valid for 45 days after the day of Bid opening. A Bidder who receives
a Notice of Intent to Award and who withdraws his bid after Bid opening, but before
expiration of said period, shall forfeit his bid security.
1.12 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES (ADA)
A. In compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), the following information is
provided: FAX Number 801-535-6093, TDD Number 801-535-6219, Contact person:
Karen Carruthers, Contract Administrator, City Engineer’s Office. If assistance is
required, please contact the above office at least 72 hours before the bid opening.
Revised October 15, 2013
Invitation to Bid
00 11 16 - 2
1.13 REPRESENTATION REGARDING ETHICAL STANDARDS FOR CITY
OFFICERS AND EMPLOYEES AND FORMER CITY OFFICERS AND
EMPLOYEES
A. A bid will not be accepted unless it contains the following representation.
THE BIDDER, OFFEROR, OR CONTRACTOR represents that it has not:
1.
Provided an illegal gift or payoff to a City officer or employee or former City
officer or employee, or his or her relative or business entity.
2.
Retained any person to solicit or secure this contract upon an agreement or
understanding for a commission, percentage, or brokerage or contingent fee,
other than bona fide employees or bona fide commercial selling agencies for
the purpose of securing business.
3.
Knowingly breached any of the ethical standards set forth in the City’s conflict
of interest ordinance, Chapter 2.44, Salt Lake City Code; or
4.
Knowingly influenced, and hereby promises that it will not knowingly
influence, a City officer or employee or former City officer or employee to
breach any of the ethical standards set forth in the City’s conflict of interest
ordinance, Chapter 2.44, Salt Lake City Code.
1.14 AWARD
A. The Construction Contract will be awarded in compliance with Salt Lake City’s ValueBased Procurement Program which takes into account certain factors in the Bidder’s
work environment. For more information about this Program please read SLC
Administrative Rules, Procurement Rules Chapter 19, (See document 00 22 18, Article
1.2 paragraph “A” for a link).
First
Publication: September 13, 2014
Second
Publication: September 20, 2014
Third Publication: September 21, 2014
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised October 15, 2013
Invitation to Bid
00 11 16 - 3
DOCUMENT 00 21 13
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINED TERMS
A. Terms used in the Bid Documents that are defined in Article 1.1 of the General
Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions.
B. General Conditions: as published in Document 00 72 00 in the current edition of the
Manual of Standard Specifications by the Utah Chapter of the American Public Works
Association.
1.2 COPIES OF BID DOCUMENTS
A. Complete sets of Bid Documents must be used in preparing Bids. OWNER and
ENGINEER assume no responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the
use of incomplete sets of Bid Documents.
B. Bid Documents are made available to Bidder only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the
Work. No license or grant for any other use is given.
C. Bidding Document copyrights shall remain with OWNER.
D. All provisions of the current edition of the Manual of Standard Specifications and Manual
of Standard Plans published by the Utah Chapter of the American Public Works
Association that are applicable to the Work are made a part of the Contract Documents by
reference. Those publications are available on the web at http://utah.apwa.net.
E. Salt Lake City’s Department of Public Utilities has a document entitled “Standard
Practices for Salt Lake City Public Utilities”. (January 5, 2010 edition) The document is
available from 1530 South West Temple, Salt Lake City, Utah.
1.3 PRE-BID CONFERENCE
A. Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present at a pre-bid conference to
discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference.
ENGINEER will transmit to all persons or agencies who have signed up to receive copies
of the Bid Documents such Addenda as ENGINEER considers necessary in response to
questions arising at the conference. The location and time of the conference are identified
in the Invitation to Bid (Document 00 11 16).
1.4 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. In General: Bidders are permitted to converse with ENGINEER or ENGINEER's
personnel having knowledge of the Project, Plans, Specifications, material sites, or
conditions generally prevailing in the area of the Project to aid in pre-bid investigations.
OWNER is not bound by any statements or representations made by ENGINEER or
ENGINEER's personnel before the Bid opening or award of the Construction Contract,
nor for any assumptions or conclusions reached by a prospective Bidder as a result of such
communication unless ENGINEER issues an Addendum to all prospective Bidders.
Revised March 15, 2013
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13 - 1
B. Access to Site: The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, and rights-of-way
and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Bidder in
performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional off-site
lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of
materials and equipment must be provided by Bidder.
C. Contract Documents: The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible
representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article
1.4; that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work
required by the Contract Documents; and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in
scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for
performance and furnishing of the Work.
D. Bidder's Obligations: The submission of a Bid constitutes acknowledgement that Bidder
has complied with all bidding instructions. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before
submitting a Bid, to:
1. Examine the Contract Documents thoroughly;
2. Visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress,
performance, or furnishing of the Work;
3. Consider federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress,
performance, or furnishing of the Work;
4. Study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents; and
5.
Identify and notify ENGINEER in writing of all specific conflicts, errors, or
discrepancies in the Contract Documents, and of any doubts of Bidder about their
meanings. The failure or omission of any Bidder to receive or examine any form,
instrument, Addendum, or other document, visit the site and become acquainted with
conditions there existing, or attend the pre-bid conference, shall in no way relieve any
Bidder from obligations with respect to Bidder's Bid or to the Construction Contract.
E. Deviations from the Terms of the Contract Documents: OWNER will not accept any
deviations whatsoever from the printed terms of the Agreement (Document 00 52 00) and
the Contract Documents, except by Addendum or Change Order.
1.5 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
A. In General: Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder is responsible for review of OWNER's
explorations, tests, and data concerning surface conditions, subsurface conditions, and
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site, or otherwise, that may affect cost,
progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work in accordance with the time, price, and
other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
B. Surface and Subsurface Conditions: Provisions concerning surface and subsurface
conditions, if any, are set forth in the Geotechnical Data (Document 00 31 32). That
document provides the identification of:
1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site that have
been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents; and
2. Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and
subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site that
Revised March 15, 2013
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13 - 2
have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents.
C. Underground Facilities: Information and data indicated in the Contract Documents
regarding Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information
and data furnished to OWNER and ENGINEER by owners of such Underground
Facilities. OWNER does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness
thereof other than as provided in paragraph 4.3A.2 of the General Conditions or unless
expressly provided in the Modifications to the General Conditions (Document 00 73 10).
D. Additional Explorations: On request in advance, and if possible, OWNER will provide
to each Bidder access to the site to conduct any explorations and tests as each Bidder
deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall obtain permits, fill all holes, and
clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations.
Bidder shall indemnify and save OWNER harmless during and after the performance of
additional explorations.
E. Modifications to the Contract Documents: Provisions concerning the adequacy of the
data furnished for subsurface structures and underground facilities and the possibility of
changes in the documents due to differing conditions appear in Articles 4.2 and 4.3 of the
General Conditions.
PART 2 BIDDING PROCEDURES
2.1 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
A. All requests for interpretation of the Contract Documents shall be made in writing and
delivered to ENGINEER no later than 7 calendar days before the Bid opening. If
required, ENGINEER will send a written interpretation to all persons receiving a set of
Bid Documents in the form of a written Addendum. If a Bidder's request for
interpretation is not responded to by ENGINEER, Bidder shall not rely on any
interpretation in the request that is contrary to the intent and terms of the Contract
Documents.
B. OWNER will not be responsible for any explanations or interpretations, except those duly
issued in the form of written Addenda.
C. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by
ENGINEER.
D. Any Addenda so issued during the time of bidding shall be deemed to be included in the
Bid. All Addenda shall become a part of the Contract Documents.
E. Except to postpone the Bid opening, no Addenda shall be issued within 48 hours before
the Bid opening.
2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL OPTIONS BEFORE OPENING
A. If a Bidder or Supplier wishes to use items of equipment or materials other than those
identified in the Contract Documents, said Bidder or Supplier shall submit a written
request for approval to ENGINEER at least 10 days before the date set for the Bid
opening.
Revised March 15, 2013
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13 - 3
B. The procedure for submission of any such request shall be as follows: submit 1) two sets
of the written request and technical brochures and 2) a statement of variances. The
statement of variances must list all features of the proposed substitution that differ from
the Contract Documents and must further certify that the substitution has no other variant
features. The brochure and information submitted must be clearly marked showing make,
model, size, options, and any other features and must include sufficient evidence for
ENGINEER to evaluate each feature listed as a variance. If after installing the substituted
product, an unlisted variance is discovered, CONTRACTOR shall immediately replace
the product with a specified product at no cost to OWNER.
C. Any approval of such a request by ENGINEER must be made not later than 48 hours
before the Bid opening. ENGINEER's failure to approve by such time shall be deemed a
denial of the request.
D. Any such approval is at the sole discretion of ENGINEER and will be in the form of an
Addendum, issued to all Bidders holding Bid Documents, indicating that the additional
equipment or materials are approved as equal to those specified for the Project.
2.3 BID SECURITY
A. Delivery of Bid Security: Bidders must deliver Bid security, in the form of either a Bid
Bond or a cashier’s check, to OWNER at the time they deliver their Bid. If Bid Security
is not delivered with the Bid, the Bid shall not be read.
B. Amount of Bid security: The Bid security amount must equal 5 percent of the total
amount of the Bid. The total amount of the Bid shall be the sum of all items of the Bid,
constituting the maximum amount of the possible award to the Bidder.
C. Bid Bond: If a Bid Bond is used, a photocopy or facsimile transmission of the Bond will
not be accepted. The Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder, if awarded the Work, will
promptly enter into the Construction Contract to perform the Work in the manner required
by the Contract Documents.
D. Cashier's Check: If a cashier's check is used, the cashier's check must be made payable
to Salt Lake City Corporation. A photocopy or facsimile transmission of the check will
not be accepted. Personal or company checks will not be accepted.
E. Return of Bid Security: OWNER will return the Bid security to all Bidders by the
earlier of 45 days after the date of the Bid opening and 7 days after the effective date of
the Construction Contract. The liability of OWNER in regards to cashier’s checks shall
be limited only to the return of the checks.
F. Default: If the Bidder fails, within the time limit described in Article 3.6A, to enter into
the Construction Contract and to deliver to OWNER a Performance Bond, Payment Bond,
or any other Bonds or documents required by the Contract Documents after Notice of
Intent to Award by OWNER, the Bidder shall forfeit the amount of the Bid Bond or
cashier's check as liquidated damages to OWNER.
2.4 CONTRACT TIME AND PUNCH LIST TIME
A. Provisions concerning Contract Time and Punch List Time are set forth in the Agreement
(Document 00 52 00).
Revised March 15, 2013
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13 - 4
2.5 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
A. Provisions concerning liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement (Document 00
52 00).
2.6 BID FORM
A. The Bid Form (Document 00 41 00) identifies all forms comprising the Bid Documents.
Additional copies may be obtained from ENGINEER.
B. All names must be typed or printed under or near the signature. The signature must be an
original signature.
C. The Bid must contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda. The Addenda
numbers must be filled in on the Bid Form.
D. The Bidder's address, telephone number, and facsimile number for communications
regarding the Bid must be shown on the first page of the Bid Form.
E. The Bidder shall make no stipulations or alterations on the Bid forms. The Bidder must
use only the Bid Form and Bid Schedules bound in the Contract Documents (unless
updated forms are included in an addendum, in which cause the Bidder shall use the
updated forms).
F. OWNER may waive any failure to comply with the requirements of this paragraph 2.6 if
OWNER determines that such failure (1) is not material to the terms of OWNER’s Bid
Documents and process and does not render the Bid non-compliant with Laws and
Regulations pertaining to bidding, or (2) involves ministerial or minor informalities that
are evident from the Bid Documents or that can be waived without prejudice to other
Bidders and that do not have a substantial effect on price.
2.7 BID SCHEDULE
A. Any work or material that is specified in the Contract Documents or that is necessary
because of the nature of the Work, but that is not listed separately in the Bid Schedule
(Document 00 43 00), shall not be measured or paid for separately. The cost of such work
or material shall be considered as included in the Contract Price.
B. All blanks on the Bid Schedule (Document 00 43 00) must be completed in ink or by
typewriter. If applicable, furnish both the unit and the total costs for each item. Numbers
shall be stated in figures, and the signature of all persons signing shall be in longhand.
Any corrections, alterations or erasures made by the Bidder to the information the Bidder
entered on the Bid Schedule shall be initialed in ink by the Bidder. OWNER may waive
any failure to comply with the requirements of this paragraph if OWNER determines that
such failure (1) is not material to the terms of OWNER’s Bid Documents and process and
does not render the Bid non-compliant with Laws and Regulations pertaining to bidding,
or (2) involves ministerial or minor informalities that are evident from the Bid Documents
or that can be waived without prejudice to other Bidders and that do not have a substantial
effect on price.
2.8 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
A. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid (Document
00 11 16), enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, and marked with the Project title and
the name and address of the Bidder. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery
Revised March 15, 2013
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13 - 5
system the sealed envelope must be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation
"BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. It is the sole responsibility of the Bidder to deliver
the Bid before the scheduled time.
B. Alternate bids, other than those called for in the Bid form, will not be considered.
C. No oral, telegraphic, telephonic, facsimile, or modified bids will be considered. OWNER
will not consider any attempted modification of a Bid written or made on the outside of
the envelope containing the Bid.
2.9 MODIFICATIONS AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
A. At any time before the Bid opening, Bids may be modified or withdrawn if a written
notice of the modification or withdrawal, as the case may be, is signed by Bidder and
delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted.
B. Within two business days after Bids are opened, any Bidder may file written notice with
OWNER that there was a substantial mistake made in the preparation of its Bid. Bidder
must thereafter promptly demonstrate Bidder's mistake to the reasonable satisfaction of
OWNER. If OWNER agrees, Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be
returned to Bidder.
2.10 OPENING OF BIDS
A. Bids will be opened and read aloud publicly unless obviously non-responsive. An abstract
of the amounts of the base schedule of prices and any alternate schedules will be made
available for review after the opening of Bids.
B. Any Bids received after the time specified in the Invitation to Bid (Document 00 11 16)
will be returned unopened.
2.11 BIDS SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE FOR 45 DAYS
A. Subject to Paragraph 2.3E hereof, Bids remain subject to acceptance for 45 days after the
day of the Bid opening. OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return
the Bid security before that date. OWNER and Bidder may agree to extend the 45-day
deadline.
2.12 NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT
A. Work under this Bid will obligate the Bidder and Subcontractors not to discriminate in
employment practices.
B. Bidders must, if requested, submit a compliance report concerning employment practices
and policies in order to maintain their eligibility to receive the award of the Construction
Contract.
C. Equal opportunity employment shall be reflected in the racial and sexual composition of
Bidder's work force and OWNER urges an affirmative action program to overcome underutilization.
D. Bidders are advised that the Construction Contract and its performance are subject to the
applicable provisions of all Laws and Regulations. Bidder will be obligated, upon written
request, to give all applicable assurances of compliance in connection therewith.
E. If federal nondiscrimination requirements are applicable, Bidder must be fully
knowledgeable and comply with such requirements. Refer to Community Development
Revised March 15, 2013
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13 - 6
Block Grant Supplementary Conditions (CDBG) (Document 00 73 12) or Federal
Aviation Administration Supplementary Conditions as applicable.
2.13 SECTION 3, HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT ACT OF 1968
A. If Work under this Bid is funded with a federal community development block grant the
requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968 may apply
to the Bidder and its Subcontractors. OWNER encourages the use of the State of Utah
Section 3 register for all subcontracting http://housing.utah.gov/section3/HUD Section
3.html.
B. Bidder will be obligated to give all applicable assurances of compliance in connection
with this Section 2.13 at any time.
PART 3 AWARD OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
3.1 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
A. Within 7 calendar days after ENGINEER's request, a Bidder whose Bid is under
consideration for award shall submit to ENGINEER any of the following information
requested by ENGINEER. ENGINEER may request like information regarding Bidder's
Subcontractors or Bidder's Suppliers.
1. A current financial statement for the Work (as provided to the bonding company);
2. A chronological list of "completed" construction work done by Bidder during the last
3 years, including project name, address, owner, contract name, and current telephone
number;
3. Work Under Contract Report (Document 00 43 37);
4. The proposed organizational structure for the project: firm ownership, project
manager, progress scheduler, and CONTRACTOR’s Resident Superintendent’s
resume;
5. Owned and rented equipment that is to be used to do the Work;
6. Investigations, arbitrations, litigation, or claims that are pending, threatened, settled, or
disposed of within the last 3 years;
7. Evidence of ability to perform and complete the Work in a manner and within the time
limit specified. As a minimum, identify specific projects similar to the Work in
physical size, cost, and commercial nature. If the work experiences of the project
manager and Resident Superintendent designated to construct this project are different
than that of Bidder, provide resumes of their work history. Include their actual project
titles and indicate their actual responsibilities on each given project;
8. Names of three (3) projects of similar size and nature that the Resident Superintendent
has completed. Include the name, address, and telephone number of the office
contracting for each project.
9. Information so OWNER’s Labor Relations Specialist can certify that Bidder has an
acceptable Utilization Plan that offers economic opportunities to low and very low
income persons and that Bidder qualifies as a Section 3 Contractor; and
Revised March 15, 2013
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13 - 7
10. Such other data as may be called for in the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders
(Document 00 22 13) (if any).
B. OWNER will hold all requested information confidential and, upon request, shall return
such information to Bidder after acceptance or rejection of Bidder’s Bid.
C. Untimely response by Bidder will release OWNER of any obligation to further negotiate
or consider Bidder's Bid.
3.2 EVALUATION OF BIDS
A. OWNER reserves the right: (1) to reject any and all Bids; (2) to waive minor informalities
in the Bid Schedule and elsewhere so long as the informalities (a) are not material to
OWNER’s Bid Documents and process and do not render the Bid non-compliant with
Laws and Regulation pertaining to bidding, or (b) involve ministerial or minor
informalities that are evident from the Bid Documents or that can be waived without
prejudice to other Bidders and that do not have a substantial effect on price; (3) to
negotiate and agree to contract terms with the successful Bidder; and (4) to disregard nonconforming, non-responsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids.
B. OWNER reserves the right to reject any Bid if OWNER believes that it would not be in
the best interest of the Project or OWNER to make an award to that Bidder. Such
rejection may be because the Bid is non-responsive, or Bidder is unqualified or of
doubtful ability, or Bidder’s Resident Superintendent is unqualified or of doubtful ability,
or the Bid or Bidder fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by
OWNER in the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders (Document 00 22 13).
C. OWNER will consider the qualifications of Bidder and such alternates, prices, and other
data as may be requested in the Bid Form (Document 00 41 00), Bid Schedule (Document
00 43 00), or written requests issued prior to OWNER's Notice of Intent to Award the
Construction Contract. OWNER will consider Bidder’s compliance with Section
3.24.115, Salt Lake City Code. See Document 00 22 16 Supplementary Instructions to
Bidders.
D. OWNER may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers,
and other persons and organizations proposed for portions of the Work as provided in the
Proposed Subcontractor Form (Document 00 43 36). OWNER will consider Bidder’s
compliance with Section 3.24.115, Salt Lake City Code. See Document 00 22 16
Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.
E. OWNER may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data,
and guarantees of materials and equipment when such data is required to be submitted
prior to the Notice of Intent to Award the Construction Contract.
F. To establish qualifications of Bidder, OWNER may request such data indicated in Article
3.1 hereinabove and conduct such investigations as OWNER deems appropriate.
G. If the Construction Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the most responsive
and lowest, qualified, responsible Bidder as determined by OWNER. Alternates may be
accepted depending upon availability of OWNER funds. Bid alternates will be considered
in determining the most responsive, lowest, qualified, and responsible Bidder.
H. OWNER will evaluate Bid Schedules as follows:
Revised March 15, 2013
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13 - 8
1. OWNER will resolve discrepancies in the multiplication of quantities of Work items
and unit prices in favor of the unit prices.
2. Prices written out in words shall govern over prices written out in numbers.
3. OWNER will resolve discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of
figures and the correct sum thereof in favor of the correct sum.
4. Bids shall not contain any recapitulations of or changes in the work to be done.
5. OWNER may accept a Bid despite obvious errors in a Bid Schedule, such as a failure
to include unit prices or a misplaced decimal point, as long as OWNER reasonably
can discern the intention of Bidder as to the amounts to be bid.
3.3 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
A. Bidder shall not subcontract more than 75 percent of the dollar value of the total
contemplated Work (exclusive of the supply of materials and equipment to be
incorporated in the Work) without OWNER's written approval.
B. Conflict of interest restrictions pertaining to Subcontractors are described in paragraph
6.5H of the General Conditions.
3.4 CONTRACT SECURITY AND OTHER SUBMITTALS
A. Performance Bond (Document 00 61 13) and Payment Bond (Document 00 61 14):
OWNER's requirements as to Performance and Payment Bonds are as set forth in the
Modifications to General Conditions (Document 00 73 10). Specific requirements are set
forth in the Performance Bond (Document 00 61 13) and the Payment Bond (Document
00 61 14).
1. Bidder should carefully examine the form of the Bonds.
2. When the successful Bidder delivers the executed Construction Contract to OWNER, it
must be accompanied by the required Performance and Payment Bonds (using
Documents 00 61 13 and 00 61 14, respectively).
B. Proposed Subcontractor Form (Document 00 43 36): Bidder must provide this report
form to OWNER within 24 hours after ENGINEER's request. See Bid Form, paragraph
1.5B (Document 00 41 00) for additional information. The form shall list the name and
address of each Subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to Bidder
at the site of the Work, or a Subcontractor who, off the job site, will specially fabricate a
portion of the Work or improvement according to detail Drawings. In each instance, the
nature and extent of any Work to be subcontracted in an amount in excess of 2 percent of
the Bid sum shall be described. Bidder must have the written consent of OWNER to
substitute for any of the Subcontractors or Suppliers designated or to employ any
Subcontractor or Supplier that is not listed.
C. Bidder Status Report (Document 00 43 38): Bidder must submit the completed form
upon ENGINEER's request or after Bidder receives the Notice of Intent to Award.
D. Other Information: When a determination has been made to award the Construction
Contract, Bidder is required, before the award or after the award, or both, to furnish such
other information as ENGINEER requests.
Revised March 15, 2013
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13 - 9
3.5 ADJUSTMENTS TO THE COST OF THE WORK AFTER OPENING OF BIDS
A. The Contract Price identified in the Agreement (Document 00 52 00) represents the Cost
of the Work that is to be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. Adjustments to the
Contract Price that are agreed to between OWNER and the successful Bidder shall be
effected by signing an Agreement Supplement.
3.6 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
A. Within 10 days, (or such longer period of time that OWNER in its discretion may allow)
after OWNER gives Notice of Intent to Award the Construction Contract to the successful
Bidder, Bidder shall pick up, sign, and return the required number of copies of the
Agreement (Document 00 52 00) and attached documents to OWNER with the required
Bonds. A minimum of 3 originals will be signed. One executed original will be returned
to Bidder.
B. Transfers, delegations, or assignments of interests in the Contract Documents are
prohibited, unless prior written authorization is received from OWNER.
C. At and from the time of Bidding through the completion of the Work, Bidder shall be
properly licensed to do the Work and shall be in compliance with the license laws of the
State of Utah, Salt Lake City and Salt Lake County.
PART 4 MISCELLANEOUS
4.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL OPTIONS AFTER BID OPENING
A. The Construction Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment
described in the Drawings, Specifications, and any Addenda.
B. The procedure for submitting an application for substitution after the effective date of the
Construction Contract is set forth in Article 6.4 of the General Conditions.
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised March 15, 2013
Instructions to Bidders
00 21 13 - 10
DOCUMENT 00 22 13
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Add the following paragraph to Article 3.3.
3.3
SUBCONTRACTOR, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
C. The following firms, that have been under contract to the OWNER in the design phase of
the Work, shall not be used as subcontractors by the CONTRACTOR.
1.
Design Consultant:
N/A
2.
Testing Consultant:
STRATA
3.
Geotechnical Consultants:
N/A
4.
Structural Consultant:
N/A
5.
Other:
N/A
Add the following article to Part 4.
4.2
PARTNERING
A. Refer to Section 01 31 20 for description of partnering requirements.
B. OWNER's consultants listed in this project manual will be partners to the project.
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised Nov. 27, 2006
Supplementary Instructions to Bidders
00 22 13 - 1
DOCUMENT 00 22 18
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS (VP)
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
A. OWNER has determined that it obtains better value from contracted services when
certain practices enhance a Bidder’s work environment. OWNER has implemented a
Value-Based Procurement Program (the “Value Program”) to obtain the benefit of those
practices.
1.2
THE VALUE PROGRAM
A. The Value Program is as set forth in Salt Lake City Procurement Rules Chapter 19 and
can be found at the following web address: www.slcinfobase.com - Click on Policies,
Procedures, Administrative Rules & Executive Orders; click on Administrative Rules;
click on Procurement.
B. Participation by a Bidder is voluntary. Failure to comply shall not render a bid nonresponsive.
C. If Bidder fails to participate in the Value Program at the time of submitting a bid,
OWNER shall consider such bid as though Bidder had no factors under the Value
Program. In such a case,
1.
Bidder will receive no benefits allowable under the Value Program;
2.
Bidder will NOT be allowed to submit additional information related to the Value
Program; and
3.
Bidder waives any and all rights to raise a protest related to the Value Program.
D. If Bidder participates in the Value Program, Bidder shall provide the information shown
in the Value Program Form (Document 00 43 40). In that form Bidder certifies that the
information given is true as of the time of submitting its bid. The information will be
used in the manner stated in the Value Program to evaluate “responsibility” if bids are
close.
E.
When the Value Program is applicable, the Program will only affect bids that fall within
the following dollar range.
1.
For contracts with an estimated value of $250,000 or less, the Value Program will
apply to all bids that fall within two (2) percent of the lowest amount submitted.
a.
F.
See 1.3 B of Document 00 41 00 to determine if the City Engineer’s estimate is
less than $250,000.00.
An award, if any, will be made in accordance with Salt Lake City Procurement Rules,
Chapter 19. In general terms, Chapter 19 may apply based on the amount bid and other
factors. If the Value Program applies, OWNER will first consider all matters relating to
responsiveness and responsibility except the Value Program. OWNER will then further
evaluate responsibility under the Value Program and will award the Contract to the
Revised February 11, 2013
Supplementary Instruction (VP)
00 22 18 - 1
Bidder who demonstrates the most points among the following factors. If two or more
bidders have the same number of points, the award will be made to the bidder with the
lowest bid price.
1.3
Policy of nondiscrimination
1/2 point
Sponsorship of state-compliant apprenticeship programs(s)
1/2 point
Use of a pre-employment and “for cause” drug testing program
1/2 point
Local small business
1/2 point
1.
OWNER reserves the right to review or audit any information provided by Bidder
to make its evaluation.
2.
Bidder shall provide or furnish access to any necessary records or other information
in order to permit OWNER to verify these certifications.
3.
Bidder shall provide or furnish access to such records and information no later than
3 business days after OWNER issues a written request for the same.
VALUE-BASED PROCUREMENT PROGRAM
A. In situations in which the factors listed in the Value Program Form affect the award of
the Bid, the winning Bidder will be required to enter into a Value Program Supplemental
Agreement (Document 00 54 15) with OWNER.
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised February 11, 2013
Supplementary Instruction (VP)
00 22 18 - 2
DOCUMENT 00 22 19
SOLICITATION FOR PRE-QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR FOR
THE LEONARDO IMPROVMENTS – CATERING KITCHEN
A. Failure to submit Document 00 22 19 will result in the firms bid being deemed nonresponsive.
B. The firm, not employees of a past firm where such work was performed, must meet the
following criteria.
1. A minimum of two (2) successful new or remodeled of commercial kitchens the last
five (5) years on projects comparable to this Scope of Work.
2. The General Contractor and all sub-contractors must be currently licensed and insured
to perform such work in the State of Utah.
C. Criteria for Pre-Qualification of Contractors
Type or neatly print your answers to the following questions in the spaces provided. Fully
respond to each of the following questions. Do not skip any questions. At the discretion of
the City Engineer, failure to respond to all questions may result in disqualification.
In order to be eligible to bid contractors must “Pass” each of the following minimum
“Pass/Fail” Qualification Criteria:
1. Provide the official name, address and telephone number of your company:
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
2. Pass/Fail Requirement: My Company has substantially completed, as a prime contractor
or a subcontractor, the work for at least three (2) contracts in the last five (5) years for
similar scope or greater.
Listed below is the required information for your contracts:
1. Property Owner
Property Owner’s Contact Person
Contact Person’s Telephone
Solicitation for Pre-Qualification of Contractor for the Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
00 22 19 - 1
Dollar Amount of Contract__________________Substantial Completion
Date_______________
Contract substantially completed under (check one):
__________________Current Company Name _________________Previous Company
Name
2. Property
Owner______________________________________________________________
Property Owner’s Contact
Person________________________________________________
Contact Person’s Telephone
#__________________________________________________
Dollar Amount of Contract_________________Substantial Completion
Date______________
Contract substantially completed under (check one):
________________Current Company Name ___________________Previous Company
Name
CERTIFICATION – By signing this statement, I certify that the information provided above
is complete and accurate.
_________________________________________________________________
Company Name
_________________________________________________________________
Authorized Signature
End of Document
Solicitation for Pre-Qualification of Contractor for the Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
00 22 19 - 2
DOCUMENT 00 41 00
BID FORM
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
BIDDER
A. Name:
B. Address:
C. Telephone number:
D. Email address:
E. Facsimile number:
F.
Tax identification number:
G. DUNS number (for CDBG funded projects)
See 1.3 C to determine if this project is CDBG funded.
H. Bidder holds license number ____________________________________, issued by the
Utah State Department of Commerce, Division of Occupational and Professional
Licensing. Bidder is licensed to practice as a _________________________________
Contractor. The license expiration date is the 30th day of November, 2015.
1.2
NOTICE
A. Pursuant to Section 58-55-501(8), Utah Code Annotated (UCA), it is unlawful to submit
a bid for any work for which a license is required under Chapter 55 of Title 58, UCA, by
a person or other business entity not licensed or excepted from licensure as a contractor
under Chapter 55 of Title 58, UCA. Pursuant to Section 58-55-503(1), UCA, contracts
for the work may not be awarded to any person or other business entity that violates
Sections 58-55-501(8) UCA, in submitting its Bid.
1.3
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
Job No. 652306
B. The city engineer’s estimate for this project is not over $250,000.00.
C. This project is not CDBG funded.
D. This project does not require a permit to work in the Public Way from Salt Lake City
Engineering, 349 South 200 East, Suite 100. If such a permit is required, Section 6.7 (H)
(1) (d) of Document 00 73 10 (Modifications to the General Conditions) shall apply.
Revised December 1, 2013
Bid Form
00 41 00 - 1
1.4
ADDENDA
A. Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda.
(list Addenda numbers here)
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. With Bid:
1.
This Bid Form (Document 00 41 00).
2.
Bid Schedule (Document 00 43 00).
3.
Bid bond.
4.
Voluntary Submittal: If the document noted below is included in the Project
Manual.
a. Value Program Form (Document 00 43 40) Bidder may be at a competitive
disadvantage if it does not submit the Value Program Form.
5.
Mandatory Submittals: If the documents noted below are included in the Project
Manual.
a. Qualified Health Insurance Certification Form (Document 00 43 45), Neither
the failure to submit document 00 43 45 nor checking “No” will render the bid
non-responsive. That form is used by Bidder to certify that Bidder and all
subcontractors of Bidder working on the project have and will maintain an offer
of qualified health insurance in compliance with Salt Lake City Code Section
3.24.115 for the duration of the contract.
b. Work Environment Certification Form (Document 00 43 46) If the Bidder does
not certify yes to each question in Document 00 43 46 the bid will be rejected as
non-responsive. That form is used by Bidder to certify that Bidder and all
subcontractors of Bidder working on the project have and will maintain 1) a
drug and alcohol testing policy; 2) a program to recruit and/or employ veterans;
3) a job training program; 4) a safety program; and 5) a formal policy of nondiscrimination in compliance with Salt Lake City Code Section 3.24.115 for the
duration of the contract. See Section 3.24.115 of the Salt Lake City Code and
Article 1.4 of Section 00 22 16 Supplemental Instructions.
c. Section 3 Business Certification (CDBG) (Document 00 43 42).
d. Failure to submit Document 00 22 19 will result in the firms bid being deemed
non-responsive.
B. Due diligence letter to Bidder: If Bidder receives a due diligence letter from OWNER
after bid opening, Bidder must submit the following documents to OWNER after
ENGINEER’s request.
1.
Document 00 43 36: Proposed Subcontractor Form.
2.
Document 00 43 37: Work Under Contract Report.
3.
Document 00 43 38: Bidder Status Report.
Revised December 1, 2013
Bid Form
00 41 00 - 2
4.
Other information requested and as defined in Article 3.1 and 3.4 D of Document 00
21 13.
C. After Notice of Intent to Award: If Bidder receives a notice of intent to award the
Contract from OWNER after bid opening, Bidder must submit the following documents
to OWNER.
1.
Document 00 52 00: Agreement.
2.
Document 00 61 13: Performance Bond.
3.
Document 00 61 14: Payment Bond.
4.
Document 00 73 10: Applicable Insurance Certificate.
5.
Supplementary Submittals (if applicable):
a. Document 00 54 00: Agreement Supplement.
b. Document 00 54 15 Value Program Supplemental Agreement.
c. Document 00 54 16: Qualified Health Insurance Supplemental Agreement.
D. At the preconstruction meeting: If the Documents noted below are included in the
project manual, Bidder must submit the following documents to OWNER.
1.
Section 3 Business Certification (Document 00 43 42).
2.
Current Employee Information (Document 00 43 43).
E. Prior to Final Payment: If the Document noted below is included in the project manual
CONTRACTOR must submit the following document to OWNER.
1.
1.6
Section 3 Report Form (Document 00 43 44).
DEFINITIONS
A. Bid Documents: The Bid Documents consist of the Invitation to Bid, the Instructions to
Bidders, any Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, this Bid form, any supplements (or
post-bid supplements), the Bid Schedule, any data listed by and limited to the provisions
in the Geotechnical Data Document, and the Bid Bond.
B. Bid Bond: AIA Document A310 as published by the American Institute of Architects,
1736 N. Y. Ave. N. W. Washington, D.C. 20006 or one substantially the same and
acceptable to OWNER.
C. HUD: United States Department of Housing and Urban Development.
PART 2
2.1
COVENANTS
BIDDER TO ENTER INTO AN AGREEMENT
A. In General: Bidder agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into a Construction Contract
with OWNER to perform and furnish all Work specified or indicated in the Contract
Documents at the Contract Time and Contract Price identified in the Agreement
(Document 00 52 00).
Revised December 1, 2013
Bid Form
00 41 00 - 3
B. Agreement Supplement: If it becomes necessary to further define the Work, Contract
Price, Contract Time, or some other portion of the Construction Contract before signing
the Agreement (Document 00 52 00), ENGINEER shall prepare an Agreement
Supplement (Document 00 54 00) describing such change. OWNER shall have sole
discretion in determining the necessity of preparing such a contract modification. If the
Agreement Supplement is acceptable to Bidder, Bidder shall execute the Agreement
Supplement before or concurrently with the execution of the Agreement (Document 00
52 00).
C. If Bidder was awarded the Construction Contract in part as a result of OWNER’s ValueBased Procurement Program, Bidder shall enter into a Value Program Supplemental
Agreement (Document 00 54 15) with OWNER concurrently with its execution of the
Agreement (Document 00 52 00).
D. If Bidder was awarded the Construction Contact in part as a result of OWNER’s
Qualified Health Insurance program, Bidder shall enter into a Qualified Health Insurance
Supplemental Agreement (Document 00 54 16) with OWNER concurrently with its
execution of the Agreement (Document 00 52 00).
2.2
BIDDER ACCEPTS TERMS AND CONDITIONS
A. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Documents, including without
limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security.
B. Bidder must pick up, sign, and submit, the required number of copies of the Agreement
(Document 00 52 00) with the Bonds and other documents required by the Agreement
within 10 days (or such longer period of time that OWNER in its discretion may allow)
after the date of OWNER's Notice of Intent to Award the Construction Contract.
2.3
REPRESENTATION OF BIDDER
A. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents, as more fully set forth in the Instructions To
Bidders (Document 00 21 13), that:
1.
Nature of the Work: Bidder has become familiar with the nature and extent of the
Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and
Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing
of the Work.
2.
Surface and Subsurface Conditions: Bidder has studied carefully all reports and
drawings of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions that are
identified in the Geotechnical Data (Document 00 31 32) (if any).
3.
Underground Utilities: Bidder has reviewed and checked all information and data
shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site.
4.
Bidder Investigation: Bidder has correlated the results of all observations,
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies with the terms
and conditions of the Contract Documents.
5.
Discrepancy Resolutions: Bidder has given ENGINEER written notice of all
conflicts, errors, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Contract
Revised December 1, 2013
Bid Form
00 41 00 - 4
Documents and acknowledges that all written resolutions thereof issued by
ENGINEER before Bid opening, are acceptable to Bidder.
2.4
OWNER'S RIGHTS AT BID AWARD
A. Bidder agrees that OWNER has the right to reject this Bid or to award the Work or any
part thereof to the undersigned at the prices stipulated. Bidder agrees to make no claim
for damages for such rejection or award.
B. If the Bid is rejected, then the Bid security shall be returned to Bidder.
C. If the Bid is accepted, OWNER shall notify Bidder of OWNER's intent to award the
Construction Contract to Bidder. Bidder shall have 10 days (or such longer period of
time that OWNER in its discretion may allow) to sign and return the Agreement
(Document 00 52 00) to ENGINEER. If Bidder fails to sign the Agreement, the Bid
security, at OWNER's option, shall be claimed and cashed and the amount thereof paid
to OWNER as liquidated damages for the failure of Bidder to comply with the terms of
the Bid.
D. Bidder agrees that the Bid may be rejected if the submittals listed in this Document or
the Notice of Intent to Award are not submitted within the time listed in the Notice of
Intent to Award (or described in paragraph 2.4C hereof).
2.5
NON-COLLUSION; ETHICS
A. Bidder represents that the Bid is genuine. The Bid is not made in the interest of or on
behalf of any undisclosed person, firm, or corporation.
B. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a
false or sham Bid.
C. Bidder has not solicited or induced any person, firm, or corporation to refrain from
bidding.
D. Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any other advantage over any
separate Bidder or over OWNER.
E. REPRESENTATION REGARDING ETHICAL STANDARDS FOR CITY
OFFICERS AND EMPLOYEES AND FORMER CITY OFFICERS AND
EMPLOYEES
Bidder represents that it has not:
1.
Provided an illegal gift or payoff to a City officer or employee or former City
officer or employee, or his or her relative or business entity.
2.
Retained any person to solicit or secure this contract upon an agreement or
understanding for a commission, percentage, or brokerage or contingent fee,
other than bona fide employees or bona fide commercial selling agencies for
the purpose of securing business.
3.
Knowingly breached any of the ethical standards set forth in the City's conflict
of interest ordinance, Chapter 2.44, Salt Lake City Code; or
4.
Knowingly influenced, and hereby promises that it will not knowingly
influence, a City officer or employee or former City officer or employee to
Revised December 1, 2013
Bid Form
00 41 00 - 5
breach any of the ethical standards set forth in the City's conflict of interest
ordinance, Chapter 2.44, Salt Lake City Code.
2.6
BID PRICING
A. Bidder will complete the Work for the prices listed in the Bid Schedule (Document 00
43 00). Bidder agrees that quantities for Unit Price Work are not guaranteed. (Refer to
Article 11.7 of the General Conditions (Document 00 72 00)).
2.7
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, PROJECT COMPLETION, AND LIQUIDATED
DAMAGES
A. Bidder agrees that the Work will be Substantially Complete and ready for Final
Inspection on or before the expiration of the Contract Time indicated in the Agreement
(Document 00 52 00).
B. Bidder agrees that the Work will be complete and ready for final payment in accordance
with Article 14.9 of the General Conditions (Document 00 72 00) on or before the
expiration of the Punch List Time indicated in the Agreement.
C. Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement (Document 00 52 00) as to liquidated
damages in the event of failure to complete the Work on time and in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EFFECTIVE DATE
A. Bidder executes this Bid and declares it to be in effect as of the _____ day of _______________________________________________, 20 _____.
3.2
BIDDER'S SUBSCRIPTION
A. Bidder's Signature:
B. Please print Bidder's name here:
C. Title:
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised December 1, 2013
Bid Form
00 41 00 - 6
DOCUMENT 00 43 00
BID SCHEDULE
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
DOCUMENT INCLUDES
A. Price schedules.
1.2
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
Job No. 652306
1.3
REFERENCES
A. APWA Section 01 29 00: Payment Procedures.
B. Document 00 52 00: Agreement.
PART 2
2.1
GENERAL
Base Bid – Entire Scope of Work:
$
END OF DOCUMENT
Bid Schedule
00 43 00 - 1
DOCUMENT 00 43 36
PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTOR FORM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
BIDDER
A. Name:
Address:
B. Telephone Number:
1.2
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
Job No. 652306
PART 2 REPORT
2.1
SUBCONTRACTOR AND SUPPLIER REPORT
A. Failure of Bidder to specify a Subcontractor for any portion of the Work constitutes an
agreement by Bidder that Bidder is fully qualified to perform that portion and that Bidder
shall perform that portion. See Instructions to Bidders (Document 00 21 13, paragraph
3.4B for additional information concerning the subcontractors and the nature and extent
of any work that must be listed on this form.
B. Bidder will be fully responsible to OWNER for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors
and Suppliers and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as Bidder is
for the acts and omissions of persons employed by Bidder directly.
C. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship
between any Subcontractor or Supplier and OWNER. Bidder agrees that each
subcontract with Bidder's Subcontractor will disclaim any third party or direct
relationship between OWNER and any Subcontractor or Supplier.
D. The names and addresses of the Subcontractors and Suppliers who will work under the
terms of the Contract Documents and the estimated dollar amount of each subcontract, as
appropriate, are set forth in the following tables.
Revised February 11, 2013
Proposed Subcontractor Form
00 43 36 - 1
SUBCONTRACTORS
Nature and Extent of
Work to be Subcontracted
Name
Amount
1.
2.
3.
Total $ ________________
Percent of Total Contract _________%
SUPPLIERS
Nature and Extent of
Work to be Subcontracted
Name
Amount
1.
2.
3.
4.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EFFECTIVE DATE
A. Bidder executes this Subcontractor and Supplier report and declares it to be a
supplement to the Bid (Document 00 41 00) and in effect as of
_____________________________, 20___
3.2
BIDDER'S SUBSCRIPTION
A. Bidder's signature:
B. Please print Bidder's name here:
C. Title:
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised February 11, 2013
Proposed Subcontractor Form
00 43 36 - 2
DOCUMENT 00 43 37
WORK UNDER CONTRACT REPORT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
BIDDER
A. Name:
Address:
B. Telephone Number:
1.2
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
Job No. 652306
PART 2 REPORT
2.1
STATUS OF WORK UNDER CONTRACT
A. The completion and submission to OWNER of the following table by Bidder is required
within 7 calendar days after ENGINEER’s request per Article 3.1 of the Instructions to
Bidders (Document 00 21 13). OWNER may declare Bidder non-responsive if this
report is not submitted on time.
B.
The successful Bidder is required to notify OWNER in writing of any new contracts
awarded before the execution of the Construction Contract.
STATUS OF WORK UNDER CONTRACT
Description of Contract
And for Whom Performed
Date of
Award
Contract
Scheduled
Dollar
Amount of
Percent
Completion
Completion Amount
Contract
Complete
Date
Date
Outstanding
1
2
3
4
Revised July 7, 2008
Work Under Contract Report
00 43 37 - 1
Description of Contract
And for Whom Performed
Date of
Award
Contract
Scheduled
Dollar
Amount of
Percent
Completion
Completion Amount
Contract
Complete
Date
Date
Outstanding
5
6
7
8
9
10
Total of Dollar Amount Outstanding $____________________________
CONTRACTOR’s Bid for this Project $____________________________
TOTAL $____________________________
C.
Add supplemental sheets if necessary to account for all work under contract.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EFFECTIVE DATE
A. Bidder executes this Work Under Contract Report and declares it to be a supplement to
the Bid (Document 00 41 00) and in effect as of
_____________________________, 20____.
3.2
BIDDER'S SUBSCRIPTION
A. Bidder's signature:
B. Please print Bidder's name here:
C. Title:
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised July 7, 2008
Work Under Contract Report
00 43 37 - 2
DOCUMENT 00 43 38
BIDDER STATUS REPORT
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
BIDDER
A. Name:
B. Address:
C. Telephone number:
1.2
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
Job No. 652306
PART 2
2.1
REPORT
BIDDER STATUS REPORT
A. Bidder affirms that the following information is true and correct.
1.
Number of employees: ____________________
2.
Bidder's firm is: (check all of the following that are applicable)
[___] Independently owned and operated.
[___] An affiliate of*
[___] A subsidiary of*
[___] A division of*
[___] A business with gross revenue in excess of
$________________________
[___] A business with gross revenue below
$ _______________________
*
PARENT COMPANY:
Name:
Address:
Telephone Number: ________________________
Facsimile Number: ________________________
Revised July 7, 2008
Bidder Status Report
00 43 38 - 1
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EFFECTIVE DATE
A. Bidder executes this status report and declares it to be a supplement to the Bid Form
(Document 00 41 00) and in effect as of _________________________, 20 ____.
3.2
BIDDER'S SUBSCRIPTION
A. Bidder's Signature:
B. Please print Bidder's name here:
C. Title:
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised July 7, 2008
Bidder Status Report
00 43 38 - 2
DOCUMENT 00 52 00
AGREEMENT
This Agreement is dated as of the date that the City Recorder attests the applicable City signature
(which date shall be the recordation date, and is between Salt Lake City Corporation, a Utah
municipal corporation, 349 South 200 East, Suite 100, P.O. Box 145506, Salt Lake City, Utah
84114-5506 (OWNER or City) and the following entity (CONTRACTOR)
Name:
Address:
Telephone number:
Facsimile number:
For valuable consideration, the receipt of which the parties acknowledge, OWNER and
CONTRACTOR agree to the following.
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A. Words used in this Agreement, in any Qualified Health Insurance Supplemental
Agreement (Document 00 54 16), in any Value Program Supplemental Agreement
(Document 00 54 15), and in any Supplemental Agreement (00 54 00) related hereto that
are defined in Document 00 72 00 in the current edition of the Manual of Standard
Specifications published by the Utah Chapter of the American Public Works Association
shall have meaning as defined therein.
1.2
WORK
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide the construction and services specified in the Drawing
and Specifications in the Construction Contract known as:
Name:
Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
Number:
652306
B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with its obligations under the Contract Documents.
1.3
ENGINEER
A. Jeff Sokol is OWNER’s representative and agent who has the rights, authority, and
duties assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents.
1.4
ASSIGNMENT NOT BINDING WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT
A. No assignment of any right or interest in the Construction Contract shall be made
without written consent of OWNER and CONTRACTOR. No assignment will release
or discharge OWNER or CONTRACTOR from any duty or responsibility under the
Revised March 15, 2013
Agreement
00 52 00 - 1
Construction Contract unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to
an assignment.
B. CONTRACTOR shall make no assignment of money that is due without OWNER's
written consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by
Law or Regulation).
1.5
BINDING TERMS
A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and
legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal
representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the
Construction Contract.
1.6
REPRESENTATION REGARDING ETHICAL STANDARDS FOR CITY
OFFICERS AND EMPLOYEES AND FORMER CITY OFFICERS AND
EMPLOYEES
A. CONTRACTOR represents that it has not:
1.
Provided an illegal gift or payoff to a City officer or employee or former City
officer or employee, or his or her relative or business entity.
2.
Retained any person to solicit or secure this contract upon an agreement or
understanding for a commission, percentage, or brokerage or contingent fee,
other than bona fide employees or bona fide commercial selling agencies for
the propose of securing business.
3.
Knowingly breached any of the ethical standards set forth in City's conflict of
interest ordinance, Chapter 2.44, Salt Lake City Code; or
4.
Knowingly influenced, and hereby promises that it will not knowingly
influence, a City officer or employee or former City officer or employee to
breach any of the ethical standards set forth in City's conflict of interest
ordinance, Chapter 2.44, Salt Lake City Code.
PART 2 TIME AND MONEY CONSIDERATIONS
2.1
CONTRACT PRICE
A. The Contract Price includes the cost of the Work specified in the Contract Documents,
plus the cost of all bonds, insurance, permits, and fees, and all charges, expenses, and
assessments of whatever kind or character.
B. The Schedules of Prices awarded from the Bid Schedule (Document 00 43 00) are as
follows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Revised March 15, 2013
Agreement
00 52 00 - 2
C. An Agreement Supplement (Document 00 54 00) [ ____ ] is, [ ____ ] is not attached to
this Agreement.
D. A Qualified Health Insurance Supplemental Agreement (Document 00 54 16) [ __ ] is, [
___ ] is not attached to this Agreement.
E. A Value Program Supplemental Agreement (Document 00 54 15) [
not attached to this Agreement.
F.
2.2
] is [
] is
Based upon the above-awarded schedules and the Agreement Supplement (if any), the
Contract Price awarded is:
dollars and
cents ($
).
CONTRACT TIME
A. Contract Time shall:
1.
Be 75 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed; or
2.
Terminate at mid-night of the --- day of
----------
, 20 -- .
B. Any time specified in work sequences in the Summary of Work (Section 01 11 00) shall
be a part of the Contract Time.
2.3
PUNCH LIST TIME
A. CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work within 15 days after CONTRACTOR receives
ENGINEER's Final Inspection Punch List unless ENGINEER grants additional time in
writing or an exception has been specified in the Contract Documents.
B. Permitting CONTRACTOR to continue and finish the Work or any part of the Work
after the time fixed for its completion, or after the date to which the time for completion
may have been extended, whether or not a new completion date is established, shall in no
way operate as a waiver on the part of OWNER of any of OWNER's rights.
2.4
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
A. CONTRACTOR agrees that OWNER will suffer damage or financial loss if the Work is
not completed within the Contract Time, if sequenced work is not completed on time, or
if public services are interrupted. CONTRACTOR and OWNER agree that the exact
amount of damage or loss is difficult to determine.
B. OWNER shall be entitled to deduct and retain liquidated damages out of any money that
may be due or become due CONTRACTOR. To the extent liquidated damages exceed
any amounts due CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall be liable for such amounts
and shall return such amounts to OWNER.
C. Instead of requiring proof of damage or specific financial loss, CONTRACTOR shall
pay the following sums to OWNER as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Such
liquidated damages shall relate only to the additional administrative costs and expenses
incurred by OWNER and shall not prevent OWNER from pursuing other remedies or
collecting actual damages for damage or loss other than administrative costs and
expenses.
Revised March 15, 2013
Agreement
00 52 00 - 3
1.
Late Completion: Five Hundred
dollars
and zero cents ($500.00) for each day or part thereof that expires after the Contract
Time until the Work is Substantially Complete as provided in Article 14.5 of the
General Conditions (Document 00 72 00).
2.
Late Punch List Time Completion: 50 percent of the amount specified for Late
Contract Time Completion for each day or part thereof that the Work remains
incomplete after the Punch List Time. The Punch List shall be considered received
by CONTRACTOR on the day it is transmitted by facsimile or hand delivery or the
day it is received by registered or certified mail.
3.
Work Sequence Completion: If a Work sequence is specified, then for each day or
part thereof that exceeds the specified time and until ENGINEER determines that
such Work sequence is Substantially Complete, CONTRACTOR shall pay the
following sums to OWNER.
a. Work Sequence 1: N/A
dollars
and
cents ($
) per day.
b. Work Sequence 2: N/A
dollars
and
cents ($
) per day.
c. Work Sequence 3: N/A
dollars
and
cents ($
) per day.
d. Work Sequence 4: N/A
dollars
and
cents ($
) per day.
e. Work Sequence 5: N/A
dollars
and
4.
5.
cents ($
) per day.
Survey Monuments: $1,000.00 if a land survey monument is disturbed or moved
and ENGINEER's surveyor has not referenced the survey monument for resetting.
Interruption of Public Services: No interruption of public services shall be caused
by CONTRACTOR, its agents, or employees, without ENGINEER’s prior written
approval.
Revised March 15, 2013
Agreement
00 52 00 - 4
2.5
RETAINAGE
A. Retainage is at OWNER's Option: OWNER may, in its sole discretion, retain and
withhold up to five percent of any payment due to CONTRACTOR under the
Construction Contract, but the total retention may not exceed five percent of the total
Contract Price. If, in ENGINEER's opinion, the Work is proceeding in accordance with
CONTRACTOR's approved progress schedule, and all progress schedule submittals are
current and up to date, and all required payrolls, Shop Drawings, and miscellaneous
submittals are current and up to date, OWNER may choose not to withhold retainage.
1.
Payments: At any time after 50 percent of the Work has been completed and if
$50,000 or more has been retained, OWNER may make any of the remaining
progress payments in full if, in OWNER's sole discretion, the Work is progressing
satisfactorily. While CONTRACTOR is carrying on the Work, OWNER may pay
monthly the balance not retained as aforesaid, after deducting all previous payments
and all sums to be kept or retained under the provisions of the Construction
Contract. No such payment shall be required to be made when, in the judgment of
ENGINEER, the Work is not proceeding in accordance with the Contract
Documents or when in ENGINEER's judgment the total value of the Work done
since the last estimate amounts to less than $300. No such payment shall be
construed to be an acceptance of any defective or improper Work or materials.
2.
Reducing the Retainage: As the Work nears completion and solely at
ENGINEER's discretion, OWNER may reduce the retainage to an amount more in
line with the Work actually remaining.
B. Interest: Any money retained by OWNER shall be placed in an interest-bearing account
held by OWNER as of the date such money would have otherwise been payable. The
interest accrued thereon shall be for the benefit of CONTRACTOR.
C. Release of Retainage and Interest: Any retained moneys and any accrued interest
thereon shall be released to CONTRACTOR pursuant to a billing statement from
CONTRACTOR within 45 days after the later of: (1) the date that OWNER receives the
billing statement from CONTRACTOR; (2) the date that a certificate of occupancy or
final acceptance notice is issued to CONTRACTOR or OWNER; (3) the date that
OWNER (or other authorized building inspector) does not issue a certificate of
occupancy but permits partial or complete occupancy of a newly constructed or
remodeled building at the Project; or (4) the date that CONTRACTOR accepts the final
pay quantities.
D. Other Retainage: Notwithstanding paragraph 2.5A: (1) if CONTRACTOR is in default
or breach of the terms and conditions of the Construction Contract, OWNER may
withhold from payment for as long as reasonably necessary an amount necessary to cure
the breach or default of CONTRACTOR; or (2) if the Project or a portion of the Project
has been substantially completed, OWNER may retain until completion up to twice the
fair market value of the Work of CONTRACTOR that has not been completed in
accordance with the Construction Contract.
Revised March 15, 2013
Agreement
00 52 00 - 5
2.6
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Progress Payments: CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in
accordance with Part 14 of the General Conditions (Document 00 72 00). Payment shall
not become due or payable for any contract item not provided or installed by
CONTRACTOR. As work is performed, OWNER shall pay money due to
CONTRACTOR.
1.
Withholding Payment: OWNER reserves the right to withhold payment from
CONTRACTOR for non-compliance with any provision of the Contract
Documents.
2.
Price Adjustments: OWNER will consider making partial payment to
CONTRACTOR for certain non-conforming work in advance of any negotiated
settlement reached between CONTRACTOR and OWNER, provided
CONTRACTOR requests in writing that this be done. CONTRACTOR agrees that
any such payments made by OWNER are "payments in advance" and that any
money that becomes due when the final settlement is negotiated will not constitute
payments "withheld" or "retained" under State law.
B. Final Payment: After completion of all Work and Punch List items, OWNER shall pay
the Contract Price due after deducting all previous payments, unit price quantity
adjustments, penalties, liquidated damages, and other amounts to be retained. All prior
progress payments shall be subject to correction in the final payment. The final payment
shall not be due and payable until 30 days after approval of the request for final payment
by OWNER's finance department.
2.7
1.
Submittal: Final payment shall not be made until CONTRACTOR has delivered
and ENGINEER has accepted all submittals specified in Article 14.8 of the General
Conditions (Document 00 72 00).
2.
OWNER Released From Claims: The payment and acceptance of the final
Contract Price due and the adjustment and payment for any Work done in
accordance with any alterations of the same shall release OWNER from any and all
claims of CONTRACTOR on account of Work performed under the Contract
Documents or any Modification thereof, except for those claims specifically agreed
to by OWNER as reserved and unresolved.
EXTRA WORK
A. No money will be paid to CONTRACTOR for any additions, deletions, or revisions in
the Work as stipulated in Article 10.1 of the General Conditions (Document 00 72 00),
unless a contract Modification for such has been made in writing and executed by
OWNER and CONTRACTOR.
Revised March 15, 2013
Agreement
00 52 00 - 6
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EFFECTIVE DATE
A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR executed this Agreement and declared it in effect as of
the day and year first written above.
3.2
CONTRACTOR'S SUBSCRIPTION AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
A.
Name of organization:
B.
Type of organization:
(Corporation, partnership, limited liability company, individual, etc.)
C.
CONTRACTOR's Utah license number:
D.
CONTRACTOR's signature:
E.
Please print name here:
F.
Title:
G.
Business Entity Acknowledgement:
STATE OF UTAH
)
: ss.
COUNTY OF SALT LAKE )
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this _____ day of
______________, 201 , by _______________________________, the
[Name of signer]
__________________ of ______________________________, a _____________
[Title of signer]
[Name of entity]
.
[State where organized and type of entity]
____________________________________
NOTARY PUBLIC
Residing at
My Commission Expires:
Notary’s Seal
_____________________
Revised March 15, 2013
Agreement
00 52 00 - 7
H. Individual Acknowledgement:
STATE OF UTAH
COUNTY OF
)
: ss.
)
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this
day of
, 20
by
, an
individual.
Notary’s signature
Residing at
My commission expires:
I.
3.3
Notary’s seal
Signature Authority: At the request of OWNER, evidence satisfactory to OWNER
shall be submitted that shows that the person executing this Agreement has the required
authority to execute this Agreement. For a corporation such evidence will be in the
bylaws or a resolution of the board of directors. For a limited liability company such
evidence will be in the operating agreement.
OWNER'S SUBSCRIPTION AND ATTESTATION
A. Approval as to form:
(OWNER's attorney)
B. Approval as to budget:
(OWNER's financial officer)
C. OWNER's signature:
D. Name and Title:
E. Attest:
(Signature of City recorder or City recorder designee)
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised March 15, 2013
Agreement
00 52 00 - 8
DOCUMENT 00 54 15
VALUE PROGRAM SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENT INCLUDES
A. Changes negotiated between Bidder / Contractor and OWNER that will be incorporated
into the Construction Contract by reference.
1.2
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
Job No. 652306
1.3 PRACTICES TO BE MAINTAINED
A. As part of its bid, CONTRACTOR offered to OWNER the following practices as
practices enhancing its work environment and CONTRACTOR shall maintain such
practices in its work environment for the entire term of this Contract, including any
extensions or renewals: [Specifier: check the appropriate boxes].
Work practice
1.
2.
3.
Nondiscrimination. CONTRACTOR has adopted and will
maintain during the full term of the Contract a written company
policy stating that it will not discriminate against any employee or
applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex,
national origin, or sexual orientation (defined in the policy to mean
being lesbian, gay, transgender, bisexual, or heterosexual).
Yes No
□
□
Apprenticeship Programs: CONTRACTOR conducted an
apprenticeship during the twelve (12) months prior to submitting
its bid in connection with this Contract that was consistent with the
requirements of Utah Code Title 35A, Chapter 6 and the
requirements of the U.S. Department of Labor Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training, and CONTRACTOR will maintain
its apprenticeship program during the full term of this Contract.
Yes No
□
□
Drug Testing: CONTRACTOR has adopted and implemented a
written company policy creating a drug-testing program for preemployment, and for testing based on “cause,” consistent with the
requirements stated in Utah Code Title 34, Chapter 38 (private
employees), Title 34, Chapter 41 (local government), or Title 67,
Chapter 19 (state), as applicable, and CONTRACTOR will
maintain such implemented policy during the full term of this
Contract.
Yes No
□
□
Value Program Supplemental Agreement
00 54 15 - 1
4.
Does the Bidder (i) have a fixed office or distribution point within
Salt Lake City boundaries, (ii) possess a Salt Lake City business
license stating a Salt Lake City address, (iii) employ no more than
thirty (30) full-time employees (meaning employees working at
least forty (40) hours per week for fifty (50) weeks per year), and
(iv) have annual gross revenues not in excess of $1 million (must
meet all four requirements to respond “yes”)?
Yes No
□
1.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
A. CONTRACTOR received the award of the Construction Contract in part because
CONTRACTOR offered to OWNER practices in CONTRACTOR’s work environment
that complied with the following sections of Salt Lake City Procurement Rules Section
19.4: [Specifier: check the appropriate boxes]
Work practice
Yes No
1.
Paragraph 19.4A – Policy of Nondiscrimination Factor
□
□
2.
Paragraph 19.4B – State-Compliant Apprenticeship Program
Factor
□
□
3.
Paragraph 19.4C – Pre-employment and “For Cause” Drug Testing
Program Factor
□
□
4.
Paragraph 19.4D – Local Small Business Factor
□
□
B. Program Benefit: CONTRACTOR agrees that OWNER paid to receive the benefit of
CONTRACTOR’s work environment practices in an amount not less than
_____________________________________________ ($_________________) (the
“Program Benefit”), being the amount by which CONTRACTOR’s bid exceeded the
lowest bid considered for award, plus Two Thousand Five Hundred Dollars ($2,500),
being a reasonable estimate of the value of OWNER’s time to administer the
requirements of Chapter 19 that benefited CONTRACTOR.
C. CONTRACTOR shall pay to OWNER the Program Benefit as liquidated damages, and
not as a penalty, if CONTRACTOR fails to maintain all of the factors checked “yes” in
Article 1.4A for entire term of the Construction Contract.
D. OWNER may collect any liquidated damages payable to OWNER from any sum that
OWNER may owe CONTRACTOR, and may recover such damages from any Payment
Bond (Document 00 61 14) or other security provided by CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
Value Program Supplemental Agreement
00 54 15 - 2
□
PART 2
2.1
EXECUTION
EFFECTIVE DATE
A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR executed this Agreement and declared it in effect as of
the ________ day of _______________________________________, 20 _____.
2.2
CONTRACTOR'S SUBSCRIPTION AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
A. Name of organization:
B. Type of Organization:
(Corporation, partnership, limited liability company, individual, etc.)
C. CONTRACTOR's Utah license number:
D. CONTRACTOR's signature:
E. Please print name here:
F.
Title:
G. Business Entity Acknowledgement:
STATE OF UTAH
)
: ss.
COUNTY OF SALT LAKE )
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this _____ day of
______________, 20 , by _______________________________, the
[Name of signer]
__________________ of ______________________________, a _____________
[Title of signer]
[Name of entity]
.
[State where organized and type of entity]
____________________________________
NOTARY PUBLIC
Notary’s Seal
Residing at
My Commission Expires:
_____________________
Value Program Supplemental Agreement
00 54 15 - 3
H. Individual Acknowledgement:
STATE OF UTAH
)
: ss.
)
COUNTY OF
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this
________________________, 20
day of
, by
,
an individual.
Notary’s signature
Residing at
Notary’s seal
My commission expires:
I.
2.3
Signature Authority: At the request of OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall submit to
OWNER evidence satisfactory to OWNER that shows that the person executing this
Agreement has the required authority to execute this Agreement. For a corporation such
evidence will be in the bylaws or a resolution of the board of directors. For a limited
liability company such evidence will be in the operating agreement.
OWNER'S SUBSCRIPTION AND ATTESTATION
A. Approval as to form:
(OWNER's attorney)
B. Approval as to budget:
(OWNER's financial officer)
C. OWNER's signature:
D. Name and Title:
E. Attest:
(Signature of City Recorder or City Recorder designee)
END OF DOCUMENT
Value Program Supplemental Agreement
00 54 15 - 4
DOCUMENT 00 61 13
PERFORMANCE BOND
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 BOND
A. Number:
______________________________.
B. Amount:
dollars ($ ______________).
1.2 SURETY
A. Name:
B. Address:
C. Telephone number: _____________________________.
D. Facsimile number:
_____________________________.
1.3 CONTRACTOR
A. Name:
B. Address:
C. Telephone number: _____________________________.
D. Facsimile number:
_____________________________.
1.4 OWNER
A. Salt Lake City Corporation, a Utah municipal corporation, 349 South 200 East, Suite 100,
Salt Lake City, P.O. Box 145506, Salt Lake City, Utah 84114-5506.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
Job No. 652306
1.6 DEFINED TERMS
A. Terms used in this Performance Bond which are defined in Article 1.1 of the General
Conditions (Document 00 72 00) will have the meanings indicated in the General
Conditions.
Revised February 23, 2009
Performance Bond
00 61 13 - 1
PART 2 COVENANTS
2.1 SURETY'S AND CONTRACTOR'S RELATIONSHIP
A. The Surety, as surety, and the CONTRACTOR, as principal, jointly and severally, bind
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the OWNER,
as obligee, for the performance of the Construction Contract.
B. If the CONTRACTOR performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the
CONTRACTOR shall have no obligation under this Bond; otherwise this Bond shall
remain in full force and effect.
2.2 NOTICE
A. Notice to the Surety, the OWNER, or the CONTRACTOR shall be sent by registered or
certified mail, postage prepaid, by facsimile, by hand delivery, or by overnight delivery
service for which a delivery receipt is required, to the address shown on this Bond.
B. Notices sent as provided in Section 2.2A shall be effective on the date on which such
notice was sent.
C. Notice may be sent by facsimile. Facsimile notice shall be effective on the date of
transmission provided that a confirmation establishing the successful transmission of the
notice is sent by first-class mail, postage prepaid, along with a copy of the notice
transmitted, no later than twenty-four (24) hours after the facsimile notice is transmitted.
D. If any notice requires a period of less than seven (7) days for response, the notice shall be
sent by facsimile.
E. If the time for response to any notice expires on a Saturday, Sunday, or a legal holiday in
the State of Utah, the time shall be extended to the next business day.
2.3 PROCEDURE TO INVOKE SURETY'S OBLIGATION
A. If the CONTRACTOR fails to perform any of its obligations under the Construction
Contract, and such failure to perform has not been waived by the OWNER, the OWNER
may notify the CONTRACTOR and the Surety, at their addresses described above, that
the CONTRACTOR is in default, and may formally terminate the CONTRACTOR’s right
to perform its obligations under the Construction Contract.
B. If the Construction Contract is terminated, the OWNER shall pay the unpaid Balance of
the Contract Price to the Surety for completion of the Work in accordance with the terms
of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected by the Surety to perform the Work
in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract.
2.4 SURETY'S OPTIONS AT CONTRACTOR TERMINATION
A. Surety Completes the Work: The Surety may undertake to perform and complete the
Work itself, through its agents, or through independent contractors.
B. Surety Obtains Bids or Proposals: The Surety may obtain bids or negotiated proposals
from qualified contractors acceptable to the OWNER for a contract for performance and
completion of the Work.
Revised February 23, 2009
Performance Bond
00 61 13 - 2
1. Such bids or proposals shall be prepared by the Surety for execution by the OWNER
and the completion contractor selected.
2. The Surety shall secure the contract with performance and payment bonds executed by
a qualified surety equivalent to this Bond and the payment bond (Document 00 61
14).
3. The Surety shall pay to the OWNER the amount of damages as described in Section
2.6 in excess of the balance of the Contract Price incurred by the OWNER resulting
from the CONTRACTOR's default.
C. Surety to Pay OWNER: The Surety may determine the amount, not to exceed the amount
of this Bond specified in Section 1.1B, for which the Surety believes it may be liable to
pay, and tender payment therefore to the OWNER. The OWNER has sole discretion to
accept payment.
2.5 PROCEDURE FOR OWNER TO DECLARE SURETY IN DEFAULT
A. The OWNER may declare the Surety to be in default pursuant to the following
procedures:
1. The OWNER shall issue an additional written notice to the Surety, after declaring the
CONTRACTOR in default as provided in Section 2.3, demanding that the Surety
perform its obligations under this Bond; and
2. The Surety shall respond to the OWNER within 15 days after receipt of the OWNER's
additional notice, either denying the claim or accepting liability and exercising its
options under Section 2.4.
B. If the OWNER declines to accept the payment tendered by the Surety pursuant to Section
2.4(C), or if the Surety has denied the claim in whole or in part, the OWNER, without
further notice, may pursue any remedies available to the OWNER.
2.6 SURETY'S OBLIGATIONS
A. After the OWNER has terminated the CONTRACTOR's right to complete its obligations
under the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to complete the Work under the
Construction Contract as provided in Section 2.4, then the responsibilities of the Surety to
the OWNER shall not be greater than those of the CONTRACTOR under the
Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the OWNER to the Surety shall not be
greater than those of the OWNER under the Construction Contract.
B. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to a commitment by the OWNER to
pay all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the CONTRACTOR under the
Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated, without duplication, for:
1. the responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR for correction of Defective Work and
completion of the Work under the Construction Contract;
2. any additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the
CONTRACTOR's default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety
under Section 2.4; and
3. liquidated damages that are or may become due for any reason.
Revised February 23, 2009
Performance Bond
00 61 13 - 3
2.7 UNRELATED OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR
A. The Surety shall not be liable to the OWNER for obligations of the CONTRACTOR that
are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the balance of the Contract Price shall not
be reduced or changed on account of any such unrelated obligations.
B. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the
OWNER or its heirs, executors, administrators, or successors.
2.8 SURETY WAIVES NOTICE OF ANY CHANGE
A. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of Contract Time, Contract
Price, and scope of Work, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts,
purchase orders, and other obligations.
2.9 VENUE
A. Any suit or action commenced by the OWNER under this Bond shall be in a court of
competent jurisdiction in Salt Lake City, Utah.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EFFECTIVE DATE
A. The Surety and the CONTRACTOR executed this Bond and declared it to be in effect as
of the ______day of _______________________, 2014.
3.2 CONTRACTOR'S SUBSCRIPTION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT
A. Name of organization:
B. Type of organization:
(corporation, partnership, limited liability company, individual, etc.)
C. CONTRACTOR's signature:
D. Print name here:
E. Title:
Revised February 23, 2009
Performance Bond
00 61 13 - 4
F. Business Entity Acknowledgement:
STATE OF UTAH
)
: ss.
COUNTY OF
)
The foregoing performance bond was acknowledged before me this _____ day of
______________, 2014, by _______________________________, the
[Name of signer]
__________________ of ______________________________, a _____________
[Title of signer]
[Name of entity]
[State]
.
[State where organized and type of entity]
NOTARY PUBLIC, residing in
G. Individual Acknowledgement:
STATE OF UTAH
)
: ss.
COUNTY OF
)
The foregoing performance bond was acknowledged before me this
day of
, 20
by
, an
individual.
NOTARY PUBLIC, residing in
Revised February 23, 2009
Performance Bond
00 61 13 - 5
H. Signature Authority: At the request of OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall submit to
OWNER evidence satisfactory to OWNER that shows that the person executing this Bond
has the required authority to execute this Bond. For a corporation such evidence will be in
the bylaws or a resolution of the board of directors. For a limited liability company such
evidence will be in the operating agreement.
3.3 SURETY'S SUBSCRIPTION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT
A. Attach evidence of Surety's corporate authority to sign.
B. Surety's signature:
C. Please print name here:
D. Title:
E. Acknowledgment:
STATE OF UTAH
)
:
COUNTY OF
)
The foregoing performance bond was acknowledged before me this
, 20
by
day of
, the
(Name of signee)
of
(Title of signee)
,
(Name of entity)
a
.
(State where organized and type of entity)
NOTARY PUBLIC, residing in:
My Commission Expires:
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised February 23, 2009
Performance Bond
00 61 13 - 6
DOCUMENT 00 61 14
PAYMENT BOND
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 BOND
A. Number:
______________________________.
B. Amount:
dollars ($ ________________).
1.2 SURETY
A. Name:
B. Address:
C. Telephone number: _____________________________.
D. Facsimile number:
_____________________________.
1.3 CONTRACTOR
A. Name:
B. Address:
C. Telephone number: _____________________________.
D. Facsimile number:
_____________________________.
1.4 OWNER
A.
Salt Lake City Corporation, a Utah municipal corporation, 349 South 200 East, Suite
100, P.O. Box 145506, Salt Lake City Utah 84114-5506.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. Leonardo Improvements – Catering Kitchen
Job No. 652306
1.6 DEFINED TERMS
A.
Terms used in this Payment Bond that are defined in Article 1.1 of the General
Conditions (Document 00 72 00) will have the meanings indicated in the General
Conditions.
Revised February 3, 2014
Payment Bond
00 61 14 - 1
PART 2
COVENANTS
2.1 SURETY's AND CONTRACTOR's RELATIONSHIP
A.
The Surety as surety, and the CONTRACTOR, as principal, jointly and severally, bind
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the
OWNER, as obligee, to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract.
B.
If the CONTRACTOR makes payment for all labor, materials, and equipment furnished
for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, the Surety and the CONTRACTOR shall have no obligation under this Bond; otherwise this Bond shall remain in full
force and effect.
2.2 NOTICE
A.
Notice to the Surety, the OWNER, or the CONTRACTOR shall be sent by registered or
certified mail, postage prepaid, by facsimile, by hand delivery, or by overnight delivery
service for which a delivery receipt is required, to the address shown on this Bond.
B.
Notices sent as provided in Section 2.2A shall be effective on the date on which such
notice was sent.
C.
Notice may be sent by facsimile. Facsimile notice shall be effective on the date of
transmission provided that a confirmation establishing the successful transmission of the
notice is sent by first-class mail, postage prepaid, along with a copy of the notice
transmitted, no later than twenty-four (24) hours after the facsimile notice is transmitted.
D.
If any notice requires a period of less than seven (7) days for response, the notice shall be
sent by facsimile.
E.
If the time for response to any notice expires on a Saturday, Sunday, or a legal holiday in
the State of Utah, the time shall be extended to the next business day.
2.3 CONDITIONS OF SURETY'S LIABILITY
A.
With respect to the OWNER, this Bond shall be null and void if the CONTRACTOR
promptly takes the following actions:
1. makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants; and
2. defends, indemnifies, and saves harmless the OWNER from all claims, demands,
Liens, or suits by any person or entity who furnished labor, materials, or equipment
for use in the performance of the Work, provided the OWNER has tendered defense
of such claims, demands, Liens, or suits to the CONTRACTOR and the Surety.
2.4 PROCEDURE TO INVOKE SURETY'S OBLIGATION
A.
Concerning Claimants who have a Direct Contract with the CONTRACTOR: The
Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond who are employed by or
have a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR until such Claimants have given notice
to the Surety at the address shown on this Bond and have sent a copy, or notice thereof,
to the OWNER, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial
accuracy, stating the amount of the claim.
Revised February 3, 2014
Payment Bond
00 61 14 - 2
B.
Concerning a Claimant who does not have a Direct Contract with the CONTRACTOR: The Surety shall have no obligation to a Claimant under this Bond who does not
have a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR until such Claimant takes the following
actions.
1. The Claimant furnishes written notice to the CONTRACTOR and sends a copy, or
notice thereof, to the OWNER, within 90 days after having last performed labor or
last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial
accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials
were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed;
2. The Claimant either receives a rejection in whole or in part from the
CONTRACTOR, or does not receive within 15 days after furnishing the above notice
any communication from the CONTRACTOR by which the CONTRACTOR
indicates that the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and
3. Not having been paid within the above 15 days, the Claimant sends a written notice
to the Surety at the address described on this Bond and sends a copy, or notice
thereof, to the OWNER stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and
enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the CONTRACTOR.
2.5 SURETY'S OPTION TO SETTLE CLAIMS
A.
When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Section 2.4, the Surety shall promptly
and at the Surety's expense take the following actions:
1. Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the OWNER, within 60 days after
receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for
challenging any amounts that are disputed; and
2. Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.
2.6 SURETY'S OBLIGATION
A.
The Surety's total obligation under this Bond shall not exceed the amount of this Bond,
and the amount of this Bond shall be reduced in the amount of any payments made in
good faith by the Surety.
2.7 UNRELATED OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR
A.
The Surety and the OWNER shall not be liable to Claimants or others for obligations of
the CONTRACTOR that are unrelated to the Construction Contract.
B.
The OWNER shall not be liable for payment of any damages, costs, or expenses of any
Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make
payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under
this Bond.
2.8 SURETY WAIVES NOTICE OF ANY CHANGE
A.
Surety hereby waives notice of any change to the Construction Contract including
changes of Contract Time, Contract Price, and scope of Work, or to related subcontracts,
purchase orders, or other obligations.
Revised February 3, 2014
Payment Bond
00 61 14 - 3
2.9 VENUE
A.
Any suit or action commenced by a Claimant under this Bond shall be in a court of
competent jurisdiction in Salt Lake City, Utah.
2.10 COPIES OF THIS BOND
A.
Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond,
the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall
permit a copy to be made.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 EFFECTIVE DATE
A.
The Surety and the CONTRACTOR executed this Bond and declared it to be in effect as
of the ______day of _______________________, 2014.
3.2 CONTRACTOR'S SUBSCRIPTION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT
A. Name of organization:
B. Type of organization:
(corporation, partnership, limited liability company, individual, etc.)
C. CONTRACTOR's signature:
D. Please print name here:
E. Title:
F. Business Entity Acknowledgement:
STATE OF UTAH
)
: ss.
COUNTY OF
)
The foregoing payment bond was acknowledged before me this _____ day of
______________, 2014, by _______________________________, the
[Name of signer]
__________________ of ______________________________, a _____________
[Title of signer]
[Name of entity]
[State]
.
[State where organized and type of entity]
NOTARY PUBLIC, residing in
Revised February 3, 2014
Payment Bond
00 61 14 - 4
G. Individual Acknowledgement:
STATE OF UTAH
)
: ss.
COUNTY OF
)
The foregoing payment bond was acknowledged before me this
, 20
by
day of
,
an individual.
NOTARY PUBLIC, residing in
My Commission Expires
H. Signature Authority: At the request of OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall submit to
OWNER evidence satisfactory to OWNER that shows that the person executing this Bond
has the required authority to execute this Bond. For a corporation such evidence will be in
the bylaws or a resolution of the board of directors. For a limited liability company such
evidence will be in the operating agreement.
3.3 SURETY'S SUBSCRIPTION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT
A. Attach evidence of Surety's corporate authority to sign.
B. Surety's signature:
C. Print name here:
D. Title:
Revised February 3, 2014
Payment Bond
00 61 14 - 5
E. Acknowledgment:
STATE OF UTAH
)
:
COUNTY OF
)
The foregoing payment bond was acknowledged before me this
, 20
day of
by
, the
(Name of signee)
of
(Title of signee)
,
(Name of entity)
a
.
(State where organized and type of entity)
NOTARY PUBLIC, residing in:
My Commission Expires:
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised February 3, 2014
Payment Bond
00 61 14 - 6
DOCUMENT 00 62 11
SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Form is self-transmittal. Letter of transmittal is not required.
B. Submittals requiring expeditious handling must be submitted individually on Submittal
Transmittal Form.
C. ENGINEER's review of submittals does not release or relieve CONTRACTOR from
complying with all requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.2 ENGINEER'S STAMP
A. Form of the ENGINEER's stamp is as follows:
SUBMITTAL REVIEW
[ ] NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN
[ ] REJECTED
[ ] MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED
[ ] RESUBMIT
[ ] SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM
[ ] DO NOT RESUBMIT
This review is for general conformance with the design concepts of the Work and general
compliance with the Contract Documents and does not constitute an approval or variance.
Corrections or comments, or the failure to make them, on this review does not relieve the
CONTRACTOR from full contract compliance.
The CONTRACTOR is responsible for compliance with all contract provisions, dimensions, sizes,
capacities, fabrication and construction techniques, installation, coordinating work with others, and
performing the Work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
Date: ____________ By: ________________________________________
SALT LAKE CITY ENGINEERING
B. Meaning of ENGINEER's stamp:
1.
No Exceptions Taken: Submittals have been reviewed and no corrections were
noted.
2.
Make Corrections Noted: Submittals that have only minor discrepancies.
Resubmission will not be required unless the stamp is marked "Resubmit".
3.
Submit Specified Item: Submittals that are incomplete or require more than minor
corrections will be annotated to indicate necessary corrections. Resubmit the part of
the submittal showing the corrections.
4.
Rejected: Submittals that are fundamentally in error, cover wrong equipment or
construction, or require extensive corrections.
5.
Resubmit: Submittals that require resubmission. Make corrections required, note
any changes by dating the revisions to correspond with the change require date, and
resubmit the corrected material.
6.
Do Not Resubmit: Submittals that are not necessary to resubmit.
Rev. Sept 25, 2007
Submittal Transmittal Form
00 62 11 - 1
DATE
SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM
Section I
[
] NEW SUBMITTAL
[
] RESUBMITTAL
REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF THE FOLLOWING ITEMS (This section will be initiated by the CONTRACTOR)
TO
FROM
TRANSMITTAL No.
PREVIOUS TRANSMITTAL No.
SPECIFICATION SECTION
NUMBER (See instructions)
CONTRACT TITLE
SUBMITTAL
ITEM
No.
DESCRIPTION OF ITEM SUBMITTED
(Type, size, model number, etc.)
a.
b.
REMARKS
CONTRACT No.
SAMPLE OR
NO. OF
CERTIFICATE
COPIES
(See instructions)
c.
d.
CONTRACT REFERENCE
DOCUMENT
SPEC. PARA. No.
DRAWING
SHEET No.
e.
f.
VARIATION (See
instructions)
(See instructions)
g.
h.
I certify that the above submitted items have been reviewed in detail and are
correct and conform with the contract Drawings and specifications except as
otherwise noted.
_________________________________________________________
NAME AND SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR
Section II
ENGINEER REVIEW
CODE
OWNER'S ACTION This section will be completed by the ENGINEER)
ENCLOSURES RETURNED (List by Item No.)
FORM 00 62 11.1 (Read Instructions on the reverse side prior to initiating this form)
SIGNATURE OF REVIEWING AGENT
DATE
INSTRUCTIONS
1.
TRANSMITTAL No: Number each transmittal consecutively in the space entitled
“Transmittal No.”. This number will identify each submittal.
2.
PREVIOUS TRANSMITTAL No: Mark the box for re-submittal and insert the transmittal
number of last submission as well as the new submittal number in the spaces provided. Each
re-submittal will become a new transmittal.
3.
SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER: Cover only one specification section with each
transmittal.
4.
Column “a”: For each entry on this form, the “SUBMITTAL ITEM No.” will be the same
SUBMITTAL ITEM No. indicated on the Submittal Register (Form 01 33 00).
5.
Column “c”: When a sample of material or Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance is
transmitted, indicate “Sample” or “Certificate”.
6.
Column “g”: CONTRACTOR will place a check mark in the “Variation” column when a
submittal is not in accordance with the plans and specifications – also, a written statement to
that effect shall be included in the space provided for “Remarks” or on a separate page.
7.
Column “h” For each item reviewed, ENGINEER shall assign action codes as follows:
A.
No Exceptions Taken.
B.
Make Corrections Noted. Re-submission not required.
C.
Submit Specified Item.
D.
Rejected.
E.
Re-submit
F.
Do Not Re-submit. Receipt acknowledged.
G.
Will be returned by separate correspondence.
H.
Other (Specify).
END OF SECTION
DOCUMENT 00 62 16
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 PROCEDURE
A. For filing purposes, add Certificates of Insurance to the Contract Documents following
this page.
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised January 10, 2005
Certificate of Insurance
00 62 16 - 1
DOCUMENT 00 65 13
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENT INCLUDES
A. Certificate of Substantial Completion Form.
1. 2 REFERENCES
A. APWA Section 01 78 50 – Closeout Procedures.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When Work or designated portion thereof is Substantially Complete, a notice per
paragraph 1.2A in APWA Section 01 78 50 is to be submitted.
B. The attached form also requests final inspection.
C. ENGINEER's review of notice does not release or relieve CONTRACTOR from
complying with all requirements of the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
Revised Nov. 27, 2006
Certificate of Substantial Completion
00 65 13 – 1
CONTRACTOR'S
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
(and request for Final Inspection)
DATE ___________________________
PROJECT NAME AND NUMBER
PORTION OF WORK COMPLETE
CERTIFICATION
I certify that I,
(name) am
an authorized official of
(company)
working in the capacity of
and have
been duly authorized by said company to make the following statements.
A. As the CONTRACTOR's representative, I do hereby certify by personal knowledge
that all Work or portion of the Work described above has been performed in every
particular in accordance with and conformance to the Contract Documents and that
the Work or portion of the Work is ready for Final Inspection.
B. It is understood that neither the determination of the ENGINEER that the Work is
Substantially Complete, nor the acceptance thereof, shall operate to bar claims
against the CONTRACTOR for non-compliance with the Contract Documents.
I hereby request the ENGINEER accept the Work as being Substantially Complete and schedule the
Final Inspection.
_______________________________________________
Revised Nov. 27, 2006
Certificate of Substantial Completion
00 65 13 – 2
DOCUMENT 00 73 10
MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
(Supplementary Conditions)
This document changes provisions specified in the General Conditions (Document 00 72 00) in the
Manual of Standard Specifications published by the Utah Chapter of the American Public Works
Association.
Add the following paragraphs to Article 2.2
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
B. OWNER shall not furnish to CONTRACTOR published Contract Documents that
include the current edition of the Manual of Standard Plans and the Manual of Standard
Specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall purchase such documents separately.
C. Copies of all Contract Documents including the current edition of the Manual of Standard
Plans and the Manual of Standard Specifications shall be provided on site by the
CONTRACTOR.
Modify paragraph 2.5C
2.5 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
C. Field Office: An on-site field office is not required however, CONTRACTOR shall
provide and maintain a telephone in the field during performance of the Work such that
ENGINEER may always contact CONTRACTOR for transmittal of Plans and
instructions and, for dissemination of project information.
Modify Article 5.1
5.1 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND OTHER BONDS
A. Before OWNER executes the Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall file with OWNER a
good and sufficient Performance Bond (using OWNER’s Document 00 61 13) and a
Payment Bond (using OWNER’s Document 00 61 14), each in the sum of not less than
100 percent of the Contract Price.
B. The Bonds shall be executed by CONTRACTOR and issued by a company duly and
regularly authorized to do a general surety business in the State of Utah and either (i)
named in the current U.S. Treasury Department's listing of approved sureties (Department
Circular 570) (as amended), or (ii) with a current "A-" rating and a financial size category
rating of at least a “VII” or better in A.M. Best Co., Inc.’s Best Insurance Reports,
Property and Casualty Edition.
C. The Performance Bond shall guarantee the faithful performance of the Construction
Contract by CONTRACTOR and the Payment Bond shall guarantee the payment of labor
and materials. The Bonds shall inure by their terms to the benefit of OWNER. Neither
Revised February 10, 2014
Modifications to the General Conditions
00 73 10 - 1
this nor any other provision requiring a Performance Bond shall be construed to create
any rights in any third party Claimant as against OWNER for performance of the Work
under the Construction Contract.
D. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CONTRACTOR is subject to any proceeding
under the Bankruptcy Code (Title 11, United States Code) or becomes insolvent or its
right to do business is terminated in the State of Utah or it ceases to meet the
requirements of this Article, CONTRACTOR shall, within 15 days thereafter, substitute
another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to OWNER.
Modify Article 5.2
5.2 INSURANCE
A. In General:
1.
Any insurance coverage required herein that is written on a “claims made” form
rather than on an “occurrence” form shall (i) provide full prior acts coverage or have
a retroactive date effective before the date of the Agreement, and (ii) be maintained
for a period of at least three (3) years following the end of the term of the Agreement
or contain a comparable “extended discovery” clause. Evidence of current extended
discovery coverage and the purchase options available upon policy termination shall
be provided to OWNER.
2.
All policies of insurance shall be issued by insurance companies licensed to do
business in the state of Utah and either:
a. Currently rated A- or better by A.M. Best Company; and
b. The insurer must also have an A.M. Best Company financial size category rating
of not less than VII.
-ORc. Listed in the United States Treasury Department’s current Listing of Approved
Sureties (Department Circular 570), as amended.
3. CONTRACTOR shall furnish certificates of insurance, acceptable to OWNER,
verifying the foregoing matters concurrent with the execution of the Agreement and
thereafter as required.
4. In the event any work is subcontracted, CONTRACTOR shall require its
subcontractor, at no cost to OWNER, to secure and maintain all minimum insurance
coverages required of CONTRACTOR hereunder. If professional liability insurance
is required by Paragraph 5.2B below, a subcontractor (or supplier) must provide such
insurance only if such subcontractor’s (or supplier’s) product requires the stamp of a
professional engineer.
5. All required certificates and policies shall provide that coverage thereunder shall not be
canceled or modified without providing, in a manner approved by the City Attorney, 30
days prior written notice to OWNER.
Revised February 10, 2014
Modifications to the General Conditions
00 73 10 - 2
6. If any of the policies of insurance required from CONTRACTOR are cancelled or lapse
or if OWNER requests a renewal certificate of insurance showing that the insurance is
currently in force and CONTRACTOR fails to deliver the certificate to OWNER within
15 days after such request, OWNER may, at OWNER’s sole discretion, obtain
substitute coverage at reasonable rates. OWNER may deduct the cost of such insurance
coverage, plus ten percent (10%) for administrative charges, from any monies owing to
CONTRACTOR.
B. Required Insurance Policies: CONTRACTOR, at its own cost, shall secure and
maintain during the term of this Construction Contract, including all renewal terms, the
following minimum insurance coverage:
1. Worker's compensation and employer’s liability insurance sufficient to cover all of
CONTRACTOR’s employees pursuant to Utah law. In the event any work is
subcontracted, CONTRACTOR shall require its subcontractor(s) similarly to provide
worker’s compensation insurance for all of the latter’s employees, unless a waiver of
coverage is allowed and acquired pursuant to Utah law.
a. OWNER should not be an additional insured for worker’s compensation
insurance.
2. Commercial general liability (CGL) insurance with OWNER as an additional insured,
in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 per occurrence with a $2,000,000 general
aggregate and $2,000,000, products and completed operations aggregate. These limits
can be covered either under a CGL insurance policy alone, or a combination of a CGL
insurance policy and an umbrella insurance policy and/or a CGL insurance policy and
an excess insurance policy. (OWNER need not be listed as an additional insured on
umbrella and/or excess insurance, only on the underlying policy). The policy shall
protect OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and any subcontractor from claims for damages for
personal injury, including accidental death, and from claims for property damage that
may arise from Contractor’s operations under the Agreement, whether performed by
CONTRACTOR itself, any subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by
either of them. Such insurance shall provide coverage for premises operations, acts of
independent contractors, and completed operations.
3. Commercial automobile liability insurance that provides coverage for owned, hired,
and non-owned automobiles, in the minimum amount of a combined single limit of
$1,000,000 per occurrence or $500,000 liability per person, $1,000,000 liability per
occurrence, and $250,000 property damage. These limits can be reached either with a
commercial automobile liability insurance policy alone, or with a combination of a
commercial automobile liability insurance policy and an umbrella insurance policy
and/or a commercial automobile liability insurance policy and an excess insurance
policy.
4. Builder's Risk: The Project involves construction that does not require the
CONTRACTOR to provide builder's risk insurance.
Revised February 10, 2014
Modifications to the General Conditions
00 73 10 - 3
Add the following paragraphs to Article 6.7
6.7 PERMITS
H. Salt Lake City Permits: In addition to any other permits required for the Work,
CONTRACTOR shall obtain permits from Salt Lake City Corporation for Work on the
Project.
1. OWNER-Paid Permits: CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for submitting plans,
scheduling inspections and paying all costs incidental to such actions as required for
any permit required by Salt Lake City Corporation. Except for construction water
meter fees, the fees for these permits shall be paid by OWNER and shall not be
included in CONTRACTOR's bid. The following list is not exclusive and does not
relieve CONTRACTOR of the responsibility of obtaining all permits.
a.
From Salt Lake City’s Community & Economic Development Department,
Division of Transportation, 349 South 200 East, Suite 450, Salt Lake City, Utah
84111. Phone 801-535-6630
1. Parking meter bagging and removal permit
2. Street closure permit
3. Traffic control permit
4. Any other applicable Division of Transportation imposed fee
b.
c.
From Salt Lake City’s Department of Public Utilities, 1530 South West Temple
Street, Salt Lake City, Utah 84115
1.
UPDES storm drain water discharge permit for sites 1 to 5 acres
2.
All applicable water, fire, sewer and storm drainage impact and connection
fees
3.
¾ inch meter permit for new and existing drinking fountain
From Salt Lake City Building Services and Licensing, 451 South State Street,
Salt Lake City, Utah 84111. Phone 801-535-7751
1. Building, plumbing, mechanical, electrical permit (as applicable)
2.
CONTRACTOR-Paid Permits: The fees for permits not paid for by OWNER shall
be included in CONTRACTOR's Bid. The following list is not exclusive and does
not relieve CONTRACTOR of the responsibility of obtaining all permits:
a. Construction Water Meter: If water for construction is required to be taken from
fire hydrants or a new water meter, CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible
for obtaining and paying for such permits and water usage to Salt Lake City
Corporation's Department of Public Utilities permit office, 1530 South West
Temple Street, Salt Lake City, Utah.
1). Hydrant meters require a $1,000.00 deposit ($100.00, non-refundable). A
refund will be returned to CONTRACTOR by the Department of Public
Utilities if the meter and equipment is returned undamaged.
Revised February 10, 2014
Modifications to the General Conditions
00 73 10 - 4
2). Water is charged at current City rates. Minimum charge is $200.00 in the
City and $270.00 in the County.
I.
Other Permits: All other permit fees required by Salt Lake County, the State of Utah, the
United States of America, and any of their agencies, or by any private utility companies,
shall be paid for and obtained by CONTRACTOR and included in CONTRACTOR's
Bid. The following list is not exclusive and does not relieve CONTRACTOR of the
responsibility of obtaining all permits:
1. UDOT District 2: Digging permit in a UDOT roadway right of way.
2. Private Property Owner Permit: Written permission to use private water.
3. Private Property Owner Permit: Written permission to store product, equipment,
materials, and supplies outside of the Work site boundaries.
4. General Permit for Storm Water Discharge (Sites greater than 5 acres): From the
State of Utah, Department of Environmental Quality, Division of Water Quality, 288
North 1460 West Street. P.O. Box 144870, Salt Lake City, Utah 84114-4879. Fee
varies; contact the State for a quote.
5. Flood Control Permit: From Salt Lake County, Department of Public Works,
Division of Flood Control, 2001 South State Street, Salt Lake City, Utah.
6. Monument Permit: From Salt Lake County Surveyor, 2001 South State Street, Salt
Lake City, Utah. Fee will be at least $100.00 per monument and is based upon time
of performance.
Modify paragraph 6.16D
6.16 CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
D. Survival of Obligations: All representations, indemnifications, warranties and
guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as
well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final
payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work and termination or completion of the
Agreement. Furthermore, OWNER’S rights with respect to CONTRACTOR’S general
warranty and guarantee made in this Article 6.16 shall not be limited by anything in
Article 13.7.
Modify paragraph 6.17A and add paragraph 6.17E
6.17 INDEMNIFICATION
A. Indemnification of OWNER: Subject to paragraph 6.17E below, CONTRACTOR shall
indemnify, hold harmless, and defend OWNER and ENGINEER and their agents and
employees from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, direct,
indirect, or consequential (including, but not limited to fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and court costs) arising out of or resulting
from the willful or negligent acts or omissions in performance of the Work by
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any person or organization directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not the claim, damage, loss, etc.
arising from the act or omission is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder or
Revised February 10, 2014
Modifications to the General Conditions
00 73 10 - 5
arises by or is imposed by Law and regulations regardless of the negligence of any such
party. CONTRACTOR’s duty to defend OWNER, ENGINEER and their agents and
employees shall exist regardless of whether OWNER, ENGINEER, their agents or
employees, or CONTRACTOR or its agents may ultimately be found to be liable for
anyone’s negligence or other conduct.
E. Nothing herein shall be construed to require CONTRACTOR to indemnify OWNER,
ENGINEER, or their agents or employees for any damages that are caused by or result
from the fault of OWNER, ENGINEER, or their agents or employees.
Modify paragraph 13.6A
13.6 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK BY CONTRACTOR
A. In addition to CONTRACTOR’S obligations under Article 6.16, if required by
ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, as directed, either correct all Defective
Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected
by ENGINEER, remove it from the site and replace it with non-Defective Work. No
rejected material, the defects of which have been subsequently corrected, shall be used in
the Work unless approval in writing has been given by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR
shall bear all direct, indirect, and consequential costs of such correction or removal
(including but not limited to fees and charges of OWNER, engineers, architects, and other
professionals) made necessary thereby.
Modify paragraph 13.7A
13.7 CORRECTION PERIOD
A. In addition to CONTRACTOR’S obligations under Article 6.16, if any portion of the
Work is found to be defective within one year after the date of Substantial Completion,
CONTRACTOR shall correct it or replace it with non-Defective Work. The one year
correction period may be superseded by such longer period of time as prescribed in the
Contract Documents or by special guarantee terms required by the Contract Documents.
Add the following paragraph to Article 13.7
13.7 CORRECTION PERIOD
E. Nothing contained in this Article 13.7 shall be construed to establish a period of
limitation with respect to other obligations CONTRACTOR has under the Contract
Documents, including Article 6.16. Establishment of the one year period for correction
of Work as described in this Article 13.7 relates only to the specific obligation of
CONTRACTOR to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which
the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be enforced, nor the time
within which proceedings may be commenced to establish CONTRACTOR’S liability
with respect to CONTRACTOR’S obligations other than specifically to correct the
Work. Such times include the applicable statute of limitations or statute of repose, which
may be longer than one year.
Revised February 10, 2014
Modifications to the General Conditions
00 73 10 - 6
PART 16
DISPUTE RESOLUTION
16.2. GENERAL
A. Unless a decision is held by an appropriate court of law to have been procured by fraud
or to be arbitrary and capricious or so grossly erroneous as necessarily to imply bad faith,
any factual decision made under this dispute resolution procedure shall be final and
binding in any suit or action arising under the Construction Contract, including any
actions by CONTRACTOR or others against OWNER or any of OWNER's agents,
consultants, or employees.
B. Compliance by CONTRACTOR with provisions of this Part shall be a condition
precedent to any legal action by CONTRACTOR or any of CONTRACTOR's
Subcontractors and Suppliers against OWNER or any of OWNER's agents, consultants,
or employees.
C. The provisions of this Part shall not preclude or limit judicial review of issues of law.
D. Ambiguities in or between Contract Documents shall be construed in favor of the
OWNER.
16.3 DISPUTES NOT RELATED TO THE GUARANTEE OF THE WORK
A. Any dispute arising under the Construction Contract concerning a question of fact, not
related to the guarantee of the Work (Article 13.1 of the General Conditions (Document
00 72 00)), that is not disposed of by contract Modification shall be decided pursuant to
the following procedure.
1.
Any decision by ENGINEER interpreting the requirements of the Contract
Documents may be appealed in writing to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER's
decision, regarding that appeal shall be reduced to writing and a copy shall be
mailed or otherwise furnished to CONTRACTOR within 10 days. The decision of
ENGINEER shall be final and conclusive unless, within 30 days after the date of
receipt of such copy, CONTRACTOR mails or otherwise furnishes to ENGINEER
a written appeal to the head of OWNER's department responsible for constructing
the project.
2.
Within 15 days from the receipt of any such appeal, the department head shall issue
a decision in writing and mail or otherwise furnish a copy thereof to
CONTRACTOR. The decision of the department head shall be final and conclusive
unless, within 15 days from the date of receipt of such decision, the
CONTRACTOR mails or otherwise furnishes to the department head a written
appeal to OWNER’s Committee.
3.
The Dispute Committee shall consist of three persons selected by the department
head who are knowledgeable about the Work.
4.
OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall each have the opportunity to fully present its
case to the Dispute Committee before the Dispute Committee’s deliberation. The
Dispute Committee may request any other materials or written memoranda
necessary to consider the issues, and may schedule other proceedings as necessary.
5.
The decision of the Dispute Committee shall be rendered in writing within 15 days
Revised February 10, 2014
Modifications to the General Conditions
00 73 10 - 7
after the Dispute Committee’s final hearing of the issue and receipt of any
supplemental material requested by the Dispute Committee. The decision shall be
mailed or otherwise delivered to CONTRACTOR.
6.
The decision of the Dispute Committee shall be the final binding interpretation of
the facts that are the subject of the appeal.
16.4 DISPUTES RELATED TO THE GUARANTEE
A. Except as otherwise provided by contract Modification, any dispute concerning a
question of fact involving or arising out of the guarantee required by the Contract
Documents (Article 13.1 of the General Conditions (Document 00 72 00), that is not
disposed of by contract Modification, shall be decided pursuant to the provisions of
Paragraph 16.3 above, except that the initial factual decision shall be issued in writing by
the ENGINEER, together with the department head.
B. Any appeal therefrom shall be made within 15 days directly to the Dispute Committee
where such disputes shall be governed by provisions in sub-paragraphs 3 to 6 in
paragraph 16.3A above.
16.5 WORK DURING APPEAL
A. Notwithstanding the pendency of any protest or appeal provided above, CONTRACTOR
shall, if so ordered by ENGINEER, proceed with the Work under the Contract
Documents according to ENGINEER's direction and according to the decision on any
appeal. The existence of a claim or protest shall not excuse CONTRACTOR from the
requirements of the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, the Contract
Time.
16.6 APPEALS OF TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION
A. Any decision of OWNER to terminate or suspend the Work shall not be subject to the
provisions of this Part.
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised February 10, 2014
Modifications to the General Conditions
00 73 10 - 8
DOCUMENT 00 73 50
REQUIREMENTS OF THE DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC UTILITIES
(Supplementary Conditions)
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENT INCLUDES
A. Procedures for water line and sewer line construction.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Salt Lake City’s Department of Public Utilities has published a document entitled
Standard Practices for Salt Lake City Public Utilities (January 5, 2010 edition). The
document is available from 1530 South West Temple Street, Salt Lake City, Utah. In that
publication there is a list of standard practices that apply to contractors.
1. The standard practices are as follows
a. Trench Backfill Requirements (No. 1).
b. Jordan and Salt Lake Canal Standards (No. 3).
c. Flushing and De-chlorination (No. 4).
d. Cable Installations (No. 8).
e. Water Service Kills (No. 9).
f.
Commissioning Waterlines (No. 12).
g. Commissioning Large Service and Fire Lines (No. 13).
h. Hydrostatic Testing of Water Lines (No. 14).
i.
Tree Pruning and Root Cutting (No. 15).
j.
Raising Manholes, Cleanout and Water Valve Boxes (No. 16).
k. Standard Fire Hydrant Colors (No. 17).
l.
Disinfection large Water Connections (No. 18).
m. Waterline Installation in Hydrocarbon Contaminated Areas (No. 19).
2. Use the appropriate standard practice when doing work on sewer, water, and storm
drain facilities that are owned by the City’s Department of Public Utilities.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to final payment, submit.
1. All Contract Documents as required by Article 6.11 of Document 00 72 00 in the
Standard Specifications.
2. Water Service Work Performance Form. Use form at the end of this document.
Revised March 3, 2010
Requirements of the Department of Public Utilities
00 73 50 - 1
PART 2 CHANGES TO THE APWA SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 SECTION 33 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF WATER UTILITIES.
A. Add a new paragraph to Article 1.6
1.6 REFERENCES
A. AWWA C600, C602, and C606.
2.2 SECTION 33 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF WATER UTILITIES.
A. Replace Article 3.3 with the following.
3.3 PRESSURE TEST AND DISINFECTION
A. Prevent contamination from entering the line during storage, construction, or
repairs. For new construction, keep a plug on the end of the pipe except for
installing the next section of pipe.
B. Disinfect the line by placing granular or tablet chlorine (10 to 25 mg/l
concentration for 24 hours) in the line during installation and filling the line with
water.
C. De-chlorinate the line or dispose of chlorinated water in an acceptable manner
and flush the line (see Standard practice No. 4 and the following paragraphs.
D. Provide air release taps at pipeline’s highest elevations and expel all air before
test. Insert permanent plugs or air relief valves after test has been completed.
E. Complete a hydrostatic test of the line according to AWWA for the type of pipe
used (i.e. for ductile iron pipe; AWWA C600, PVC pip AWWA C605). This
will include connecting any external pump to the pipe and applying a hydrostatic
pressure as established for the work by the Chief engineer. This will be at least
200 pse at the lowest point of the line. This pressure will be maintained within 5
psi for two hours (2 hrs.) and the amount of makeup water will be measured.
The amount of makeup water must be less than 1.5 gallons and 2.2 gallons per
1,000 feet of pipe for eight inch (8”) and 12 inch (12”) pipe respectively. No
piping installation will be accepted until the leakage is less than the amount listed
above.
F. Locate and repair defective joints and retest until leakage rate is less than
allowable.
G. Repair any noticeable leakage even if the total leakage is less than allowable.
H. Flush after hydrostatic test and let the line sit for at least 16 hours before
collecting a water sample.
I.
A representative of the Chief Engineer will collect and deliver a water sample to
the City laboratory.
J.
Earliest test results may be available the next day.
K. If the test passes, a second sample will be collected by the City representative and
delivered to the City laboratory.
Revised March 3, 2010
Requirements of the Department of Public Utilities
00 73 50 - 2
L. If the first sample is bad, then the line will be flushed and allowed to sit in
chlorinated state for 16 hours before another sample is collected.
M. When two (2) acceptable samples have been obtained, the line is acceptable3 and
services can be connected.
2.3 SECTION 33 11 00 – WATER DISTRIBUTION AND TRANSMISSION.
A. Add a new paragraph to Article 2.1
2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS
E. Provide Chevron fm #1 non-oxide grease and 8 mil polyethylene wrap.
B. Add a new paragraph to Article 3.4
3.4 INSTALLATION – PIPE AND FITTINGS
I.
Coat all exposed nuts and bolts with Chevron fm #1 non-oxide grease and 8 mil
polyethylene wrap.
2.4 SECTION 33 13 00 – DISINFECTION.
A. Add a new paragraph to Article 3.2
3.2 DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES
H. Refer to Article 3.3 of Section 33 08 00 – Commissioning of Water utilities as
amended in Section 00 73 50.
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised March 3, 2010
Requirements of the Department of Public Utilities
00 73 50 - 3
WATER SERVICE
WORK PERFORMANCE FORM
Department of Public Utilities
Salt Lake City, Utah
Address
1630 E Spring Lane Dr
1646 E Spring Lane Dr
1660 E Spring Lane Dr
Project Number:
Address
Project Number:
Address
513301876
.
Existing
Service
Size
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
_______________
Existing
Service
Size
_______________
Existing
Service
Size
Location:
Work Plan
Spring Lane Dr (5155 S) from About 1500 East to About
1720 East
Notes on Work Performed
Replace New water meter required, property owner line copper
Replace Property owner line galvanized
Reconnect 4 feet galvanized line replaced property owner side
Location:
Work Plan
Location:
Work Plan
____________________________________________
Notes on Work Performed
____________________________________________
Notes on Work Performed
Example
Project Number:
DOCUMENT 00 91 13
ADDENDA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PROCEDURE
A. For filing purposes, add Addenda and Modifications to the Contract Documents following this page.
END OF DOCUMENT
Revised March 7, 2007
Addenda
00 91 13 - 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Project information.
2.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
3.
Phased construction.
4.
Work by Owner.
5.
Work under separate contracts.
6.
Owner-furnished products.
7.
Access to site.
8.
Work restrictions.
9.
Specification and drawing conventions.
Related Requirements:
1.
SUMMARY
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and
procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
Section 011000 - Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.3
A.
PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Identification: Leonardo Improvements/ Catering Kitchen
1.
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Project Location: 209 east 500 South, SLC, Utah
Owner: The Leonardo/ Salt lake City Corp
1.
Owner's Representative: David Brandon
Director of Facilities at The Leonardo
801-531-9800 ext:125
C.
Architect:
D.
Project Delivery: The project will be Design\Bid\Build project delivery.
1.4
A.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the
following:
1.
B.
A.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
Approximately 1,525 square foot retrofit of the existing space in the
Leonardo Building. The remodel will create a new commercial kitchen.
Work includes construction of a fully functional kitchen in the basement of
The Leonardo Building with all the associated kitchen/ mechanical/
electrical requirements.
Type of Contract:
1.
1.5
CRSA
Mehrdad Samie
801.746.6813
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
WORK BY OWNER
General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without
interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the
Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.
WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be
carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or
other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under
separate contracts.
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading,
handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products, not unless
otherwise noted.
SUMMARY
Section 011000 - Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Owner-Furnished Products:
1.
1.8
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Kitchen Equipment.
ACCESS TO SITE
A.
General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during
construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to
perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B.
General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this
Section.
C.
Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not
disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicate.
1.9
A.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1.
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working
hours of 7 a.m. to 7 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
D.
1.
Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2.
Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of
noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1.
Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
E.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.
F.
Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances
within the existing building is not permitted.
SUMMARY
Section 011000 - Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.10
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in
particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the
Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on
the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2.
Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically
stated otherwise.
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to
the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings
are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on
Drawings to identify materials and products:
1.
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms
used in the individual Specifications Sections.
2.
Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled
on Drawings.
3.
Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes
referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
Section 011000 - Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 012200 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.3
A.
1.4
1.
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting
and handling Change Orders.
2.
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting
requirements.
DEFINITIONS
Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration
of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services,
or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate
modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the
Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
PROCEDURES
A.
Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
overhead, and profit.
B.
Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that
requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit
prices are specified in those Sections.
C.
Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that
involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's
expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D.
List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections
referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each
unit price.
UNIT PRICES
012200-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES
Unit Price No. 1: Cutting and patching of concrete floor slabs.
1.
Description: Cutting of new or existing concrete floor slabs up to 6 inches thick,
removal and excavation as required, and subsequent backfill, compaction, and
patching of concrete according to Section 017300 "Execution." not otherwise
indicated in the Contract Documents.
2.
Unit of Measurement: Square feet of concrete removed.
Unit Price No. 2: Miscellaneous and structural steel.
1.
Description: Miscellaneous lintels and other supports not otherwise indicated in
the Contract Documents, according to Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing"
and Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications."
2.
Unit of Measurement: Cost in place of pounds of fabricated steel as indicated on
itemized invoice of steel supplier and verified by Architect.
END OF SECTION 012200
UNIT PRICES
012200-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
A.
Preconstruction photographs.
Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for photographic documentation
before selective demolition operations commence.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs.
1.
Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.
2.
Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same
aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named
by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with
minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200
by 2400 pixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in
focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not
be accepted.
PHOTOGRAPHIC
DOCUMENTATION
013233-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
B.
C.
Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital
camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing
software.
1.
Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2.
Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at
Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same
manner as those submitted to Architect.
Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, take photographs
of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during
construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect.
1.
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions before starting the Work.
Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly, with timing each
month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for
Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last
photographs were taken.
END OF SECTION 013233
PHOTOGRAPHIC
DOCUMENTATION
013233-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and
procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and
other submittals.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.3
1.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
2.
Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in
individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to
and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard
Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network
firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.
C.
Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe
Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display
resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order
by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional
time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and
additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values,
and Contractor's construction schedule.
2.
Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals
required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early
because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
3.
Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of
Contractor's construction schedule.
a.
4.
1.5
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and
timing for submittals.
Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
b.
Specification Section number and title.
c.
Submittal category: Action; informational.
d.
Name of subcontractor.
e.
Description of the Work covered.
f.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
g.
Scheduled date of fabrication.
h.
Scheduled dates for purchasing.
i.
Scheduled dates for installation.
j.
Activity or event number.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will
be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the
Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.
a.
Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of
digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b.
Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in
AutoCAD.
c.
Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA
Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
d.
B.
D.
The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate
discipline:
1)
Floor plans.
2)
Reflected ceiling plans.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2.
Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently
unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved
submittal schedule.
3.
Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same
Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the
Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
a.
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No
extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional
time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise
Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same
manner as initial submittal.
3.
Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
4.
Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that
submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's
consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned
to Architect before being returned to Contractor.
Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal
file as follows:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
1.
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating
submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with
links enabling navigation to each item.
2.
Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision
identifier.
a.
File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number
followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another
decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).
3.
Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and
approval markings and action taken by Architect.
4.
Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to
Owner,containing the following information:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Name and address of Architect.
d.
Name of Contractor.
e.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
g.
Category and type of submittal.
h.
Submittal purpose and description.
i.
Specification Section number and title.
j.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name
for each of multiple items.
k.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
l.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m.
Related physical samples submitted directly.
n.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
o.
Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
p.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
q.
Other necessary identification.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
r.
5.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Remarks.
Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic
submittal file metadata:
a.
Project name.
b.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c.
Manufacturer name.
d.
Product name.
E.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F.
Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on
Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other
than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations.
Include same identification information as related submittal.
G.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial
submittal.
1.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
2.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent
of revision.
3.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's
action stamp.
H.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,
suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary
for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I.
Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only
final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required
by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual
Specification Sections.
1.
Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site
specifically established for Project.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
a.
2.
Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as
an electronic Project record document file.
Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a.
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as
an electronic Project record document file.
3.
Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
4.
Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes
signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and
certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign
documents on behalf of that entity.
a.
Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
b.
Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and
certifications where indicated.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of
construction and type of product or equipment.
1.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard
published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product
Data.
2.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
applicable.
3.
Include the following information, as applicable:
4.
a.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b.
Standard color charts.
c.
Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
d.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
e.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
f.
Notation of coordination requirements.
For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b.
Clearances required to other
accompanying Shop Drawings.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
construction,
if
not
indicated
on
013300-6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
C.
5.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6.
Submit Product Data in the following format:
a.
PDF electronic file.
b.
Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect
will return two copies.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not
base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data.
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a.
Identification of products.
b.
Schedules.
c.
Compliance with specified standards.
d.
Notation of coordination requirements.
e.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f.
Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches , but no larger than 30 by
42 inches .
3.
Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a.
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PDF electronic file.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of
these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics
between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
2.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
following:
a.
Generic description of Sample.
b.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
c.
Sample source.
d.
Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e.
Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3.
For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding
electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample
characteristics, and identification information for record.
4.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for
quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity.
Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction
associated with each set.
a.
5.
6.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as
Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of
units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected
from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with
options selected.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,
prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in
manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for
use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples
include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or
fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of
repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color
range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a.
E.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain
two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.
1)
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship,
fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar
characteristics are to be demonstrated.
2)
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent
in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three
sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination
with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to
Architect.
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section
017700 "Closeout Procedures."
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project
name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of
reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has
been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or
will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each
submittal to appropriate party.
B.
Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of
partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
C.
Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be
returned for resubmittal without review.
D.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect
without action.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
A.
1.4
Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility
interruptions.
USE CHARGES
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be
included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use
temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's
construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities
having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fireprevention program.
B.
Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials
and construction from water absorption and damage.
1.
Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water
absorption or water damage.
2.
Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for
mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged
Work.
3.
Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive
materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
015000-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction
has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.
C.
1.5
Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that
indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations,
and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed
measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:
1.
Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.
2.
HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.
3.
Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.
4.
Waste handling procedures.
5.
Other dust-control measures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect
each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C.
Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S.
Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.6
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to
assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent
service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless
of previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with
flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method
2.
B.
Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches
C.
Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock
wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,
respectively.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
015000-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum
interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required
by progress of the Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000
"Summary."
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until
facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed
permanent facilities.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures,
utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except
those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations,
and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
C.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete,
insulate temporary enclosures.
Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.
1.
Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each
side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18
inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with
fire-retardant-treated plywood.
a.
Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary
partition with not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain waterdampened foot mats in vestibule.
2.
Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by
authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated
assemblies.
3.
Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.
4.
Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and
security locks where openings are required.
5.
Protect air-handling equipment.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
015000-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
6.
D.
3.3
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of
types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses.
Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.
1.
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
2.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and
similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish
procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post
warnings and information.
4.
Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a
warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not
to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A.
Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document
visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B.
Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the
building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain
as follows:
1.
Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in
conditions.
2.
Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.
3.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative
humidity, and exposure to water limits.
a.
Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and
gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction
and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.
b.
Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture
during construction operations or after installation. Record readings
beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify
materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in
writing to Architect.
c.
Remove materials that cannot be completely
manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
restored
to
their
015000-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste
and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve
indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security
and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service
has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no
later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent
construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary
facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that
cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of
Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification
signs.
2.
Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for
integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape
development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements
for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other
petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of
plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at
temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used
during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
015000-5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing
execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Construction layout.
2.
Installation of the Work.
3.
Cutting and patching.
4.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
5.
Progress cleaning.
6.
Starting and adjusting.
7.
Protection of installed construction.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
2.
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from
indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.
4.
Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected
portions of the building.
5.
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.
EXECUTION
017300-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.3
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or
performance of other work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions
after installation of other work.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and
patching of construction elements.
1.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify
Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect
before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting
and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could
change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection
2.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related
components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as
intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
3.
a.
Primary operational systems and equipment.
b.
Fire separation assemblies.
c.
Air or smoke barriers.
d.
Fire-suppression systems.
e.
Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
f.
Control systems.
g.
Communication systems.
h.
Fire-detection and -alarm systems.
i.
Conveying systems.
j.
Electrical wiring systems.
k.
Operating systems of special construction.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements
or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that
results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
a.
EXECUTION
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
017300-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
4.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
b.
Membranes and flashings.
c.
Exterior curtain-wall construction.
d.
Sprayed fire-resistive material.
e.
Equipment supports.
f.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
g.
Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed
construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and
patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
B.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties
involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review
areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve
potential conflicts before proceeding.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's
written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For
exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the
fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional
performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical
and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
EXECUTION
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of
connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping;
underground electrical services, and other utilities.
017300-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component
of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator
present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual
locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and
systems are to be installed.
3.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
1.
Description of the Work.
2.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
3.
Recommended corrections.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.
Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are
indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field
measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C.
Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the
need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions
outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect
according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
E.
EXECUTION
017300-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to existing conditions. If discrepancies are discovered, notify
Architect promptly.
INSTALLATION
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment
and elevation, as indicated.
1.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for
maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
3.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90
inches in unoccupied spaces.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing
products in applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible
results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial
Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging
operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of
occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of
construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to
be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm
that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with
indicated requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of
adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately
located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of
attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components
at heights directed by Architect.
2.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
EXECUTION
017300-5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not
indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to
form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not
considered hazardous.
3.5
A.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without
delay.
1.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
B.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with
materials so as not to void existing warranties.
C.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent
damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project
that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E.
Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or
interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and
patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."
F.
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing
services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such
services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
G.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and
similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage
elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures
with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
EXECUTION
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings
when not in use.
017300-6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
H.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
2.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or
a diamond-core drill.
4.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
5.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to
be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to
prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are
complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar
operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as
invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements
specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize
evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.
a.
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials.
b.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished
area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space.
Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance.
Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if
necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply
primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the
patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing
the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
4.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an
even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
5.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores
enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity
of building enclosure.
EXECUTION
017300-7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
I.
3.6
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove
paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed
by Owner's construction personnel.
3.7
A.
1.
Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction
schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on
a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required
due to differences in actual construction progress.
2.
Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at
preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive
Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's
construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.
PROGRESS CLEANING
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste
materials and debris.
2.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or
three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F .
3.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other
waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to
regulations.
a.
4.
Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other
contractors are working concurrently.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness
necessary for proper execution of the Work.
D.
1.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
2.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum
the entire work area, as appropriate.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning
EXECUTION
017300-8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not
recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and
that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the
space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as
necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste
materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and
adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to
ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with
requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."
B.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
C.
Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper
operation without binding.
D.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements."
3.9
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION
017300-9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2.
Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
3.
Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from
partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for
disposition of hazardous waste.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste
resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction
waste includes packaging.
B.
Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
E.
Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in
another facility.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND
DISPOSAL
017419-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
F.
1.4
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:
1.
Clean salvaged items.
2.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label
indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3.
Store items in a secure area until installation.
4.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
5.
Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials
and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make items functional for use indicated.
B.
Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door
closers, leave door hardware attached to doors.
C.
Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect
equipment from exposure to weather.
D.
Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.
E.
Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.
F.
Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters,
panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.
3.2
RECYCLING DEMOLITION and CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A.
General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B.
Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives
received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND
DISPOSAL
017419-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
C.
Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to
recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives,
solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling
process.
D.
Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical
according to approved construction waste management plan.
1.
Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste
until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable
materials at each container and bin.
a.
2.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated
materials if found.
Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling
receiver or processor.
RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
Metals: Separate metals by type (If required by vendor).
1.
Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
2.
Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a
dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of
fasteners.
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
Packaging:
1.
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store
in a dry location.
2.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets
from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into
component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
Wood Materials:
1.
Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND
DISPOSAL
017419-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.5
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused,
remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or
incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be
disposed of accumulate on-site.
2.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND
DISPOSAL
017419-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Substantial Completion procedures.
2.
Final completion procedures.
3.
Warranties.
4.
Final cleaning.
5.
Repair of the Work.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion
construction photographic documentation.
2.
Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
3.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
4.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings and
record Product Data.
5.
Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing
Owner's personnel.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
C.
1.4
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C.
Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.5
A.
1.6
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items
specified in other Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be
completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on
the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10
days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List
items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1.
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having
jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services
and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
2.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including
project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion
construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
3.
Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific
warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections,
including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to
location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model
number where applicable.
a.
5.
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each
item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain
Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
6.
C.
D.
1.7
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,
and maintenance.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10
days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List
items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial
Completion.
5.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video
recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
6.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
7.
Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local
emergency responders.
8.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
9.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
10.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate
visual defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion
a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final
inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection
or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on
Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
completion.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining
final completion, complete the following:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
1.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment
Procedures."
2.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list),
endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each
item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
4.
Submit pest-control final inspection report.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final
inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection
or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate
for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
1.8
A.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected
by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,
if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
1.9
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Organize list of spaces in sequential order,.
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated
portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of
Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit
Owner's rights under warranty.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion
of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner
during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents
of Project Manual.
1.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf
binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive
8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.
2.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate
warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and
the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
D.
3.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
4.
Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete
warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file
with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of
contents at beginning of document.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to
comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and
antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building
cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for
certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated
portion of Project:
a.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction
activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste
material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and
other foreign deposits.
c.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, eventextured surface.
d.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material
from Project site.
e.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700-5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
f.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid
disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective
surfaces to their original condition.
g.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including
roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and
similar spaces.
h.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains
remain.
j.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, visionobscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch
surfaces.
k.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
l.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar
equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
m.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including
stains resulting from water exposure.
n.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean
exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on
inspection.
1)
Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.
Provide written report on completion of cleaning.
p.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full
efficiency.
q.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C.
Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary
Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.
D.
Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700-6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.2
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
REPAIR OF THE WORK
A.
Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for
determination of Substantial Completion.
B.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing
defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials,
and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be
repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating
components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent
facilities used during construction to specified condition.
1.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces,
and other damaged transparent materials.
2.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and
surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair
or restoration.
a.
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,
including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to
required labels and identification.
3.
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may
impede operation or reduce longevity.
4.
Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700-7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation
and maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
operation and maintenance manuals.
DEFINITIONS
A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
A.
B.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit
reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1.
Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance
submittals are acceptable.
2.
Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to
revisions and field conditions.
Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1.
PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically
indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
017823-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
a.
Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with
applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation
and maintenance directory.
b.
Enable inserted reviewer Comments on draft submittals.
C.
Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before
commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general
scope and content of manual are acceptable.
D.
Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection
for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and
training. Architect will return copy with comments.
1.
Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit
copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's
comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
REQUIREMENTS
MANUALS
FOR
EMERGENCY,
OPERATION,
AND
MAINTENANCE
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate
section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of
equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in
the order listed:
1.
Title page.
2.
Table of contents.
3.
Manual contents.
Title Page: Include the following information:
1.
Subject matter included in manual.
2.
Name and address of Project.
3.
Name and address of Owner.
4.
Date of submittal.
5.
Name and contact information for Contractor.
6.
Name and contact information for Architect.
7.
Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that
designed the systems contained in the manuals.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
017823-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
8.
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name,
indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section
number in Project Manual.
1.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in
each volume of the set.
D.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents
alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions
for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E.
Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite
electronic PDF file for each manual type required.
2.2
A.
1.
Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available.
Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for
minimum readable file size.
2.
File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based
on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and
equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group
documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite
bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks
reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file
tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
OPERATION MANUALS
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems
and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2.
Performance and
responsibility.
3.
Operating standards.
4.
Operating procedures.
5.
Wiring diagrams.
6.
Control diagrams.
7.
Piped system diagrams.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
design
criteria
if
Contractor
has
delegated
design
017823-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
8.
Precautions against improper use.
9.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on
Contract Documents.
2.
Manufacturer's name.
3.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4.
Equipment function.
5.
Operating characteristics.
6.
Limiting conditions.
7.
Performance curves.
8.
Engineering data and tests.
9.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
Startup procedures.
2.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
4.
Regulation and control procedures.
5.
Instructions on stopping.
6.
Normal shutdown instructions.
7.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram
controls as installed.
E.
Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required
for identification.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
017823-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
MANUAL PREPARATION
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and
maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem,
and piece of equipment not part of a system.
1.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare
information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a
system.
2.
Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data,
include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to
identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more
than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from
the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to
information not applicable.
1.
C.
D.
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not
available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and
maintenance of equipment or systems.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control
sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in
record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and
maintenance manuals.
2.
Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839
"Project Record Documents."
Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting
operation and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
017823-5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel, including the following:
1.
Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2.
Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B.
Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required
to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's
personnel.
C.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of
instruction time, and course content.
D.
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and
maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training
modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by
individual Specification Sections.
B.
Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module.
Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to
master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the
system, equipment, or component:
1.
Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the
following:
DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING
017900-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
a.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design
responsibility.
c.
Operating standards.
d.
Regulatory requirements.
e.
Equipment function.
f.
Operating characteristics.
g.
Limiting conditions.
h.
Performance curves.
Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a.
Emergency manuals.
b.
Operations manuals.
c.
Maintenance manuals.
d.
Project record documents.
e.
Identification systems.
f.
Warranties and bonds.
g.
Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
Startup procedures.
b.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
d.
Regulation and control procedures.
e.
Control sequences.
f.
Safety procedures.
g.
Instructions on stopping.
h.
Normal shutdown instructions.
DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING
017900-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
4.
5.
6.
7.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
i.
Operating procedures for emergencies.
j.
Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Adjustments: Include the following:
a.
Alignments.
b.
Checking adjustments.
c.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
d.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a.
Diagnostic instructions.
b.
Test and inspection procedures.
Maintenance: Include the following:
a.
Inspection procedures.
b.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d.
Procedures for routine cleaning
e.
Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f.
Procedures for routine maintenance.
g.
Instruction on use of special tools.
Repairs: Include the following:
a.
Diagnosis instructions.
b.
Repair instructions.
c.
Disassembly; component
reassembly instructions.
DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING
removal,
repair,
and
replacement;
and
017900-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
d.
Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e.
Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and
training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in
coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
B.
Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2
INSTRUCTION
A.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
B.
Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that
requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1.
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days'
advance notice.
C.
Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed
and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using
final operation and maintenance data submittals.
D.
Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site.
Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing
before initial training use.
END OF SECTION 017900
DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING
017900-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
B.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owneroccupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.
2.
Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to
prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and
reinstall where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently
removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged,
or removed and reinstalled.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.6
A.
1.7
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
2.
Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of
materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
4.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates
exposed by selective demolition operations.
5.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition
area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
1.
Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a.
Furnishings \ Equipment.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before
proceeding with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in
the Work.
1.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately
notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
under a separate contract.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective
demolition operations.
B.
Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine
extent of selective demolition required.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and
extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs.
3.2
A.
1.
Comply with requirements
Documentation."
specified
in
Section
013233
"Photographic
2.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide
photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
salvage operations.
3.
Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of
measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact
reproduction.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain
and protect them against damage.
1.
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Section 011000 "Summary."
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
3.3
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical
systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,
provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and
that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and
HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed
and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with
same or compatible piping material.
c.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services
and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall,
reconnect, and make equipment operational.
d.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services
and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
e.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed
and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
f.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or
compatible ductwork material.
PREPARATION
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to
prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition
area and to and from occupied portions of building.
2.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective
demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to
prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.
3.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or
that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been
removed.
5.
Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and
cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.4
A.
B.
3.5
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.
Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before
disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
2.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.
Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or
grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent
surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
4.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents
of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
5.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable
materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
7.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to
avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as
not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
9.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and
soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be
removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and
cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations
are complete.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to
remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
B.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up
and remove.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119-5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.6
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged,
reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
3.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device
that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4.
Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of
them.
3.7
A.
CLEANING
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before
selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119-6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
B.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
Plastic sheet paneling.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring for installing plastic paneling.
2.
Section 102600 "Wall and Door Protection" for corner guards installed over
plastic paneling.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder
of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single
manufacturer.
PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
panels complying with ASTM D 5319.
PLASTIC PANELING
Section 066400 - Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
3.
2.3
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
a.
Crane Composites, Inc.
b.
Marlite.
c.
Parkland Plastics, Inc.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing
agency according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
a.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
4.
Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.12 inch .
5.
Surface Finish: Smooth.
6.
Color: White.
ACCESSORIES
Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to
retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside
corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.
1.
Color: White.
B.
Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer.
C.
Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to
fit into grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to
substrate.
D.
Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant
recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
PLASTIC PANELING
Section 066400 - Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
3.2
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that
might interfere with adhesive bond.
B.
Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat,
even surface for panel installation.
C.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease,
dirt, and dust.
D.
Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation
according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
E.
Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends
of walls not less than half the width of full panels.
3.3
1.
Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation.
2.
Locate panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
C.
Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so
that fasteners are accurately aligned.
1.
Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes.
2.
Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners.
3.
Apply sealant to bottom edge at joint to flooring.
D.
Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints.
E.
Install trim accessories with adhesive. Do not fasten through panels.
F.
Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside
corner trim in a bead of sealant.
G.
Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
H.
Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors,
ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
PLASTIC PANELING
Section 066400 - Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
I.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent
recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no
residue remains.
END OF SECTION 066400
PLASTIC PANELING
Section 066400 - Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes hollow-metal work.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
DEFINITIONS
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to
NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
COORDINATION
Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time
for installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during
transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1.
B.
C.
Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on
minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each
stacked door to permit air circulation.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
081113-1
AND FRAMES
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,:
1.
Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY.
2.
Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.
3.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand brand.
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single
manufacturer.
INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for
materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and
clearances, and as specified.
B.
Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2..
1.
Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
2.
Doors:
3.
4.
2.3
A.
a.
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches .
c.
Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch .
d.
Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
e.
Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener
core at manufacturer's discretion.
Frames:
a.
Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch .
b.
Construction: Full profile welded.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
FRAME ANCHORS
Jamb Anchors:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
081113-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
2.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less
than 0.042 inch thick.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
suitable for exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free
of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A
1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A
153/A 153M, Class B.
D.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other
accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
F.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches , as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
H.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
I.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film
thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately
form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness.
Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper
assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory
assembled before shipment.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors:
1.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at
manufacturer's discretion.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
081113-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
2.
Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same
material as face sheets.
3.
Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors
channels of same material as face sheets.
with end closures or
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or
handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of
same thickness metal as frames.
1.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as
follows:
1)
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2)
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3)
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4)
Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each
24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
D.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
E.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping
according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
F.
1.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surfacemounted door hardware.
2.
Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers
where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline
joints.
1.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of
hollow-metal work.
2.
Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that
each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
081113-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.6
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
3.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
doors and frames.
4.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
5.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and
installation types indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free
primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for
substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged
exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations
before frame installation.
C.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by
grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces.
B.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surfacemounted door hardware.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened
in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply
with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
081113-5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
b.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
c.
Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
d.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with
grout containing antifreezing agents.
2.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
3.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
c.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
specified below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a.
Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32
inch .
b.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32
inch .
c.
At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch .
d.
Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch
.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
081113-6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
D.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with
hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced
uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each
corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before
final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and
replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES
081113-7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Commercial door hardware for the following:
a.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
C.
1.3
Swinging doors.
Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames"
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following.
Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this
Section.
REFERENCED STANDARDS
A.
Provide hardware in accordance with the following standards in addition to those
specified in Division 01 Section “References”.
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), A117.1: Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities, edition as adopted by local Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ).
2.
Builders Hardware Manufacturer’s Association (BHMA)
a.
b.
c.
3.
ANSI/BHMA A156.2: Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches, 2011
edition
ANSI/BHMA A156.4: Door Controls - Closers, 2008 edition
ANSI/BHMA A156.18: Materials and Finishes, 2006 edition
Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
a.
b.
Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood
Doors, 1993 edition
Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames, 2004 edition
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
c.
d.
e.
4.
c.
NFPA 70: National Electrical Code, edition as adopted by local AHJ.
NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, edition
as adopted by local AHJ.
NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, edition as
adopted by local AHJ.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
C.
Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware
Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures
and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related
work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1.
2.
Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door
numbers as in the Contract Documents.
Content: Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
3.
1.5
Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware, 1994 edition
Keying Systems and Nomenclature, 2003 edition
Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule, 2001 edition
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a.
b.
1.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door
and frame.
Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item.
Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening
including name and manufacturer.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on
floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
Mounting locations for door hardware.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and
frame.
Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible
date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede
fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include
Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware,
and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware
sets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock
manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and
providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the
course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door
hardware and keying.
Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.
Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
B.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified
by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing
consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware
delivered to Project site.
B.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door
hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary
fasteners with each item or package.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work
specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of
other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door
hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B.
Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to
existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required,
field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit
opening conditions and to provide for proper operation.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 3
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
c.
2.
Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion, except as
follows:
a.
b.
1.9
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
Grade 1 Cylindrical Locks: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial
Completion.
Manual Closers: Thirty (30) years from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,
and removal and replacement of door hardware.
B.
Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six (6) months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation.
Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of
original products.
PART 2 2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.2
Hinges:
Locks and Latches:
Cylinders and Cores:
Mechanical Door Closers:
Accessories and Trim:
Ives
Schlage
Provided by Owner
LCN
Ives
Substitutions submitted in compliance with Division 01 Section “Substitutions”
requirements will be reviewed for conformance to basis of design.
SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A.
Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of
each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of
this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the
following:
1.
Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one
manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of
establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or,
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers"
in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other
manufacturers that complies with requirements.
2.3
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A.
General
1.
Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have
manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit
removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and
as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
a.
2.
3.
B.
2.4
Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method
indicated using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and
hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than
specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated.
Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates generally
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been
prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
Fasteners
1.
Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flathead screws except as otherwise indicated. Furnish stainless steel (exposed
under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces
of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including
"prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.
2.
Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is
closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with
concealed fasteners. Use through bolts only as indicated in this section unless
their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the
hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the
work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
HINGES
A.
Acceptable Products:
1.
2.
B.
Ives:
5BB1
Substitutions as approved by Architect/Owner
Requirements:
1.
Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:
a.
b.
2.
Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely
(both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.
4.
Hinge Weight: As indicated in hardware sets.
Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
5.
c.
Safety Stud: Designed for stud in one leaf to engage hole in opposing leaf.
Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when
tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is
closed; for out-swinging doors.
Corners: Square.
Fasteners: Comply with the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.5
Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel with stainless-steel pin.
Interior Hinges: Steel with steel pin.
Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel with steel pin.
Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings:
a.
b.
6.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and
tapped holes.
Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
OPERATING DOOR TRIM
A.
Door Bolts
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
2.
Requirements:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Ives:
FB31/FB41
Substitutions as approved by Architect/Owner
Provide bolt model recommended by manufacturer for door material type.
Provide 1 inch throw stainless steel bolt with 12 inch length unless
otherwise scheduled in the sets.
Provide a dust proof strike for bottom bolt at all locations where there is not
a threshold.
Coordinators
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
2.
Ives:
COR x FL
MB
Substitutions as approved by Architect/Owner
Requirements:
a.
b.
Provide bar type coordinator and filler bar of size as recommended by
manufacturer for each opening.
Provide mounting brackets as required for soffit mounted hardware to be
compatible with coordinator.
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.6
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Lock Chassis: Shall be made from steel, with locking spindles of stainless steel.
Latch Bolt: Shall be constructed of stainless steel with 3/4 inch throw on mortise
locks and 1/2 inch throw otherwise. Latch to be deadlocking on keyed functions.
Lever Trim: Shall be pressure cast brass, bronze, zinc, or steel with wrought rose
design. Levers are to be solid with no voids or plastic inserts.
Fire Rating: Lock shall be listed for up to 3 hours.
Strike Plates: Provide ANSI 4-7/8 inch strike plates. At pairs of doors, provide
strike with 7/8 inch flat lip. At single doors, provide round-lipped strike with lip
length as required to minimally clear jamb and trim. Provide dust box at each
strike location.
Grade 1 Bored Locks
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
2.
Requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.7
ND Series, Rhodes Lever
Schlage:
Substitutions as approved by Architect/Owner
ANSI Grade: BHMA/ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1.
Door Prep: Provide lockset to install using a standard ANSI 161 door
preparation.
Anti-Rotation Plate: Provide lockset with a mechanically interlocked antirotation plate. Anti-Rotation teeth or “bite tabs” are not acceptable. Locks
without any rotation prevention devices are not acceptable.
Lever Return Springs: Provide each lever with two compression type return
springs that are easily accessible without dismantling the lock chassis.
Locks utilizing tension or torsion lever return springs are unacceptable.
Locks with internal springs that require dismantling the lock chassis are
unacceptable.
Lever Spindles: Provide lock with either milled or 1-piece deep drawn
spindles. 2-piece interlocking stamped spindles are not acceptable.
Multi-Functionality: Provide modular lockset with capability to convert to a
new lock function by changing key cams.
Vandal Resistant Lever: Where scheduled, provide lockset with lever that
freely rotates even when locked to resist vandalism and abuse.
CYLINDERS AND CORES
A.
Acceptable Products:
1.
B.
Provided by Owner
Requirements:
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 7
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
2.8
Small Format Interchangeable Cylinders: Provide cylinders of quantity and type
and with the appropriate cam/tailpiece to be compatible with the locking
hardware provided. Provide cylinder housings ready to accept 7-pin, Small
Format Interchangeable Cores (SFIC).
MECHANICAL DOOR CLOSERS
A.
General:
1.
2.
Valves: Closers shall have separate valves for latch speed, main speed, and
back check. Valves shall be staked to prevent accidental removal.
Provide the appropriate closer body, handing, and brackets to mount closer
inside the building on the least-public side of the door.
a.
b.
3.
Integrated Stop Closer Arms: Where a closer with integrated stop is required,
provide the appropriate closer and arm as follows:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Where closers are to be mounted parallel arm, provide with heavy duty,
fully forged arms.
Where closers are to be mounted regular arm and the opening can
otherwise be opened to 180 degrees, provide closer with the appropriate
special templating to allow 180 degree door swing. Where a special
template is not available for 180 degree swing, provide closer arm with
integrated stop.
Parallel arm with spring-cushioned stop arm: Provide where door is
otherwise able to open to 95 degrees and requires a parallel arm mount
closer.
Parallel arm with dead stop arm: Provide where door is obstructed from
opening to 95 degrees and requires a parallel arm mount closer.
Regular arm with push side surface-mounted overhead stop: Provide
where door closer should mount on pull side of door.
Hold Open Arms: Provide closer arms with mechanical hold-opens as scheduled.
Provide closers with any special templates, brackets, plates, or other accessories
required for interface with header, door, wall, and other hardware. Provide
closers with screw packs containing thru-bolts, machine screws, and wood
screws.
Closers shall be provided with all-weather fluid and shall not require readjustment
from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. Fluid shall be non-flaming and shall not
fuel door or floor covering fires. Upon request, provide data indicating thermal
properties of fluid.
Closers shall close and latch door when adjusted to meet accessibility
requirements for door opening force: 8.5 lbs at exterior doors, 5 lbs at interior
doors, and 15 lbs at labeled fire doors.
Heavy Duty Door Closers:
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
LCN:
FINISH HARDWARE
4011/4111
Section 087100 – Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
b.
2.
c.
D.
ANSI Grade: BHMA/ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.
Closer Construction: Closer shall have cast iron or aluminum alloy body
with 1-1/2 inch steel piston, double heat treated pinion, 5/8 inch bearing
journals, and full complement needle or caged ball bearings. Closer shall
be adjustable from sizes 1 through 6.
Provide closers with spring size adjustment dial for ease of adjusting.
Closer Release Devices
1.
Acceptable Products:
2.
a.
LCN:
SEM7800 Series
Substitutions as approved by Architect/Owner
Requirements:
1.
2.9
Substitutions as approved by Architect/Owner
Requirements:
a.
b.
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide 35 pound electro-magnetic hold open device constructed of die cast
metal or plastic. Electromagnet shall accept 120VAC, 24VDC, and/or 12VDC
power from fire alarm. Provide mounting style as scheduled.
ARCHITECTURAL DOOR TRIM
A.
Protection Plates and Edge Guards
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
2.
Requirements:
a.
B.
8400 Series
Ives:
Substitutions as approved by Architect/Owner
Provide .050 inch thick stainless steel protection plates with height as
scheduled. Plate shall have four beveled edges and countersunk screws.
Provide plate with width as follows:
1)
Pairs of Doors: Provide plate to be 1 inch less door width.
2)
Single Doors: Provide plate to be 2 inches less door width on push
side, pull side mounted plates to be 1 inch less door width.
Door Stops and Holders
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
2.
WS407
Ives:
Substitutions as approved by Architect/Owner
Requirements:
a.
Provide stops and holders as indicated in the HW sets.
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
b.
2.10
Where wall bumpers are scheduled, provide concave rubber bumper where
the adjacent lever trim incorporates a push-button. Otherwise, provide
convex rubber bumpers.
FINISHES
A.
Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and
locksets (or push-pull units if no latch or locksets).
B.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case
less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C.
The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are
those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination
with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
D.
The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are
the industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.
1.
Brushed Chrome and/or Stainless Steel Appearance
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
PART 3 3.1
Brushed Stainless Steel, no coating: ANSI 630.
Satin Chrome, Clear Coated: ANSI 626, ANSI 652.
Powder Coated Aluminum finish: ANSI 689.
Saddle and Panic Thresholds: Mill Aluminum finish.
Weatherstrip and Gasket: Clear Anodized Aluminum finish.
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor
construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.
1.
B.
3.3
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to
ANSI A250.6.
Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.
INSTALLATION
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 10
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
A.
Hardware Installers must have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in installation of
hardware. Provide verification of installer’s qualification to Consultant for approval. All
installers to attend review meetings with the hardware distributor.
B.
Install hardware using only manufacturer supplied and approved fasteners in strict
adherence with manufacturers published installation instructions.
C.
Install head seal prior to installation of “PA”-parallel arm mounted door closers and
push side mounted door stops/holders. Trim, cut and notch thresholds and saddles
neatly to minimally fit the profile of the door frame. Install thresholds and saddles in a
bed of caulking completely sealing the underside from water and air penetration.
D.
Counter sink through bolt of door pull under push plate during installation.
E.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated, as follows, unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1.
2.
3.
F.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that
are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on
substrates involved.
1.
2.
3.4
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce
attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Architectural Hardware Consultant: Architect shall engage a qualified Architectural
Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
B.
Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect door hardware and state in each report
whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether
door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each
door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be
adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 11
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced
accessibility requirements.
1.
B.
3.6
Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust
sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at
least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to
the leading edge of the door.
Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial
Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust,
including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to
ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION
A.
3.8
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A.
The following schedule of hardware sets shall be considered a guide and the supplier
is cautioned to refer to general conditions, special conditions, and the full requirements
of this section. It shall be the hardware supplier's responsibility to furnish all required
hardware.
B.
Where items of hardware are not definitely or correctly specified and are required for
completion of the Work, a written statement of such omission, error, conflict, or other
discrepancy shall be sent to the Architect, prior to date specified for receipt of bids, for
clarification by addendum.
C.
Adjustments to the Contract Sum will not be allowed for omissions or items of
hardware not clarified prior to bid opening.
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 087100 – Page 12
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
HW SET NO: 01
DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors)
101
6
1
1
1
1
2
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
2
2
2
1
2
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
HINGE
AUTO FLUSH BOLT
ENTRANCE LOCK
PERMANENT CORE
COORDINATOR
MOUNTING
BRACKET
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
WALL STOP
ASTRAGAL
SILENCER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
FB31T
ND53BD RHO
BY OWNER
COR X FL
MB
652
630
626
626
628
689
IVE
IVE
SCH
B/O
IVE
IVE
4111 HEDA
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
WS406/407CCV
139A
SR64
689
630
630
600
GRY
LCN
IVE
IVE
NGP
IVE
652
626
626
630
630
GRY
IVE
SCH
B/O
IVE
IVE
IVE
HW SET NO: 02
DOOR NUMBER: (Includes but is not limited to the following doors)
102
3
1
1
1
1
3
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
HINGE
CLASSROOM LOCK
PERMANENT CORE
KICK PLATE
WALL STOP
SILENCER
FINISH HARDWARE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND70BD RHO
BY OWNER
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
WS406/407CCV
SR64
Section 087100 – Page 13
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that
incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2
A.
B.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal
unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 , hot-dip galvanized unless
otherwise indicated.
Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel
studs and runners.
1.
Steel Studs and Runners:
a.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL
FRAMING
092216-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
b.
2.
C.
A.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:
a.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
b.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1.
2.3
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction
fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top
of studs to provide lateral bracing.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to
substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollowmetal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements
and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation
of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to
building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support
the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1.
B.
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for
installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or
ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive
materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates
fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL
FRAMING
092216-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.3
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent
necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce
thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings
indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1.
Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that
apply to framing installation.
2.
Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C
1063 that apply to framing installation.
3.
Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C
844 that apply to framing installation.
4.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that
apply to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services,
heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
A.
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater
than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts
penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,
install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of
finished assemblies.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL
FRAMING
092216-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
D.
E.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door
frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb
studs.
a.
Install two 18 ga. studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
3.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistancerated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
4.
Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly
indicated.
Direct Furring:
1.
Screw to wood framing.
2.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL
FRAMING
092216-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
Interior gypsum board.
Tile backing panels.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of
damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent
sagging.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are
mold damaged.
1.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
2.3
A.
American Gypsum.
CertainTeed Corp.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
PABCO Gypsum.
Temple-Inland.
USG Corporation.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.4
A.
Cornerbead.
Bullnose bead.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
Expansion (control) joint.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
C.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface
areas, use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,
fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Use setting-type
accessories.
compound
for
installing
paper-faced
metal
trim
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from
glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1.
E.
Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
assembly.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
GYPSUM BOARD
Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
092900 - 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.
Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F.
Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
G.
Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged,
and mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and
to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints
of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not
force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on
opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of
framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum
panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
2.
3.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or
smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.
ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at
these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed.
Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at
openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install
acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for
locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies,
including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3
A.
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Type X: As indicated on Drawings and vertical surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings and ceiling surfaces.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
Glass-Mat Interior Type: As indicated on Drawings.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise
indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize
end joints.
a.
3.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of panels.
b.
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
L-Bead: Use where indicated.
U-Bead: Use where indicated.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from
adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically
indicated as not intended to receive tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
3.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile and where indicated on Drawings.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise
indicated.
a.
4.
Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings and areas to receive gloss finish, if any.
a.
3.6
A.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123
"Interior Painting."
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123
"Interior Painting."
PROTECTION
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and
other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged
during drywall application.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
B.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and
other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
1.3
A.
1.4
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches
(150 mm) in size.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1.
2.
1.5
A.
Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) Samples of each type, color, pattern,
and texture.
Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
`
095113 - 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.6
A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity
installed.
Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal
to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Impact Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project
site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned
space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity,
temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any
way.
1.8
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained
at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1.
2.
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
`
095113 - 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.2
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
Source Limitations:
1.
2.
Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single
manufacturer.
Suspension System:
Obtain each type from single source from single
manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting
suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
D.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration
indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,
patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
1.
E.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for
each product type.
1.
2.3
A.
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which
face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface
according to ASTM E 795.
Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by
referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers'
proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from
each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type,
pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong
World Industries, Inc. “Ultima Health Zone” or comparable product by one of the
following:
1.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
B.
Color: White
C.
NRC: Not less than 0.70
D.
Edge/Joint Detail: Square, sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members]
[Flush reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members] [Beveled,
kerfed and rabbeted long edges and square, butt-on short edges].
E.
Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
F.
Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
`
095113 - 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
G.
2.4
A.
Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment:
Provide
acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that
inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and
showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273
and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung
metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated
that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.
1.
B.
High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for
"Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where highhumidity finishes are indicated.
Attachment Devices:
Size for five times the design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
seismic design requirements.
1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or
loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable,
conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a.
b.
2.
C.
Type: Postinstalled expansion or Postinstalled bonded anchors.
Corrosion Protection:
Stainless-steel components complying with
ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts;
Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or
other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190,
conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties:
requirements:
1.
2.
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide wires complying with the following
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating,
soft temper.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of
wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter wire.
Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to
accommodate seismic forces.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
`
095113 - 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
E.
Seismic Struts:
Manufacturer's
accommodate seismic forces.
F.
Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure
acoustical panels in place.
G.
Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips
spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees.
H.
Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system
designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels.
2.5
A.
A.
designed
to
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners
roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hotdip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating
designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.
Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
Cap Finish: Painted in color as selected from manufacturer's full range.
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
B.
struts
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
compression
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
1.
2.
B.
standard
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if
not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that
comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material,
finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1.
Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge
details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration
of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
`
095113 - 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
C.
2.
3.
A.
For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that
forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and
flange at exposed suspension member.
For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim:
Where indicated, provide
manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or
referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and
attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements and the
following:
1.
2.7
Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength
and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221
(ASTM B 221M) for Alloy and Temper 6063-T5.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils
(0.04 mm). Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's
written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking
finish.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and
effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
2.
3.
Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.
Concealed Joints:
Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining,
gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant.
Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which
acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
`
095113 - 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B.
Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
PREPARATION
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and
seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions
and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1.
B.
Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested firerated design.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to
support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with
a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for
substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or
elevated temperatures.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and
the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them
to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck.
Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or
adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into
concrete.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
`
095113 - 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing
required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment
of hanger wires.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member
supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not
more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum
of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.
Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area
and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
2.
3.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical
legs of moldings before they are installed.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling
suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter
corners accurately and connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E.
Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with
one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspensionsystem runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations
to provide a neat, precise fit.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by
flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with
bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped
flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspensionsystem surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of
exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose
by acoustical panel manufacturer.
Install hold-down and impact clips in areas indicated, in areas required by
authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
`
095113 - 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
7.
3.4
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise
indicated.
Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
CLEANING
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings,
and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
Remove and replace ceiling
components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate
evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
`
095113 - 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.5
A.
A.
1.7
A.
Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of
each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
1.6
Resilient base.
Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F .
FIELD CONDITIONS
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 70 deg F or more than, in spaces to receive resilient products during the
following time periods:
RESILIENT BASE AND
ACCESSORIES
096513-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
48 hours before installation.
2.
During installation.
3.
48 hours after installation.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
B.
After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures
within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than
95 deg F.
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE
Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
1.
Group: I (solid, homogeneous).
2.
Style and Location:
a.
Style B, Cove: .
B.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
C.
Height: 4 inches.
D.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
E.
Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
F.
Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
G.
Colors: Match Architect's sample.
2.2
A.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for
resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges,
RESILIENT BASE AND
ACCESSORIES
096513-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of resilient products.
B.
Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space
where they are to be installed.
1.
C.
3.3
At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and
installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by
resilient products.
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops
of adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of
resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G.
Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
H.
Job-Formed Corners:
1.
Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with
returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a.
2.
Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with
returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a.
Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.
RESILIENT BASE AND
ACCESSORIES
096513-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.4
A.
3.5
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient
products.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product
installation:
1.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
C.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
D.
Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND
ACCESSORIES
096513-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 099656 - QUARTZ EPOXY FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Section includes broadcast quartz epoxy and polyaspartic flooring system.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions and Section
[01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures].
2. Product Data: Submit specified products as follows:
1. Manufacturer’s product data, including manufacturer’s SPEC-DATA product
sheet.
2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3. Catalog pages illustrating products to be incorporated into project.
4. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Samples: Submit as follows:
1. 12 inches × 12 inches (305 × 305 mm) samples of each resinous flooring system specified to
show color and texture with specified coats cascaded.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions and Section
[01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures].
2. Test and Evaluation Reports:
1. Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and
physical properties.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s storage and installation instructions.
099656-1
Quartz Flooring
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
4. Source Quality Control: Submit documentation verifying that components and materials
specified in this Section are from single manufacturer.
5. Qualification Statements:
1. Submit letter of verification for Manufacturer’s Qualifications.
2. Submit letter of verification for Installer’s Qualifications.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For epoxy flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Specify extra stock materials in accordance with Section [01 78 46 - Extra Stock
Materials]. Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products
installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive
labels. Comply with Section [01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals].
1. Quantity: Provide minimum 10 % of product referenced in 1.01.A].
2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner’s requirements for delivery,
storage, and protection of extra materials.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer:
1. 10 years experience manufacturing components similar to or exceeding requirements of
project.
2. Having sufficient capacity to produce and deliver required materials without causing delay in work.
3. Capable of providing field service representation during construction.
2. Installer: Acceptable to the manufacturer, experienced in performing work of this section and
has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.
C. Mock-Up: Construct mock-up where directed by Architec] in accordance with Section [01 43
00 - Quality Assurance].
1. Construct showing [section subject matter] work.
2. Dimensions and Process: Construct to [5 feet × 5 feet (1.52 m × 1.52 m)] using proposed procedures, colors, textures, finishes and quality of work.
3. Purpose: To judge quality of work, substrate preparation, operation of equipment and
material application.
099656-2
Quartz Flooring
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
4. Locate where directed.
5. Do not proceed with work prior to receipt of written acceptance of mock-up.
6. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this
work. Approved mock-up may remain part of finished work.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
1. Deliver material in accordance with Section [01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements] and in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging with identification labels intact and in sizes to suit project.
2. Storage and Handling Requirements:
1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature
conditions recommended by manufacturer.
C. Packaging Waste Management:
1. Separate waste materials for recycling in accordance with [Section 01 74 19 - Construction
Waste Management and Disposal].
2. Remove packaging materials from site and dispose of at appropriate recycling facilities.
3. Collect and separate for disposal [paper] [plastic] [polystyrene] [corrugated cardboard]
packaging material [in appropriate onsite bins] for recycling.
4. Fold metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
5. Remove:
a. Pallets from site.
1.9
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions:
1. Installation Location: Assemble and erect components only when temperatures are
above [55 degrees F (13 degrees C)].
2. Maintain materials, substrates and surrounding air temperature between [65 degrees F
(18 degrees C)] [85 degrees F (29 degrees C)] during, and 48 hours after completion of
{product referenced in 1.1.1}.
099656-3
Quartz Flooring
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUARTZ FLOORING SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer: Elite Crete Systems is the basis of design. Products of equal specifications
need to be approved prior to bidding.
1. Single Source Responsibility: Provide components and materials specified in this section
from a single manufacturer.
2. Substitution Limitations:
a. Substitutions: In accordance with Contract Conditions [Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
B. Description:
1. Regulatory Requirements:
a. In accordance with Section [01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements].
2. Compatibility:
a. Ensure components and materials are compatible with specified accessories and adjacent
materials.
C. Quartz Broadcast Epoxy Floor Coating:
1. Epoxy Mortar: [E100-PT1 Standard] [E100-PT1 Fast Set] and 50 sieve silica quartz.
2. Base Coat: [E100-PT4 Standard Set Pigmented Epoxy] [E100-PT4 Fast Set Pigmented
Epoxy] [SPARTIC-ALL RM- Clear Polyaspartic Coating].
a. Color: As selected by the Architect].
3. Quartz Aggregate:
a. Color: As selected by the Architect.
4. Top Coat: SPARTIC-ALL RM- Clear Polyaspartic Coating.
5. Protective Coat: AUS-V:
a. Sheen: Satin.
D. Materials:
1. Primer: E100-VB5 Epoxy Vapor Barrier.
1. Percent Solids ASTM D3960: 58.
2. VOC Content ASTM D3960: 0 percent.
3. Bond Strength (ASTM D4541): Substrate failure >450 psi.
2. Base Coat: E100-PT4 Pigmented Epoxy.
099656-4
Quartz Flooring
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
1. Percent Solids ASTM D3960:100.
2. VOC Content ASTM D3960: 0 percent.
3. Compressive Strength (ASTM D645): Not less than 9500 psi.
4. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): Not less than 7700 psi.
5. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790): Not less than 4500 psi.
6. Shore D Hardness (ASTM D2240): Not less than 83 (7 days).
g. Color: As selected by the Architect.
3. Quartz Aggregate: Elite Crete Systems Brand or approved equal prior to bidding.
4. Clear Top Coat: [E100-UV1] Clear Epoxy.
1. Percent Solids ASTM D3960: 100.
2. VOC Content ASTM D3960: 0 percent.
3. Compressive Strength (ASTM D645): Not less than 12,000 psi.
4. Tensile Strength (D638): Not less than 7100 psi.
e. Abrasion Resistance (ASTM D4060): Not more than 30 mg loss, CS-Wheel, 1 kg load at
1000 cycles.
f. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790): Not less than 7500 psi.
g. Shore D Hardness (ASTM D2240): Not less than 89 (7 days).
5. Polyaspartic Coating: SPARTIC-ALL RM- Clear Polyaspartic Coating:
1. Percent Solids ASTM D2369: 75.
2. VOC Content ASTM D2369: 122 g/l.
3. Compressive Strength (ASTM D645): At 73 degrees F:
1. 1) 8 Hours: 7300 psi.
2. 2) 1 Day: 11,200 psi.
3. 3) 7 Days: 14,100 psi.
4. Tensile Strength (D638): Not less than 7100 psi, with elongation at break of 9.2 percent.
5. Abrasion Resistance (ASTM D4060): Not more than 30 mg loss, CS-Wheel, 1 kg load at
1000 cycles.
6. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790): Not less than 11,100 psi at 7 days.
7. Shore D Hardness (ASTM D2240): Not less than 89 at 7 days.
Specifier Note: Retain below only if Flake Broadcast Epoxy Floor Coating System is specified.
099656-5
Quartz Flooring
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
E. Mixes:
1. Mix components in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that conditions of substrates previously installed under other
sections or contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions prior to fluid-applied flooring installation.
1. Inform Architect of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
2. Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied [and after receipt of written approval from Architect.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations and coordinate with Section [01 71 00 - Examination and Preparation].
B. Demolition/Removal:
1. Demolish & remove any excessive existing uneven patches above a leveled floor.
2. Grind and smooth floor to an acceptable condition to conform to the manufacture’s requirement.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Coordinate application of components in accordance with Section [01 73 13 - Application].
1. Apply components in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Double broadcast quartz aggregate.
3.04 CLEANING
1. Perform cleanup in accordance with Section [01 74 00 - Cleaning and Waste Management] and Section [01 74 13 - Progress Cleaning].
2. Upon completion, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance
with Section [01 74 23 - Final Cleaning].
C. Waste Management:
1. Coordinate recycling of waste materials with [01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal].
099656-6
Quartz Flooring
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
2. Collect recyclable waste and dispose of or recycle field generated construction waste
created during demolition, construction or final cleaning.
3. Remove recycling containers and bins from site.
3.05 PROTECTION
1. Protect installed product from damage during construction in accordance with Section
[01 76 00 - Protecting Installed Construction].
2. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by installation.
END OF SECTION
099656-7
Quartz Flooring
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION - 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following interior substrates:
1.
Concrete.
2.
Gypsum board.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
E.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.5
A.
1.6
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F .
1.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F .
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less
than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that
are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
C.
2.2
1.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Colors: USU Standard White.
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: [MPI #50.]
B.
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: [MPI #3.]
C.
Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: [MPI #149.]
D.
Primer, Bonding, Water Based: [MPI #17.]
2.3
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): [MPI #143.]
B.
Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): [MPI
#141.]
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.4
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint
materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when
samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site,
samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and
certified by testing agency.
2.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show
materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall
remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and
repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to
remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with
complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture
meter as follows:
1.
Concrete: 12 percent.
2.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3.
Wood: 15 percent.
4.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5.
Plaster: 12 percent.
C.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D.
Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E.
Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.
F.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
G.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
3.2
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of
size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
1.
C.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
D.
3.3
A.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or
apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and
chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted
exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
APPLICATION
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations
in "MPI Manual."
1.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and
similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory
primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple
coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but
provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
E.
Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic
Safety and Security Work:
1.
Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a.
2.
Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a.
3.
3.4
A.
3.5
Equipment, including panelboards.
Other items as directed by Architect.
Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing
and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies
with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6
A.
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1.
Latex System:
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123-5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
a.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior[, MPI #50].
b.
Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
d.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #53].
Gypsum Board Substrates:
1.
High-Performance Architectural Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior[, MPI #50].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching
topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #141].
END OF SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123-6
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 114000 – FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The extent of Food Service Equipment is shown on the drawings and by schedules and
equipment lists.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the contract documents, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- Specification sections apply to work of this
section.
B.
Bidder is responsible for information and requirements located and identified on every
part of the contract plans and specifications.
C.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Refer to this project’s specification sections Division
15 and Division 16, respectively, for mechanical and electrical services and
connections for individual items of Food Service Equipment.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards as applicable
to the manufacture, fabrication and installation of the work of this section:
NSF Standards: Comply with National Sanitation Foundation standards and
criteria, and provide NSF “Seal of Approval” on each manufactured item and on
major items of custom-fabricated work.
UL Standards: For electrical components and assemblies provide either UL
labeled products or, where no labeling service is available, “recognized
markings” to indicate listing in the UL “Recognized Component Index”.
ANSI Standards: For gas-burning equipment. Comply with ANSI Z21-Series
standard and provide labels indicating name of testing agency. Comply with
ANSI B57.1 for compressed Gas Association for compressed gas piping.
Comply with ANSI A40.4 and A40.6 for water connection air gaps and vacuum
breakers.
NFPA Standards: Comply with NFPA No. 96 for exhaust systems.
ASME Code: Comply with ASME Boiler code requirements for steam generating
and steam heated equipment; provide ASME inspection stamp and registration
with National Board.
National Electrical Code: comply with NFPA Volume 5 for electrical wiring and
devices included with Food Service Equipment, ANSI C2 and C73, and
applicable NEMA and NECA standards.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 1
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
B.
1.4
A.
Manufactured Products; Fabrication: Provide standard or custom manufactured
products to comply with requirements; otherwise, shop fabricate the work to the
greatest extent possible, in shops which are skilled and experienced with a minimum of
three years experience in the production of Food Service equipment.
SUBMITTALS
Production Data:
1.
2.
B.
A.
Submit (1) complete electronic set of documents, prior to ordering and/or
fabrication, of shop drawings showing layouts, elevations, sections and details of
custom fabricated work (work not shown by manufacturer’s standard product
data sheets). Show plan layouts at ¼” scale, elevations at ½” scale and details
at 1 ½” or larger scales, as required.
Samples
1.
1.5
Submit (1) complete electronic set, prior to ordering and/or fabrication, of
manufacturer’s or shop fabricator’s product information and installation
instructions for each item of Food Service Equipment. For operating equipment
include data on performance and operating characteristics, power/fuel
consumption, rough-in dimensions and sizes, drainage requirements and similar
information.
Submit (1) complete electronic set and (3) three sets of bound maintenance
manuals, operating instructions, spare parts list, precautions against hazards,
manufacturer’s warranties and similar information. Distribute an additional copy
of installation and start-up instructions to the installer. Mark each data sheet or
brochure with the project name and applicable project equipment number(s).
Shop Drawings
1.
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Submit (3) samples of each exposed finish on shop-fabricated and fieldfabricated Food Service Equipment. Submit 12” squares of sheet materials and
24” lengths of linear materials. Architect for color, pattern, and texture will review
samples; compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the
contractor.
PRODUCT HANDLING
Protect metal finishes from damage during shipping, storage, handling, installation and
construction of other work in the same space. Wrap and crate each item of equipment
as needed for protection from damage. Covers exposed stainless steel surfaces with
self-adhesive protective paper, of a type recommended by the metal manufacturer, and
do not remove until work is installed and ready for cleaning and start-up.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 2
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
Metals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Plastic Laminate:
1.
C.
NEMA LD3, Type 2, 0.051” thick, except Type 3, 0.042” for post-forming smooth
(non-texture) white unless another texture and color is indicated or selected by
Architect. Comply with NSF No. 35 where applicable.
Hardwood Work Surfaces:
1.
D.
Stainless Steel (S/S): AISI Type 302/304, hardest workable temper, No. 4
directional polish.
Galvanized Steel Sheet (G.I.): ASTM A526, except ASTM A527 for extensive
forming; ASTM A525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment. Where painted finish
is indicated, provide mill-phosphatized treatment in lieu of chemical treatment.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 569 hot-rolled carbon steel.
Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASTM A120, welded or seamless,
schedule 40, galvanized.
Steel Structure Members: Hot rolled or cold formed, carbon steel unless stainless
is indicated.
Galvanized Finish (G.I): ASTM A123 hot-dipped zinc coating applied after
fabrication.
Aluminum: ASTM B209/B221 sheet, plate and extrusions (as indicated); alloy,
temper and finish as determined by manufacturer/fabricator, except 0.40-mil
natural anodized finish on exposed work unless another finish is indicated.
Laminated edge-grained hard maple (Acer saccharum), NHLA First Grade with
Knots, holes and other blemishes culled out, kiln dried at 8% or less moisture,
waterproof glue, machined, sanded, and finished with NSF approved oil-sealer.
Insulation:
1.
2.
Cooled Component Insulation: Rigid, closed-cell polyurethane foam; either heataged slab stock for adhesive lamination with face sheets, or foamed in place
using Freon 11 as expanding agent; k-value of 0.15; not less than 1.7 lbs. Per cu
ft. density.
Heated-Component Insulation: Rigid board, semi-rigid blanket or adhesive
applied blanket of glass fiber or other mineral fiber insulation, certified by
manufacturer to withstand long-term exposure to heat (temperature rating of
each insulated equipment item) without deterioration. K-value of not more than
0.30; density of not less than 1.5 lbs. Per cu. Ft.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 3
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
E.
Joint Materials:
1.
2.
3.
F.
2.
3.
A.
Provide the types of painting and coating materials which, after drying or curing
are suitable for use in conjunction with foodservice, and which are durable, nontoxic, non-dusting, non-flaking, mildew resistant, and comply with governing
regulations for Food Service.
Sound Deadening:
1.
2.2
Sealant: 1-part or 2-part, polyurethane or silicone based, liquid elastomeric
sealant, non-solvent release type, Shore A hardness of 30 except 45 if subject to
traffic.
Backer Rod: Polyurethane rod stock, larger than joint width.
Gaskets: Solid of hollow (but not cellular) neoprene or polyvinyl chloride; light
gray, minimum of 40 Shore A hardness, self-adhesive or prepared for either
adhesive application or mechanical anchorage.
Paint and Coatings:
1.
G.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Heavy-bodied resinous coating, filled with granulated cork or other resilient
material, compounded for permanent, non-flaking adhesion to metal in a 1/8”
thick coating.
a.
Galvanized Repair Paint: MIL-P-21035.
b.
Pretreatment: SSPC-PT2 or PT3, or FT C490.
Primer Coating for Metal: FS TT-P-86 type suitable for baking where indicated.
Enamel for Metal: Synthetic types, FS TT-P-491, type suitable for baking where
indicated.
FABRICATED PRODUCTS
Hardware:
1.
General: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than ANSI 156.9 Type 2
(Institutional), satin finish stainless steel or dull chrome finish on brass, bronze or
steel.
a.
Cabinet Catches: Heavy-duty magnetic type, except as otherwise
indicated.
b.
Drawer Slides: Ball bearing type, side-mounting, self-closing, 250 lb.
capacity.
c.
Sliding Door Hardware: Overhead track with tandem nylon wheel hangers
for door leaves over 5 sq. ft. area; roller less sanitary slides for smaller
doors (comply with NSF standards).
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 4
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
B.
Casters:
1.
C.
General: Where exposed or semi-exposed, provide bright chrome-plated brass
or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed.
Water Outlets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Type and size as recommended by caster manufacturer, NSF approved, for the
type and weight of equipment supported; but not less than 4” diameter with
15/16” tread width, with sealed self-lubricating ball bearings, cadmium-plated
steel disc wheels and solid light-gray synthetic rubber tires. Provide stainless
steel horns and accessories. Unless otherwise indicated, equip each item with 2
swivel-type casters ad 2 fixed casters, and provide foot brakes on 2 castors on
opposite corners of equipment.
a.
Caster Bumpers: Unless equipment item is equipped with another form of
all-around protective bumper provide circular rotating bumper
above
each caster, 5” diameter tire of light gray synthetic rubber (hollow or
closed-cell) on cadmium-plated disc.
Plumbing Fittings, Trim and Accessories:
1.
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Water Fill Devices: At sinks and at other locations where water is supplied (by
manual, automatic or remote control), provide commercial quality faucets, valves,
dispensers or fill devices, of the type and size indicated, and as required to
operate as indicated.
Vacuum Breakers: Provide with Food Service Equipment where
specified/required.
Waste Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide 2” remote-lever waste
valves, and 3.5” strainer basket. Integrate unit for direct connection with waste
grinder where indicated.
P-Traps: Include removable P-traps where drains are indicated for direct
connection to drainage system.
Electrical Materials:
1.
General: Provide standard materials, devices and components as recommended
by the manufacturer/fabricator, selected and installed in accordance with NEMA
standards and recommendations; and as required for safe and efficient use and
operation of the Food Service Equipment without objectionable noise, vibration
and sanitation problems.
a.
Controls and Signals: Provide recognized and commercial grade signals,
“on-off” push button or switches, and other speed and temperature controls
as required for operation, complete with pilot lights and permanent signs
and graphics to assist the user of each item. Provide stainless steel cover
plates at control and signal electrical boxes.
b.
Connections: Equip each item requiring electrical power with either a
terminal box for permanent connection or cord-and-plug for interruptible
connection as indicated. Provide standard ground-type plugs, matching
outlets (specified in Division 15), light gray (plug and cord)
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 5
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
c.
d.
2.3
A.
Motors: Totally enclosed type, except drip-proof type where not exposed to
a dust or moisture condition; ball bearings, except sleeve bearings and
small timing motors; winnings impregnated to resist moisture; horse-power
and duty-cycle ratings as required for the service indicated.
Power Characteristics: Refer to Division 16 specifications for project power
characteristics. Also, refer to individual equipment requirements for loads
and ratings.
FABRICATION OF METALWORK
General Fabrication Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Remove burrs form sheared edges of metalwork, ease the corners and smooth
to eliminate cutting hazard. Bend sheets of metal at not less than the minimum
radius required avoiding grain-separation in the metal. Maintain flat, smooth
surfaces without damage to finish. Reinforce metal at locations of hardware,
anchorage and accessory attachments, wherever metal is less than 14 gage or
requires mortise application. Conceal reinforcements to the greatest extent
possible. Weld in place on concealed faces.
Where fasteners are permitted, provide Phillips head, flat or oval head machine
screws. Cap threads with acorn nuts unless fully concealed in inaccessible
construction, and provide nuts and lock washers unless metal for tapping is at
least 12 gauge. Match fastener head finish with finish of metal fastened.
Provide removable panels for access to mechanical and electrical service
connections that are concealed behind or within foodservice equipment, but only
where access is not possible and not indicated through other work.
Metal and Gauges:
1.
Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate exposed metalwork of stainless steel;
fabricate the following components from the gauge of metal indicated, and other
components from not less than 20-gauge metal:
a.
Table tops, Counter tops, Sinks, Drain-boards: 14 Gauge.
b.
Shelves: 16 gauge, 18 gauge if less than 12” wide.
c.
Front Drawer/Door Panels: 18 gauge (double-pan type).
d.
Single-Pan Doors and Drawer Fronts: 16 gauge
e.
Enclosed Base Cabinets: 18 gauge
f.
Enclosed Wall Cabinets: 18 gauge
g.
Exhaust Hoods: 18 gauge
h.
Pan Type Inserts and Trays: 16 gauge
i.
Skirts and Enclosure Panels: 18 gauge
j.
Closure and Trim strips over 4” wide: 18 gauge
k.
Hardware Reinforcement: 12 gauge
l.
Gusset Plates: 10 gauge
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 6
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
C.
Work-Surface Fabrication:
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.
3.
For any field joint required because of size of fixture, butt-joint, reinforce on
underside with angles of same material, bolt together with non-corrosive bolts
and nuts, field weld, grind and polish.
Pipe Bases:
1.
2.
G.
Except as otherwise indicated, provide framing of minimum 1”-pipe-size round
pipe or tube members, with mitered and welded joints and gusset plates, ground
smooth. Provide 14 gauge stainless steel tube joints for exposed framing and
galvanized steel pips for concealed framing.
Where indicated, flange rear and end edges up to form splashes integrally with
top, with vertical and horizontal corners coved on not less than ¼” radius, die
formed. Turn back splashes 1” to wall across top and ends with rounded edge
on break unless otherwise specified.
For die-crimped edges, use inverted “V” ½” deep inside and 2” deep on outside,
unless otherwise shown. For straight down flanges, make 1 ¾” deep on outside.
For bull nose edges, roll down 1 ¾”.
a.
Edges: die-formed, integral with top. For rounded corners, form to 1”
radius, weld, and polish to original finish.
Field Joints:
1.
F.
Fabricate metal work surfaces by forming and welding to provide seamless
construction, using welding rods matching sheet metal, grinding and polishing.
Where necessary for disassembly, provide waterproof gaskets draw-type joints
with concealed bolting.
Reinforce work-surfaces 30” o.c. both ways with galvanized or stainless
concealed structural members, reinforce edges which are not self-reinforced by
formed edges.
Sound deaden underside of metal work-surfaces, including sinks and similar
units, with a coating of sound deadening material. Hold coating back 3” from
sanitary edges that are open for cleaning.
Structural Framing:
1.
E.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Construct pipe bases of 1-5/8” diameter 18 gauge stainless steel tubing. Fit legs
with polished stainless steel sanitary adjustable bullet feet to provide for
adjustment of approximately 1 ½” without exposing threads.
Space legs to provide ample support for tops, preclude any possibility of buckling
or sagging and in no case more than 6’-0” centers.
Shelves:
1.
Construct solid shelves under pipe base tables of 16 gauge stainless steel, with
1 ½” turned down and under edges, and 2” turn up at rear, against walls, welded
to pipe legs.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 7
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
H.
Sinks:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
I.
2.
3.
4.
Best quality in the trade. Field verify dimensions, check measurements before
fabricating; conform all items to dimensions of building; neatly fit around pipes,
offsets and other obstructions.
Fabricate only in accordance with approved shop drawings, showing all pipes,
obstructions to be built around, and location of utilities and services.
After the General Contractor has approved Shop Drawings, he is responsible for
preventing additional obstructions being placed in way of kitchen equipment.
Where equipment is exposed to customer view, provide enclosure of service
lines, operating components and mechanical and electrical devices.
Enclosures:
1.
K.
Construct sinks of 14 gauge stainless steel No. 4 finish inside and outside. Form
back, bottom, front, of one piece with ends, partitions, welded into place.
Partitions: double thickness, 1” minimum space between walls.
Cove interior vertical and horizontal corners of each tub not less than ¼” radius,
die formed. Outside ends of drain boards to have roll rim risers not less than 2
½” high.
Drill faucet holes in splashes 2 ½” below top edge on 8” centers.
Weld sinks set into drain boards by 1 ½” x 14 gauge stainless steel angle
brackets, securely welded to sinks and galvanized cross angles spot welded to
underside of drain boards.
Sink Drains: Install in center of bottom of each sink bowl 1 ½” I.P.S. quick
opening pop-up lever type drain approximately 4” high, with a 4 ½” flange with
lugs, and fit with 3-1/8” stainless steel strainer plate.
Lever Handle: Of sufficient length to extend to front of sink, threaded at one end
and fitted with tension spring. No riveting, screws or soldering permitted to fit
drains to sinks, with all parts of drains easily removable for servicing and
replacement.
Slope bottom of sink bowls toward outlet. Include chrome-plated tailpiece and
trap.
Workmanship:
1.
J.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide enclosures, including panels, housings and skirts for service lines,
operating components and mechanical and electrical devices associated with the
Food Service Equipment, except as specifically indicated to be “open”.
Casework:
1.
At fabricator’s option, and unless otherwise indicated, provide either box-type
face framing or open-channel-type (complying with NSF requirements in either
case).
a.
Enclosure: Except as otherwise indicated, provide each unit of casework
(base, wall, overhead and free-standing) with a complete enclosure metal
cabinet, including fronts, backs, tops, bottoms, and sides.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 8
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
L.
Door and Drawer Fronts: Except where single-pan construction is
indicated, provide double-pan type, not less than 5/8” thick, with seams on
inside face. Weld hardware reinforcement inside of inner pan. Sound
deaden by either coating both pans on concealed face, or inserting mineral
wool insulation between pans.
Shelves: Except as otherwise indicated, provide adjustable standards for
positioning and support of shelves in casework. Turn back-edge of shelf
unit up 2” and hem. Turn other edges down to form open channel.
Reinforce shelf units to support 40 lbs. per sq. ft. loading, plus 100%
impact loading.
Drawer Bodies: Except as otherwise indicated, draw-form drawer bodies
from a single piece of metal to provide seamless construction. Flange top
edge to protect slides from spillage.
Closed Base: Where casework is indicated to be located on a raised-floor
base, prepare casework for support without legs, and for anchorage and
sealant application, as required for a completely enclosed and concealed
base.
Support from Floor: Equip floor-supported mobile units with casters and
equip items indicated as “roll-out” units with manufacturer’s standard onedirectional rollers. Otherwise, and except for closed-base units, provide
pipe or tube legs, with adjustable bullet-design feet for floor-supported
items of fabricated metalwork. Provide 1 ½” adjustment of feet (concealed
threading).
Exhaust Hood Fabrication:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
M.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Comply with NFPA -96, including Appendix A.
Grease Removal: Provide type indicated (removable filters if not otherwise
indicated), with drip-channel gutters, drains and collection basing.
Light Fixtures: Fluorescent fixtures, UL listed for hoods with sealed safety lenses
flush with inside of hood; stainless steel conduit for wiring/or UL listed for hoods,
incandescent fixtures with sealed safety lenses surface mount.
Exhaust Duct: Galvanized steel, except stainless steel where exposed to view
inside the building.
Exhaust Fan: Manufacturer’s standard type (complying with section 5 of NFPA96) (see also Mech. Section).
Fire Extinguishing System:
1.
2.
3.
Material: System is to utilize a Wet Chemical system complying with NFPA No.
17 and 96 and UL 300.
The bidder is responsible to submit the necessary shop drawings and submittals
required by the local authorities for a review of the Fire and Life Safety
requirements of the specified system(s).
Shop Drawings: The Fire Suppression System Contractor is to submit shop
drawings for the fire suppression system that are to include:
a.
The name of the Owner/Occupant.
b.
Site address and compass orientation indication.
c.
Installing Fire Suppression Contractor’s name, address and telephone
number.
d.
Graphic representation of scale for the drawings.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 9
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
e.
4.
5.
6.
7.
N.
Hazard analysis with sufficient detail and dimensions to evaluate the
hazard. Details are to include materials involved, location and arrangement
and exposure to the hazard, combustibles, air handling equipment and
heat sources.
f.
Information and calculations on the amount of suppression agent to be
used.
g.
Indicate the size, length and arrangement of connected piping or piping
and hose, including all fittings.
h.
Indicate the description and location of nozzles to be used including flow
rates of nozzles for engineered systems.
i.
Indicate with details to identify apparatus and devices to be used.
j.
Indicate location of all alarm-initiating and alarm-signaling devices.
k.
Indicate location and function of operating devices, auxiliary equipment and
electrical circuitry if used.
l.
Show location of annunciation panel.
m.
Show location of power connection for fire extinguishing system as
applicable including breaker number(s).
n.
Show location of gas connection and shut off as applicable.
o.
Identify type and location of manual activating device to operate the fire
extinguishing system.
Certificate of Compliance: The Fire Suppression System Contractor must provide
at the completion of the project, certification that the system has been installed in
accordance with the approved plans and the manufacturer’s listed installation
and maintenance manual.
Operation Instructions and As-Built Drawings: The Fire Suppression System
Contractor must provide at the completion of the project, one set of
manufacturer’s listed installation and maintenance manuals or listed owner’s
manual that describes the system’s operation, required maintenance and
recharging to the Owner.
System Alterations: When field conditions necessitate any substantial changes
from the approved plans, the corrected As-Installed plans are to be prepared and
submitted.
Equipment List: Provide a complete equipment list for approval and before the
installation of the fire alarm system identifying:
a.
Type and model of fire extinguishing devices.
b.
Manufacturer of fire extinguishing devices.
c.
Manufacturer catalog data sheets for fire extinguishing devices.
d.
Listing and capability of all equipment with the fire extinguishing system.
Shop Painting:
1.
Clean and prepare metal surfaces to be painted; remove rust and dirt, apply
treatment to zinc-coated surface that has not been mill-phosphatized. Coat
welded and abraded areas of zinc-coated surfaces with galvanized repair paint.
Apply 1.5 mil (dry film thickness) metal primer coating, followed by 2, 1.0 mil (dry
film thickness) metal, enamel finish coatings. Bake primer and finish coatings in
accordance with paint manufacturer’s instructions for a baked enamel finish.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 10
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
2.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide either single or multiple compressor units, as recommended by the
manufacturer for the sizes and variations between connected evaporator loads as
indicated.
B.
Provide units of the capacities indicated, arranged to respond to multiple-evaporator
thermostats and defrosting timers. Include coils, receivers, compressors, motors,
motor starters, mounting bases, vibrations insulation units, fans, dryers, valves, piping,
insulation, gauges, winter control equipment, high ambient control equipment, and
complete automatic control system.
C.
Refrigerant: Pre-charge units with type or types recommended by manufacturer for
services indicated, with quick disconnect type connections where specified, ready to
receive refrigerant piping runs to evaporators and (where remote) to condensers.
D.
Provide air-cooled condensers, located with the compressors, complete with refrigerant
piping installed at the factory. Locate exterior units as shown with weather housings
and protective enclosures.
E.
The minimum outdoor operating ambient temperature for design of units is -10 degrees
F. Maximum ambient condition for load on the air cooled condenser is 95 degrees F.
with 75% relative humidity in basically still air, or units to be provided with high ambient
temperature controls.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) EQUIPMENT
Where equipment requires connection with compressor CO2 cylinder for operation,
provide 2-cylinders manifold and control system (integral with equipment) with proper
connectors for Department of Transportation’s (DOT) approved type cylinders, and
complete with cylinder safety devices and supports. Comply with ANSA B57.1
“Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections”, and comply with
applicable standards of the Compressed Gas Association.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
Nameplate:
1.
B.
Wherever possible, locate nameplates and labels on manufactured items in
accessible position, but not within customer’s normal view. Do not apply
nameplates or labels on custom-fabricated work, except as required for
compliance with governing regulations, insurance requirements or operator
performance.
Manufactured Equipment Items:
1.
Furnish items as scheduled or herein specified. Verify dimensions, spaces,
rough in and service requirements and electrical characteristics before ordering.
Provide all trim, accessories, and miscellaneous items for complete installation.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 11
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A.
The installer of the Food Service Equipment must examine the rough in of mechanical
and electrical services by others, and the conditions under which the work is to be
done and must verify dimensions of the services and substrates before fabricating the
work. Notification of unsatisfactory conditions for the proper installation of the Food
Service Equipment must be made in writing to the General Contractor.
B.
Do not proceed with the fabrication and installation until unsatisfactory dimensions and
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
C.
Bidder is to verify site conditions to allow for the physical installation of each piece of
equipment. Any consideration or associated cost required allowing for the installation is
to be the responsibility of the bidder.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Water Connections: Install water connections and outlets at each item of equipment,
with air gaps, vacuum breakers and similar provisions to comply with governing
regulations, but not less than compliance with ANSI Standards A40.4 and A40.6.
B.
Gas burners: Install gas burning appliances, including gas vents if necessary, to
comply with NFPA No. 54.
C.
Electrical Work: Assemble electrical components of equipment in accordance with
applicable “Standards of Installation” by the National Electrical Contractors
Association.
D.
Service Line and Equipment Connections: Refer to division 15 sections for piping
connections and piping systems. Refer to division 16 sections for electrical work
including equipment connections.
E.
Jointing and Anchoring:
1.
2.
3.
Set each items of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place and
level and adjust to correct height. Anchor to supporting substrate where
indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or
dislocation. Conceal anchorage wherever possible. Adjust counter tops and
other work surfaces to a level tolerance of 1/6” (maximum offset, and plus-orminus on dimensions, and maximum variation in 2’-0” run from level of indicated
slope).
Complete field assemble joints in the work (joints which cannot be completed in
the shop) by welding, bolting and gaskets, or similar methods as indicated.
Grind welds smooth and restore finish. Set or trim flush, except for “T” gaskets
as indicated.
Treat enclosed spaces (inaccessible after equipment installation) by covering
horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at a rate of 4 oz. per sq. ft..
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 12
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.3
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Install closure plates and strips where required, with joints coordinated with units
of equipment.
Install sealant and gaskets all around each unit to make joints air tight,
waterproof, vermin-proof, and sanitary for cleaning purposes.
In general, make sealed joints not less than 1/8” wide, and stuff with backer rod
to shape sealant bead properly, at ¼” depth.
Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave, with edges flush with faces
of material joint.
At internal-corner joints, apply sealant or gasket to form a sanitary cove, of not
less than 3/8” radius.
Provide sealant-filled or gasket joints up to 3/8” joint width; metal closure strips
for wider joints, with sealant application each side of strips. Anchor gaskets
mechanically or with adhesives to prevent displacement.
CLEANING:
A.
After completion of installation, and completion of other major work in Food Service
areas, remove protective coverings, if any, and clean Food Service Equipment,
internally and externally.
B.
Restore exposed and semi-exposed finishes to remove abrasions and other damages;
polish exposed-metal surfaces; touch-up painted surfaces. Replace work that cannot
be successfully restored.
C.
Remove and dispose off site any and all crating and packaging material.
3.4
TESTING AND START-UP:
A.
Delay the start-up of equipment until service lines have been tested, balanced, and
adjusted for pressure, voltage and similar consideration; and until water and steam
lines have been cleaned and treated for sanitation.
B.
Test each item of operational equipment to demonstrate that it is operating properly,
and that controls and safety devices are functioning. Repair or replace equipment that
is found to be defective in its operation, including units that are below capacity or
operating with excessive noise or vibration.
C.
Final Cleaning: After testing and start-up, clean and sanitize the Food Service
Equipment, and leave in a condition ready for use in food service.
3.5
A.
INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING:
Instruct the owner and any and all representatives of the owner in the proper operation
and maintenance of each piece of operational equipment.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 13
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
3.8
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
WARRANTY:
Each item is to include parts and labor warranty of no less than one year, and longer
as standard to the manufacturer’s warranty.
INSTALLATION SCHEDULE:
Bidder is to review the projected construction schedule with the Contractor prior to
bidding and be able to accomplish the installation of the Food Service Equipment
within the requirements of the project schedule.
BIDDING FORMAT:
A.
Bidder will provide a completed bid form for each section of work being bid, as per the
General Conditions of this specification.
B.
The successful bidder will be required to submit an itemized list with individual costs for
each piece of equipment included in the bid. Freight is to be included in the itemized
cost for each item. Installation costs are to be itemized separately. A total amount is to
be listed that includes all costs to complete the work.
C.
Change orders requested by the owner or required by job conditions to add to the
equipment requirements are to be on a ‘cost plus’ basis. Bidder is to submit a proposal
for a percentage amount that will be applied to equipment costs for all change orders.
D.
Change orders to delete equipment items will be directly related to the itemized costs
breakdown provided.
3.9
A.
3.10
A.
DISCREPANCIES:
Any discrepancies or errors located or identified in or between the specifications and
plans are to be brought to the attention of the designer in writing prior to, or with the bid
submittal. Any such item not identified which would cause the bid to increase, will be
the responsibility of the bidder to correct.
ACCEPTABLE SUBSTITUTE MANUFACTURERS:
The items listed are to be bid as specified. Manufacturers requesting to be approved
as an equal substitute are to submit their request in writing to the Food Service
Consultant for consideration at least (7) days prior to the bid date. Manufacturers will
be considered approved and will be accepted as part of the bid only after being stated
as such in writing in the form of an addendum and will be accepted only if they equally
meet the specifications and standards of the specified manufacturer. A list of approved
substitute manufacturers is to be submitted with the successful bidders itemized
equipment list.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 14
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
B.
3.11
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
The bidder is solely responsible to insure that the requirements of any alternate or
approved equal manufacturer’s piece of equipment provided by them, comply with the
design intent of these documents including physical size, utility requirements and
function.
EXCLUSIONS:
The Owner reserves the right to exclude any and all items from the final contract.
PART 4 - ITEMIZED LIST OF EQUIPMENT
NOTE: ALL OWNER PROVIDED ITEMS ARE TO CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EXCEPT AS
NOTED.
ITEM #K-01
DRY STORAGE SHELVING: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
(1) lot
Inter Metro
Super Erecta, Zinc
(5) 60”W x 24”D x 86”H
(2) 54”W x 24”D x 86”H
(1) 48”W x 24”D x 86”H
None
A) Lot to include: (25) #2460NZ shelves
(10) #2454NZ shelves
(5) #2448NZ shelves
(18) #86PZ posts
(70) #9995Z ‘S’ clips
A) Assemble, set and level as per plan. (Verify actual field
dimensions for compliance.)
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-02
WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER BOX
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
(1) lot
Kolpack
#NS (Nominal Size)
Freezer: 8’-8”W x 13’-6”D x 7’-6”H (Verify height clearance on
site)
Cooler: 8’-8”W x 13’-6”D x 7’-6”H (Verify height clearance on site)
A) 115/60/1, 2.8 amps at door. Interconnect with (6) lights. (3) in
freezer and (3) in cooler.
B) 115/60/1, .2 amps, heated air vent. (2) each
A) Provide (2) each 34” stainless steel door unit with view
window. (1) at each box.
B) Provide (2) additional vapor proof light for a total of (3) lights at
freezer box and (3) lights in cooler.
C) Provide integral insulated floor panel in cooler and freezer with
internal ramp. Top of floor to be heavy gauge diamond plate
stainless steel panel.
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 15
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
D)
E)
F)
G)
H)
Installation Notes:
I)
J)
A)
B)
C)
Provide vacuum relief heated air vent at doors.
Provide side trim to walls.
Common center wall between cooler and freezer.
Provide additional door hinge to each door.
White finish on exposed exterior surface of box. Galvalume
finish on all other exterior surfaces of box.
White galvalume finish on interior exposed surface of box.
Provide ‘Thermo Curtain’ at each door.
Assemble and set in place as per plans to rough floor with
PVC floor screens.
General Contractor to provide floor tile and base.
Tile floor to extend into intersection with ramp with base
applied to the exterior of the box after installation. Door height
to compensate for floor tile dimension.
ITEM #K-03A
FREEZER REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: CONDENSER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) system
Kolpak
#PR-199LOPD-2 (Condenser)
33”W x 26”D x 20”H
A) 208/60/1, 16.7 amps. 2 H.P.
B) Interconnect refrigeration lines with item #K-03B.
A) Include: Pre piped Tecumseh hermetic compressors with
dryers, sight glasses and head pressure controls; pre-wired
electrical panel, defrost clock, pressure controls and
crankcase heaters. (Verify all requirements with
manufacturer).
B) Interconnect with blower coils, item #K-03B.
C) Mount in parking garage wall with angle iron brackets as per
architectural plan.
D) Air-cooled.
E) Size to maintain +0F in box as per plan.
A) Mount in parking garage as per manufacturers shop drawings.
B) Interconnect refrigeration lines with blower Coil, item #K-03B.
C) Set refrigeration equipment and provide and install expansion
coils, T-Stat, solenoid valves.
D) Provide and install refrigeration piping, insulation, fittings,
hangers, supports and hook-ups.
E) Charge each system with the refrigerant as specified by the
manufacturer.
F) Check, test, start up and final adjustments are to be provided.
G) General Contractor to provide floor and wall penetrations to
connect refrigeration lines as required
H) Electrical Contractor to interconnect refrigeration system as
required.
I) Electrical Contractor to provide defrost electrical inter-connect
to freezer units.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 16
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-03B
FREEZER REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: EVAPORATOR
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) system
Kolpak
Size to run with Condenser, item #K-03A.
#EL-090 (Evaporator). Size to run with Condenser, item #K-03A.
33”W x 21”D x 19”H
A) Fan: 208/60/1, 2.2 amps.
Heater: 208/60/1, 8.7 amps.
B) Indirect drain to floor sink.
C) Interconnect refrigeration lines with item #K-03A.
A) Interconnect with condenser Item #K-03A.
B) Mounting Hardware.
C) Size to maintain +0F in box as per plan.
A) Mount from walk-in ceiling.
B) Interconnect with Refrigeration Condenser, #K-03A as part of
pre-assembled remote system.
C) Electrical Contractor to interconnect refrigeration system as
required including defrost cycle.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-04A
COOLER REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: CONDENSER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) system
Kolpak
#PR-99MOPD-2 (Condenser)
33”W x 26”D x 19”H
A) 208/60/1, 7.7 amps, 1 H.P.
B) Interconnect refrigeration lines with item #K-04B
A) Include: Pre piped Tecumseh hermetic compressors with
dryers, sight glasses and head pressure controls; pre-wired
electrical panel, defrost clock, pressure controls and
crankcase heaters. (Verify all requirements with
manufacturer).
B) Interconnect with blower coils, item #K-04B.
C) Mount in parking garage wall with angle iron brackets as per
architectural plan.
D) Air-cooled
E) Size to maintain +35F in box as per plan.
A) Mount in adjacent storage room as per manufacturers shop
drawings.
B) Interconnect refrigeration lines with blower Coil, item #K-04B.
C) Set refrigeration equipment and provide and install expansion
coils, T-Stat, solenoid valves.
D) Provide and install refrigeration piping, insulation, fittings,
hangers, supports and hook-ups.
E) Charge each system with the refrigerant as specified by the
manufacturer.
F) Check, test, start up and final adjustments are to be provided.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 17
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
G) General Contractor to provide floor and wall penetrations to
connect refrigeration lines and chilled water system as
required
H) Electrical Contractor to interconnect refrigeration system as
required.
ITEM #K-04B
COOLER REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: BLOWER COIL
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) system
Kolpak
#AM-090, (Evaporator) Size to run with Condenser, item #K-04A..
41”W x 17”D x 15”H
A) 120/60/1, 4.2 amp.
B) Indirect drain to floor sink.
C) Interconnect refrigeration lines with item #K-04A.
A) Mounting hardware.
B) Size to maintain +35F in box as per plan.
A) Mount from Walk-In Box ceiling.
B) Interconnect with Refrigeration Condenser Item #K-03A.
C) Electrical Contractor to interconnect refrigeration system as
required.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-05
WALK-IN BOX SHELVING: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
(1) lot
Inter Metro
Super Erecta, Stainless Steel
(8) 54”W x 24”D x 74”H
(2) 48”W x 24”D x 74”H
None
A) Lot to include: (48) #2454NS shelves
(8) #2448NS shelves
(24) #74PS posts
(64) #9995Z ‘S’ clips
A) Assemble, set and level as per plan. (Verify actual field
dimensions for compliance.)
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 18
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-06
WALK-IN DUNNAGE RACK: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model #:
Dimensions:
Utilities:
Accessories:
Installation Notes:
(4) each
InterMetro
Super Erecta, #MHP53C
36”W x 24”D x 14-1/2”H
None
A) Wire Mat
A) Assemble, set and level as per plan.
ITEM #K-07
WALL MOUNT HAND SINK: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(3) each
Advance Tabco
#7-PS-67
17”W x 15”D x 13”H
A) ½” hot and cold water.
B) 1-1/2” Direct drain.
A) Towel and soap dispenser to be provided and installed by
owner.
B) Provide with faucet and drain.
A) Clip and seal to wall as per plan.
B) General Contractor to provide blocking in wall as required.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-08
QUEEN MARY CART: MOBILE: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(1) each
Carter Hoffman
#T-660
63”w x 27”d x 69”h
None
A) Perimeter bumper.
B) Heavy-duty casters with locks.
A) Assemble and set in place.
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 19
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-09
STAINLESS STEEL DIRTY DISH TABLE
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) each
Custom Metal Fabricated
Custom, as per plans and details.
8’-6”W x 2’-6”D x 34”H. Verify with field measurements.
A) ½” hot and cold water.
B) 1-1/2” indirect drain to floor sink
A) Built-in pre-rinse sink with removable scrap basket.
B) 8” back splash.
C) Provide 2’-6”W under shelf as per plan.
A) Set and level as per plans.
B) Clip and seal back splash to wall.
C) Verify entry requirements of dish machine to gently slope table
back to machine.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-10
STAINLESS STEEL DISH RACK WALL SHELF: PROVIDED BY
OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) each
Custom Metal Fabricated
Custom, as per plans and details.
5’-2”W x 21”D (Angled)
None
A) Provide with (2) mounting brackets.
A) Mount to wall at +54” a.f.f. to the bottom, as per plan.
B) General Contractor to provide blocking as required.
ITEM #K-11
TRASH RECEPTACLE: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) lot
By Owner
By Owner
Verify size with Plan
None.
A) By Owner.
A) Set in place as per plans.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 20
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-12
PRE-RINSE SPRAY: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) each
Chicago Faucet
#923
23”H
A) ½” hot and cold water.
A) Provide wall bracket.
B) Splash Mount.
A) Mount to dirty dish table, item #K-09, as per plan.
ITEM #K-13
STAINLESS STEEL WALL FLASHING
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) lot
Custom Fabricated
Custom
11’-7” x 10’-2” ‘L’ to ceiling (10’-0”H)
None
A) Stainless steel wall flashing on dish area wall from floor base
to ceiling.
B) Provide stainless steel “J” and “T” trim at seams and at top
edge.
A) Mount to wall as required.
ITEM #K-14
DISHWASHER: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) each
Hobart
#AM 15VL
25”W x 26”D x 69”H
A) 1/2” Hot and cold water Connection. 140 Degrees F. 15 to 25
PSI required.
B) 1-1/2” Indirect drain to extra deep floor sink.
C) 208/60/3, 45.4 Amp.
A) Electric tank heat.
B) Right to left corner operation as per plan.
C) Stainless steel finish.
D) Pre-wash temperature control.
E) Corner Unit.
F) Integral Booster Heater.
A) Set and level as per plan.
B) Attach dish tables as required.
C) Water hammer arrestor to be provided by Owner and installed
at water line by Plumbing Contractor.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-15
SPARE NUMBER
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 21
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-16
STAINLESS STEEL CLEAN DISH TABLE
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(1) each
Custom Metal Fabricated.
Custom.
6’-0”W x 2’-6”D x 34”H
None
A) 8” back splash.
B) Provide 5’-6”W under shelf as per plan.
A) Set and level as per plan.
B) Clip and seal back splash to wall.
C) Verify entry requirements of dishwasher. Gently slope table
back to dishwasher.
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-17
STAINLESS STEEL WALL SHELF: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) each
Custom Metal Fabricated
Custom, as per plans and details.
8’-0”W x 1’-2”D. (With angled end as per plan).
None
A) Provide with (3) mounting brackets.
A) Mount to wall at +60” A.F.F. as per plan.
B) General Contractor to provide blocking in wall as required.
ITEM #K-18
SPEED RACK: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(1) each
John Boos
#ABPR-1820-RKD
22”W x 26”D x 64”H
None
A) Perimeter bumpers.
B) Swivel casters, two with locks.
C) 20 pan capacity.
A) Assemble and set in place as per plan.
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 22
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-19
STAINLESS STEEL THREE COMPARTMENT SINK: PROVIDED
BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) each
Custom Metal Fabricated
Custom, as per plans and details.
91”W x 24”D x 37”H
A) ½” hot and cold water.
B) 1-1/2” indirect drain.
A) (2) each 14” swing arm faucet.
B) (3) each lever operated drain with built in overflow.
C) Sink compartment to be 18”W x 18”D.
D) 18” Drain boards on both sides.
A) Set and level as per plan.
B) Clip and seal back splash to wall.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-20
STAINLESS STEEL POT RACK/ WALL SHELF: PROVIDED BY
OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) each
Custom Metal Fabricated
Custom, as per plans and details.
91”W x 12”D
None
A) (24) pot hooks.
A) Mount level to wall at +6’8” a.f.f. to top of unit shelf as per plan.
(Verify with operator)
B) General Contractor to provide wall blocking as required.
ITEM #K-21
STAINLESS STEEL WALL FLASHING
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(1) lot
Custom Fabricated
Custom
91”W to ceiling (10’-0”H)
None
A) Stainless steel wall flashing on dish area wall from floor base
to ceiling.
B) Provide stainless steel “J” and “T” trim at seams and at top
edge.
A) Mount to wall as required.
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 23
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-22
KITCHEN SHELVING: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
(1) lot
Inter Metro
Super Erecta, Zinc
(1) 72”W x 24”D x 86”H
(4) 54”W x 24”D x 86”H
(1) 48”W x 24”D x 86”H
None
A) Lot to include: (5) #2472NZ shelves
(20) #2454NZ shelves
(5) #2448NZ shelves
(24) #86PZ posts
A) Assemble, set and level as per plan. (Verify actual field
dimensions for compliance.)
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-23
STAINLESS STEEL WORK TABLE: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(1) each
Thunder Group
#SLWT43084F
84”W x 30”D x 36”H
None.
A) Flat top.
B) Stainless steel under shelf.
A) Set and level as per plan.
B) Clip and seal back splash to wall.
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-24
STAINLESS STEEL WALL SHELF: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) each
Custom Metal Fabricated
Custom, as per plans and details.
84’W x 1’-2”D.
None
A) Provide with (3) mounting brackets.
A) Mount to wall at +60” A.F.F. as per plan.
B) General Contractor to provide blocking in wall as required.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 24
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-25
SLICER: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) each
Hobart
#2612P
20”W x 23”D x 17”H
A) 115/60/1, 1/2 HP
A) Standard Features.
A) Set in place as per plans.
ITEM #K-26
30 QUART MIXER: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model #:
Dimensions:
Utilities:
Accessories:
Installation Notes:
(1) each
Hobart
#D-300T
21”W x 22”D x 45”H
A) 120/60/1, 3/4 HP
A) Timer, thermal overload and starter.
B) Three fixed speeds.
C) Stainless steel bowl and bowl guard.
D) Attachment hub.
E) “B” beater and “D” stainless steel wire whip
A) Assemble and set in place as per plan.
ITEM #K-27
SPARE NUMBER
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 25
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-28
STAINLESS STEEL EXHAUST HOOD: With MAKE-UP AIR
PLENUM
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) each
Captive-Aire
#ND-2-PSP-F
22’-0”W x 5’-6”D x 2’-0”H
A) 120/60/1, 260 watt.
B) 120/60/1, 15 amp. (Duct Heat Sensor System)
B) Total exhaust 3,500 CFM at -0.5” SP. (4) 9” x 9” duct cut into
the back of the hood on site.
C) Total make-up air of 2,800 through (6) 16” x 8” duct collars at
front make-up air plenum.
A) PSP Perforated down draft make-up air plenum mounted 12”
below top edge of hood.
B) (4) Recessed fluorescent light fixtures.
C) Stainless steel enclosure panels from hood to ceiling.
D) Wall mount box canopy type unit.
E) Stainless steel trim to walls.
F) Provide hanger rods and seismic restraints.
G) Integral 3” dead air space as required.
H) 1” Insulate top layer, factory installed.
I) Stainless steel side panels.
J) Grease cup.
K) Provide duct heat sensor assembly at each of four exhaust
duct connections
A) Mount from structure above as per plan. (1,458) lb hood.
B) Mechanical Contractor to connect exhaust and make-up air
ducts.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-29
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(1) lot
Ansul
#R-102
A) Provide gas shut off valve and electrical shut off contacts as
required for protected equipment, for installation by
mechanical and electrical contractors.
A) Provide a complete self-contained and certified system.
B) To protect Exhaust Hoods, item #K-28. Tanks to be located on
end of hood as per plan. Verify placement.
C) Al conduits and piping to be concealed in walls and ceiling.
Exposed piping in hood to be chrome.
D) Verify placement of emergency pull station with architect.
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 26
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-30
STAINLESS STEEL WALL FLASHING
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(1) lot
Custom Metal Fabricated
Custom, as per plans and details.
22’-2”W at x 6’-6” a.f.f.
None
A) Stainless steel wall flashing on cook wall from floor base to
underside of hood at back wall.
B) Provide stainless steel “J” and “T” trim at seams and at top
edge.
C) Provide stainless steel end caps as required.
A) Mount to wall as required.
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-31
SIX BURNER/FLAT TOP GRIDDLE RANGE WITH STANDARD
and CONVECTION OVEN BASE: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) each
CPG
#60-CPGV-6B-24G-S2660SC-6B24GN
60”W x 32”D x 36”H (58”H with back riser shelf)
A) 1” natural gas, 280,000 btu/hr
B) 115/60/1, 4 amp.
A) Casters, 2 with locks.
B) 48” Quick disconnect flexible gas hose connector and fittings,
with wall tether.
C) Rear gas connection.
D) Stainless steel sides.
E) Double standard oven base.
F) 24” Flat top griddle top on right.
G) Six burner range on left.
H) Provide leak limiter pressure regulator as required.
A) Set in place as per plans.
B) Rough-in connection to be quick disconnect.
C) Adjust for local altitude as required.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 27
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-32
FRYER: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) each
Avantco
#FF300
16”W x 32”D x 36”H (48”H Top of Flue)
A) 3/4” natural gas, 90,000 btu/hr
B) 115/60/1, 6.1 amp.
A) Integral oil filter.
B) 48” Quick disconnect flexible gas hose connector and fittings,
with wall tether.
C) Rear gas connection.
D) Heavy duty casters.
E) Stainless steel sides.
F) Provide right side stainless steel side splash to adjacent stock
pot range.
G) Provide leak limiter pressure regulator as required.
A) Set in place as per plans.
B) Rough-in connection to be quick disconnect.
C) Adjust for local altitude as required.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-33
STEAMER: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) each
Cleveland
#24-CGA10.2ES
24”W x 35”D x 66”H
A) 115/60/1, 300 watts.
B) 3/8” Cold water. 35 PSI Min. / 60 PSI Max. Generator.
C) 1/2” Cold water. 35 PSI Min. / 60 PSI Max. Condenser.
D) 1-1/2” Indirect drain to floor sink.
E) 1-1/4”, Natural gas, 100,000 BTU/hr.
A) Electrical cord and plug.
B) Filter system to provide proper water quality.
C) 48” Quick disconnect flexible gas hose connector and fittings,
with wall tether.
D) Provide leak limiter pressure regulator as required
A) Set and level as per plans. Bolt to floor.
B) Water to be minimum requirements of: Total dissolved solids
of no greater than 60 parts per million; pH no greater than 7.5;
silica less than 13 parts per million; alkalinity less than 20
parts per million.
C) Rough-in connection to be quick disconnect.
D) Adjust for local altitude as required.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 28
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-34
STOCK POT RANGE: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(1) each
Bakers Pride
#BPSP-36-2-D
18”W x 25”D x 24”H
A) 3/4” natural gas, 180,000 BTU/hr
A) 48” Quick disconnect flexible gas hose connector and fittings,
with wall tether.
B) Provide leak limiter pressure regulator as required.
A) Set and level as per plans.
B) Rough-in to be quick disconnect fitting.
C) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as
required.
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-35
SPARE NUMBER
ITEM #K-36
STACKED CONVECTION OVEN: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(2) each
Bakers Pride
#BCO-G2
39”W x 42”D x 64”H
A) 3/4” gas, 120,000 BTU/hr
B) 115/60/1, 3.5 amp (2 each/item)
A) Stainless steel finish including top and sides.
B) Set of heavy-duty locking casters.
C) 48” Quick disconnect flexible gas hose connector and fittings,
with wall tether.
D) Provide with cord and plug.
E) Manifold each oven gas connection to a single point gas
connection.
F) Provide leak limiter pressure regulator as required
A) Set in place as per plan.
B) Rough-in connection to be quick disconnect.
C) Adjust for local altitude as required.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-37
SPARE NUMBER
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 29
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-38
STAINLESS STEEL WORK TABLE: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(2) each
Advance Tabco
#SS-488
84”W x 48”D x 36”H
None.
A) Stainless steel under shelf.
B) (2) Drawer mounted at each side.
A) Set and level as per plan.
ITEM #K-39
STAINLESS STEEL UTENSIL RACK: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(1) each
Advance Tabco
#SC-72
72”W x 22”D x 24”H
None.
A) Stainless steel bars.
B) (36) Hooks.
C) Ceiling mount stainless steel chain supports.
A) Mount from structure above ceiling with chains. Verify
mounting height with operator, approximately mount bottom of
unit at +6’-6” a.f.f.
B) General Contractor to provide sleeves through ceiling for chain
supports.
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-40
HEATED HOLDING CABINET: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model #:
Dimensions:
Utilities:
Accessories:
(1) each
Adcraft
#PW-120-36
28”W x 34”D x 59”H
A) 120/60/1, 1800 watt.
A) Stainless steel split door.
B) Edge mount door hinge. Swing door as per plan.
C) Edge mount door latch.
D) 5” locking casters.
E) Cord and plug.
F) Perimeter bumper guard.
A) Set in place as per plans.
Installation Notes:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 30
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-41
HEATED PLATE CARTS: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(2) each
Delfield
#HH02
23”W x 30”D x 40”H
A) 208/60/1, 13 amp.
A) Casters with brakes.
B) Perimeter bumper.
C) Hinged lid
A) Set in place as per plan.
ITEM #K-42
HEATED BANQUET CART: MOBILE. PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(3) each
Carter Hoffman
#BB48
2’-8”W x 2’-7”D x 4’-6”H
A) 120/60/1, 18 amp
A) Top mount door latch.
B) 6” locking casters.
C) Lock on cabinet door.
D) Cord and plug.
E) Perimeter bumper guard.
F) Lexan thermometer cover.
G) Menu cardholder mounted on door.
A) Set in place as per plans.
Installation Instructions:
ITEM #K-43A
REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR: TWO SECTION, MOBILE:
PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
(1) each
Turbo Air
#MSR-49NM
54”W x 32”D x 84”H
A) 120/60/1, 9.1 amps.
A) Self-contained air-cooled refrigeration.
B) Stainless steel finish with finished sides.
C) Exterior thermometer.
D) Set of heavy-duty locking casters.
A) Set in place as per plan.
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 31
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-43B
REACH-IN FREEZER: TWO SECTION, MOBILE: PROVIDED BY
OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) each
Turbo Air
#MSF-49NM
54”W x 32”D x 84”H
A) 120/60/1, 8.7 amps.
A) Self-contained, air-cooled refrigeration.
B) Stainless steel finish with finished sides.
C) Exterior thermometer.
D) Set of heavy-duty locking casters.
A) Set in place as per plan.
ITEM #K-44
ICE MAKER and BIN: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model #:
Dimensions:
Utilities:
(1) each
Manitowoc
#IY-0906A with #B-5700 (bin).
30”W x 34”D x 77”H
A) 3/8” cold water.
B) 1/2” indirect drain to floor sink.
C) 3/4” indirect drain to floor sink.
D) 208-230/60/1, 12.3 amp.
A) Stainless steel finish.
B) Provide filter for incoming water.
C) Self contained, air-cooled.
D) Mounting Adaptor #K00157.
A) Water pressure to be 7-113 PSIG.
B) Set and level as per plan.
Accessories:
Installation Notes:
ITEM #K-45
STAINLESS STEEL MOP SINK: PROVIDED BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
(1) each
By Owner
By Owner
27”W x 27”D x 27”H (44” to top of back splash)
A) 1/2” hot and cold water.
B) 1-1/2” indirect drain to floor sink.
A) (1) each 12” faucet, mounted to back splash.
B) (1) each lever operated drain with built in overflow.
C) (1) each faucet knock outs.
D) Provide stainless steel wall flashing from base to +60” a.f.f.,
across full width of sink. Provide with stainless steel “S” and
“J” trims at seams and at top.
A) Set and level as per plan.
B) Clip and seal back splash to wall.
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 32
Leonardo Building Remodel
Salt Lake City Corporation
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ITEM #K-46
STAINLESS STEEL JANITORIAL WALL CABINET: PROVIDED
BY OWNER
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) each
Custom Fabricated
Custom
30”W x 14”D x 36”H
None
A) As per plan and details.
B) Stainless steel hinged doors with locks.
C) Angled stainless steel top and finished stainless steel ends.
A) Mount to wall with bottom at +54” a.f.f.
ITEM #K-47
STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS
Quantity:
Manufacturer:
Model Number:
Dimensions:
Utility Requirements:
Accessories:
Installation Instructions:
(1) lot
Custom Metal Fabricated
Custom
3” x 3” x 72”H
None
A) Lot to include approximately (5) guards as per plan.
A) Attach to wall with glue and stainless steel screws as per plan.
END OF SECTION 011400
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114000 - 33
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 211000 - FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Interior above Ground Piping.
B.
Sprinkler System.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to this Section,
and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents.
B.
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
C.
The 211000 Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor, engineering,
drawings, etc. necessary for a complete sprinkler system ready for operation in
accordance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. The purpose of the
furnished specifications and associated drawings is to convey to the Contractor the
scope of work required, all of which the Contractor is responsible to furnish, install, adjust
and make operable. The Contractor shall visit the site before submitting the bid, and shall
examine all existing physical conditions which may be material to the performance of his
work. No extra payments will be allowed to the Contractor as a result of extra work made
necessary by his failure to do so. Any case of discrepancy or lack of clarity shall be
promptly identified to the Owner’s Representative and Engineer for clarification.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4
Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The work of this section shall include removal and reinstallation of sprinkler piping to clear
construction.
B.
Provide new deluge system as shown. See Section 230500, paragraph 1.4E.
C.
New piping shall be used where piping is changed to clear new construction.
D.
All existing sprinkler heads shall be removed and replaced with new sprinkler heads
except where new heads were installed for seismic work.
E.
Where sprinkler heads have previously been removed under a seperate abatement
contract, new heads shall be installed.
FIRE PROTECTION
211000-1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
F.
1.5
Upgrade seismic bracing for entire sprinkler system where not in compliance with current
codes.
DEFINITIONS
A.
The following are references with definition acronyms used in this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
U.L. - Underwriters Laboratory Listed for Fire Protection Systems.
F.M. – FM Global or Factory Mutual Research.
IRI - Industrial Risk Insurors (aka: F.I.A. Factory Insurance Association.)
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
Jurisdictional Agencies:
a.
b.
c.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.6
Building Department.
Fire Department or Fire Prevention Bureau or Marshal.
Insurance Agency, Carrier, and/or Underwriter as defined in Section 1.7.
Engineer refers to the consulting Mechanical Engineer of record.
Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).
Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA 13.
Working Plans as used in this Section mean those documents (including drawings
and calculations) prepared pursuant to the requirements contained in NFPA 13
for obtaining approval of the authority having jurisdiction.
Review and Approval will be only for conformance with the design concept of
the Project and for compliance with the information given in the Contract
Documents and shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction (except where a specific means, method,
technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by
the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.
The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of
the assembly in which the item functions.
SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Sprinkler System Requirements:
1.
2.
B.
1.7
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Remove and reinstall a wet pipe sprinkler system to boiler rooms, refrigeration
machinery rooms, laboratories and vocational shops, and similar areas as
required by code.
Provide a deluge sprinkler system to protect the deluge zones indicated on the
drawings. Deluge valve shall be controlled electrically by the fire alarm system.
Fire protection shall be designed and installed per NFPA 13 current published standards
and local Jurisdictional Agency requirements. Where a conflict occurs the more stringent
standard shall apply.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
FIRE PROTECTION
211000-2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
A.
The firm, company, corporation, or partnership producing and providing the material
and labor of this Section shall have at least 3 years experience performing scope of work
described and required by these Contract Documents.
B.
Acceptable Fire Protection Contractors meeting the above requirements are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Delta Fire Protection, Salt Lake City, UT
Alta Fire Protection, Salt Lake City, UT
Fire Engineering Company, Salt Lake City, UT
Chaparral Fire Protection, Salt Lake City, UT
Firetrol Protection Systems, Salt Lake City, UT
Grinnell Fire Protection, Salt Lake City, UT
Western Automatic Sprinkler, Salt Lake City, UT
C.
Contractors not listed must submit for acceptance 10 calendar days prior to bid date.
Proof of prior experience for Contractors not listed shall be submitted to the Engineer in
writing, giving total and complete information of dates, name, address of owner, and
location of all projects completed during past 3 years with specific references as to
Engineers, and prime contractors involved. List names of companies, phone numbers
and project manager’s name. See Instructions to Bidders.
D.
Codes and Standards:
1.
All work shall conform to the requirements of the following NFPA Standards and
Recommended Practices as appropriate for the type of service except as
specifically noted in each Section:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.8
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
“Installation of Sprinkler Systems", NFPA 13 - 2002 Edition.
“Inspection, Maintenance and Testing of Water- Based Suppression
Systems”, NFPA 25 - 2002 Edition.
All building construction work shall conform to the 2006 International Building
Code and 2006 International Fire Code.
All work shall conform to the federal, state and local regulations governing this
installation.
Should any conflicts occur between any code or standard, the most stringent
requirement(s) shall apply.
The Fire Protection Contractor shall be subject to the interpretation of statutory
requirements by the local Fire Department. Acceptance of the completed
systems by the local Fire Department is required.
TECHNICAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Timely submittals are essential to on-time completion of the project. The Owner will incur
no obligation to extend the contract completion date, or to reduce or waive any
liquidated damages due, as a result of the Fire Protection Contractor's failure to provide
the specified submittals in a timely and acceptable fashion.
B.
The information shown on each technical submittal shall be complete with respect to
quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, products, materials,
and similar data to enable the Owner, Engineer and Architect to review the information
FIRE PROTECTION
211000-3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
as required. Only complete submittals will be reviewed. Incomplete submittals will be
rejected and returned to the Fire Protection Contractor without being reviewed.
C.
Each technical submittal shall include a cover letter providing a description of each
variation that the submittal may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
In addition, the Fire Protection Contractor shall provide specific notation on each
Working Plan, sample, catalog cut, data sheet, installation manual, etc. submitted for
review and approval, of each such variation.
D.
No construction or installation will be authorized until the required submittals are received
and reviewed by the Owner, Engineer, and Architect. Any construction or installation
performed without written authorization from the Owner shall be entirely at the Fire
Protection Contractor's own risk.
E.
The required Technical Submittals for all systems and equipment installed in accordance
with these specifications include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Working Plans, per NFPA 13.
Water Supply Information, per NFPA 13.
Test Protocols.
Record Drawings.
F.
Provide six copies of each required Working Plan, manufacturer’s data sheet, water
supply information, and test protocol submittal within 60 days of award of contract.
G.
All drawings and diagrams shall be CAD generated using AutoCAD Version 2007,
prepared on drawing sheets 30" x 42" in size, and shall contain no extraneous
information. Marked up copies of catalog data sheets or manufacturer’s “typical”
diagrams are not acceptable in lieu of the required drawings or diagrams. All other
information required for this submittal shall be submitted in one or more appropriately
labeled and indexed 3-ring binders.
H.
All drawings and diagrams shall include the Fire Protection Contractor's title block,
complete with drawing title, Fire Protection Contractor's name, address, date (including
revisions), and preparer's and reviewer’s initials.
I.
Working Plans for sprinkler systems shall be complete and in full accordance with NFPA 13
Chapter on Plans and Calculations.
1.
All drawings and calculations shall be reviewed and accepted by the
jurisidictional fire department, building department fire marshal, as applicable,
and the insurance carrier or insurance reviewing authority prior to submitting to
the Engineer. Indication of review and acceptance by all agencies, as
appropriate, shall be certified by name of reviewer, agency, and date affixed to
the plans or reproducibles submitted to the Engineer. None will be accepted or
reviewed until compliance with these terms has been established.
J.
Upon completion of the installation, submit Record Drawings and Contractor’s Material &
Test Certificates for Aboveground Piping and for Underground Piping, per NFPA 13.
K.
Record Drawings shall include all variations from the approved Working Plans, for
whatever reason, including those occasioned by modifications, change orders, optional
materials and/or required coordination between trades. Variations shall be indicated in
FIRE PROTECTION
211000-4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
sufficient detail to accurately reflect the as-built conditions. Upon completion of the
work, before final acceptance, the Fire Protection Contractor shall deliver to the Owner,
two (2) additional full size sets of blue lines and one set of AutoCAD drawing data files.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
Contractor shall not install any piping until he has assured himself that the piping can be
run as contemplated in cooperation with Contractors of other Divisions of the Work and
the physical constraints of the Structural and Architectural Work.
WARRANTIES
A.
Provide original copies of all warranties and extended warranties for specific equipment
where specified and in accordance with Section 230500.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT LISTINGS AND APPROVALS
A.
All system components for which UL listings categories exist shall be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual Research (FM).
1.
2.
2.2
All components shall be listed in the current edition of the UL Fire Protection
Equipment Directory. Components shall be delivered to the project site with
factory applied UL stickers.
Components for which UL listing approvals are “pending” are not acceptable.
B.
All system components shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and their listing.
C.
All system components are subject to the approval of the engineer with regard to their
fitness for the intended application.
INTERIOR ABOVE-GROUND PIPING
A.
Pipe and Joints:
1.
B.
Black steel and galvanized steel threaded or roll grooved schedule 40
conforming to ASTM A-135 or A-53. Light wall (Schedule 10) conforming to ASTM
A-135 or ASTM A-795, where prior approval is obtained from Owner and
jurisdiction having authority. All pipe shall conform to NFPA #13, Chapter 3 and
Jurisdictional Authorities and Insurance Agency. Where required to meet
insurance agency or jurisdictional requirements, all dry pipe system and drain
piping shall be galvanized.
Fittings:
FIRE PROTECTION
211000-5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
2.
3.
C.
All valves are to be indicating type.
All valves U.L. listed, F.M. approved.
Refer to Section 230529 for valve specifications.
Hangers:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Threaded cast iron, pressure class in accordance with developed system
pressures, conforming to ASME B16.4. Threaded malleable iron, pressure class in
accordance with developed system pressures, conforming to ASME B16.3.
Weld type fittings: Buttweld conforming to ASME B16.9. Flanges conforming to
ASME B16.25. Socket weld conforming to ASME B16.11. All welds by certified
welder in accordance with Section 230529.
Grooved fittings shall conform to ASTM-A47 (malleable), ASTM 536 (ductile), or
ASTM-106 GRB (forged steel), ASTM A-53 type E, F, or S GRB (nipples), ASME B-16.5
or B16.1 cast iron and carbon steel flanges.
Valves:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
All hangers, attachments and components U.L. listed, F.M. approved.
All piping hangers shall conform to Jurisdictional Authorities requirements.
Powder driven studs shall not be included in normal installation. Permission to use
this type anchoring system must be accepted by the Structural Engineer prior to
submitting pricing or bids to any contractor or agent relative to this project.
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
A.
Sprinkler Heads:
Heads shall be U.L. Listed and of the type required to properly protect the intended
space. Heads shall be of ordinary-temperature classification except as required by
ceiling temperature, location, or service as allowed or required by code. Provide
standard-response heads in all spaces. Match existing sprinkler heads which are being
replaced.
B.
Deluge Valve: UL Listed, automatic control valve, with local manual release trim, electic
release with FM approved solenoid valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Field Measurements: Verify all dimensions before proceeding with the work. Obtain field
measurements for work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. Be
responsible for the accuracy of such measurements and precise fitting and assembly of
finished work. Prefabrication of systems is done at this Contractor's own risk.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate all work and placement of components with other trades,
thorough coordination of design and field installation is expected. Remedial field work
may be required to eliminate conflicts and provide an acceptable finished product.
FIRE PROTECTION
211000-6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Provide a complete operable system designed and installed in accordance
with applicable local, state, federal and jurisdictional codes, enforcement agencies and
insurance rating or underwriting agencies.
B.
All systems shall be drainable with proper drainage devices, and drain terminations either
to exterior of building or to proper receptacles within building.
C.
All systems shall be supported and braced for conformance to proper and applicable
standards.
D.
Care shall be taken with chrome plated or other polished finish components so that
marring does not occur to the finish, and installation provides for a uniform pattern and
true installation.
E.
Where piping passes thru masonry units or concrete walls or floors or other building
construction, sleeves may be used. Where exposed piping passes thru finished work,
chrome plated, or other finish acceptable to Architect, split wall plates or escutcheons
shall be installed to fit snugly around piping. Where rated walls are penetrated,
approved safing shall be provided at each hole to assure effectiveness of construction
as a fire stop.
F.
All openings for piping should be anticipated and coordinated with General Contractor.
Indicate such openings on the shop drawings. Any additional cutting of openings must
be coordinated with the General Contractor.
G.
Contractor shall complete the automatic fire sprinkler ready for operation, in all respects,
as soon as possible. When system is complete and ready for continuous operation,
activate the system for its intended use.
H.
Use no face bushings.
I.
Provide seismic restraints in accordance with Jurisdictional Agencies for all work installed
or modifed under this contract.
J.
The sprinkler piping shall be concealed from view in all common and public areas with a
finished ceiling. Exposed piping shall be cleaned and left ready for painting by others.
PERFORMANCE
A.
3.4
General: Systems shall be engineered and designed for proper densities, ease of
maintenance and accessibility. Final main drain flow tests shall be made to prove
system design and installation.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
General: Flush all systems free of all debris and certify system clean and ready for use.
TESTING AND CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
FIRE PROTECTION
211000-7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
A.
All or part of the existing sprinkler system will be drained during the duration of this
contract. The drained parts of the system will be tested under another contract. The
contractor under this contract is responsible to correct any problems or leaks in the work
of this contract, discovered when tested under the other contract.
B.
The entire system shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psig for not less than
2 hours with 0 psig pressure drop. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect's or General
Contractor’s representative - mandatory.
C.
Obtain certificate of compliance and completion for jurisdictional agencies, as
applicable and present to Owner - mandatory.
END OF SECTION 211000
FIRE PROTECTION
211000-8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 221410 - PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water Piping.
B.
Soil, Waste and Vent Piping.
C.
Testing.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to this
Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these
documents.
B.
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B.
Section 230548 - Mechanical Seismic Control.
C.
Section 230700 - Mechanical Insulation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Product Data for the following items under provisions of the General
Conditions of the Contract:
1.
PLUMBING PIPING
Water Piping, Fittings, and Joints.
Section 221410 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WATER PIPE, TUBE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS
A.
Interior Tube Supported by Hangers and Clamps:
1.
2.2
Provide ASTM B88 Type L hard drawn copper tube for all water
distribution piping inside building/structure, with wrought copper fittings
and couplers up to 6", cast brass or bronze fittings and couplers for sizes
6" and larger. Joints shall be 95-5 Class SnSb solder or Victaulic CTS
roll-grooved couplers and fittings for 3” and larger tube.
SOIL DRAIN WASTE, VENT AND STORM PIPE FITTINGS AND JOINTS
A.
General:
1.
Cast iron pipe centrifugally cast service weight (SV) soil pipe with cast iron
drainage fittings conforming to ASTM A 74. Joint materials and systems
may be hub and spigot with neoprene gaskets and lubricant conforming to
ASA-021 and ASTM C-564 SV pattern. Gaskets shall be equal to U.S.
Pipe Company Veri-tite conforming to ASTM-C564 and/or CISPI HSN75
and be certified in writing to the Engineer that the following criteria has
been met, thru testing by a recognized independent testing laboratory.
Cast iron hubless pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM A 888 or CISPI
301. Hubless couplings shall conform to ASTM C 1277 for standard and
ASTM C 1540 for heavy duty or CISPI 310.
Criteria: Sizes 2" thru 6" shall withstand 15 psig hydrostatic pressure for
10 minutes with unrestrained joints, and no leakage, and using restrained
joints must be able to withstand 25 psig air pressure and 40 psig
hydrostatic pressure with no leakage. Offset joints shall withstand 1056
pounds of horizontal force without joint separation or detectable leakage.
B.
Interior Pipe Supported By Hangers and Clamps:
1.
2.
PLUMBING PIPING
Provide hubless cast iron pipe using hubless cast iron soil pipe couplings
certified to withstand a minimum of 50 psi internal pressure. Where stack
pressures may theoretically exceed 50 psi, use clamp all or heavy-duty
couplings with restrained joints horizontal and vertical up to 80 psig. For
pressures above 80 psi, use Schedule 40 ASTM A-120 galvanized steel
pipe with threaded cast iron drainage fittings. Roll grooved schedule 40
pipe with Victaulic Style 77M galvanized couplers may be used on
horizontal and vertical stacks and mains. Use Teflon tape or compound
for all threaded joint make-up.
Copper Waste, Vent and Soil Pipe and Fittings shall be prohibited on this
project.
Section 221410 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WATER TUBE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.2
3.3
CLEANING
A.
Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.
B.
Repair or replace damaged installed products.
C.
Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to
owner’s acceptance.
D.
Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.
PROTECTION
A.
3.4
All copper tube and fittings shall be reamed and buffed prior to soldering
or brazing.
The use of lead solder of any class, for joint make-up or back-up for
finishing is prohibited.
Refer and conform to the Copper Development Association instructions
for proper preparation and actual installation practice for all soldered and
brazed joints.
Support water tube in accordance with Section 230529.
Pull tee (T-drill) fittings are forbidden.
Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on
the site.
SOIL, DRAIN, WASTE, VENT AND STORM PIPE FITTINGS AND JOINTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
PLUMBING PIPING
Piping shall be run true, plumb, and straight, with all restraints and
hangers adjusted to carry their proportional load and locked to prevent
pipe "wag" misalignment, movement or shear.
Provide anchors for piping risers on every floor using riser clamps, wall
brackets, knee brackets, and foot blocks for all vertical piping over 20 feet
straight height.
Furnish and install all soil, waste and vent piping for the complete sanitary
system in accordance with jurisdictional code requirements.
Section 221410 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
4.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
All soil and waste piping shall be run at the following minimum slope
unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
Slope of Horizontal Drainage Pipe
Size (In.)
Min. Slope (In./Ft.)
2-1/2 or less
3 to 6
8 or larger
5.
6.
Bushings in soil waste or vent piping shall be prohibited. Tapped spigots
or tees shall be used when changing from cast iron pipe to steel waste or
vent piping, and for appropriate cleanout plugs.
Horizontal Piping (suspended):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
7.
8.
9.
10.
PLUMBING PIPING
1/4
1/8
1/16
Supports - Horizontal piping shall be supported at sufficiently close
intervals to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging.
Cast iron soil pipe - Where joints occur, suspended cast iron soil
pipe shall be supported at not more than five (5) foot intervals;
except that pipe exceeding five (5) feet in length, may be
supported at not more than ten (10) foot intervals. Supports shall
be adequate to maintain alignment and prevent sagging and shall
be placed within eighteen (18) inches of the hub or joint. Hubless
or compression gasket joints must be supported at least at every
other joint except that when the developed length between
supports exceeds four (4) feet, they shall be provided at each joint.
Supports shall also be provided on both sides of each horizontal
branch connection. Supports shall be placed on or immediately
adjacent to the coupling. Suspended lines shall be suitably braced
to prevent horizontal movement.
Threaded pipe - Threaded pipe (IPS), shall be supported in
accordance with Section 230529.
Rigid support sway bracing shall be provided at changes in
direction greater than 45 degrees for pipe sizes 4 inches and
larger.
For pipe sizes greater than 4 inches, axial restraints shall be
provided for drain pipes at all changes in direction and at all
changes in diameter greater than two pipe sizes.
The waste connections between fixtures and their respective collection
and venting systems shall consist of galvanized steel nipples and cast iron
drainage fittings.
All interior waste, soil, and vent piping up to 1-1/2" shall consist of
galvanized steel with cast iron drainage fittings, all piping 1-1/2" and over
shall consist of S.V. cast iron soil pipe and fittings.
All pipe and fittings shall have affixed thereon the CISPI grade mark of
identification.
All vents shall be installed through the roof of at least the minimum size as
required by jurisdictional code and shall be cast iron.
Section 221410 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
11.
12.
13.
3.5
All vents protruding through the roof shall be not less than 2" size and
extended to not less than 12 inches above the finished roof. Vents
through built-up roofing shall be flashed with 24" x 24" x 4 lb. sheet lead.
The flashing shall extend to top of vent and the edges turned down into a
cast iron vent pipe. Single ply rubberized roofing systems shall be flashed
around vent with top edge of roofing clamped to vent pipe and sealed with
compatible sealant.
All vents shall be located in accordance with jurisdictional code and in no
case less than two (2) feet from roof edge or parapet, or wall line of an "on
the roof structure". Vent terminations shall not occur within twenty-five
(25) feet of any outside air intake.
Provide all expansion joints, braces, earthquake restraints as required by
the contract documents (Section 230548) and jurisdictional authority.
PROHIBITED PIPE ROUTING
A.
Plumbing piping, regardless of contents (water, sewer, vent, etc.) shall not be
routed through or above the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.6
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Electrical panel rooms
Electrical switch gear rooms
Electrical transformer rooms
Elevator shafts
Elevator equipment rooms
Data Centers
File Server Rooms / MDF / IDF
Should there be a conflict with the plans and the above paragraph, notify the
Engineer immediately for corrective action prior to starting work.
COPPER DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT TUBE
A.
All soil and waste lines below ground floor or buried below grade shall be SV cast
iron pipe and fittings with gasketed joints.
B.
Vents shall be type DWV or L copper with cast copper or brass drainage pattern
fittings and shall terminate at least 12" above the finished roof construction, and
flashed with self sealing neoprene boots with integral lead or copper flashing
pans.
C.
Bushings for soil, waste, drainage, or vent lines shall not be used.
D.
Provide 50-50 Class Sn Pb soldered joints.
E.
Support vertical soil, waste, drainage, stacks and vents from building structure
with padded riser clamps, allow for adequate expansion of all copper piping.
PLUMBING PIPING
Section 221410 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.7
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
TESTING
A.
Schedule of Testing:
Allowable Test
Methods
H2O CA N2
Service
1.
V
Potable Water Pipe
X
Valves & Fittings
X
2. Sanitary, Storm & Acid Waste and Vent System:
*Stack Height:
0-23 FT.
X
24-34 FT.
X
35-46 FT.
X
47-57 FT.
X
58-69 FT.
X
70-80 FT.
X
81-92 FT.
X
93-103 FT.
X
Over 104 FT.
X
Minimum Test
Pressure
(psig)
Minimum Test
Period (minutes)
Allowable
Pressure
Variance (psig)
125
100
60
60
-0+1/2
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
30
30
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
-0-0-0-0-0-0-0-0-0-
B.
Testing connections for hydrostatic tests shall be made at the base of the system,
CA, N2 and vacuum testing can be made from connections anywhere in the
system tested.
C.
In the event that tests fail, use a standard soap and brush inspection using
"Trouble Bubble" Liquid high density soap as manufactured by Jersey Meter Co.,
Patterson N.J. Formula ST-1. After source of failure is discovered, correct and
retest system. Repeat procedure until system sustains required testing
successfully.
D.
Testing contractor shall give at least 16 working hours notice to the General
Contractor so that arrangements for witnessing tests can be made. The General
Contractor shall witness and SIGN the required test form.
E.
All joints, valves, fittings and piping accessory items shall be exposed to view
during tests whether pipe is above or below ground. "Closed in" or "Buried"
piping shall be re-exposed during testing.
F.
Proper restraining of piping and test plugs shall be accomplished prior to test.
END OF SECTION 221410
PLUMBING PIPING
Section 221410 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 221430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.2
1.3
Drains and drainage products.
Downspout nozzle.
Cleanouts.
Safe pans and drain flashings.
Sillcocks, yard hydrants, hose bibbs and hose stations.
Pressure gauges, thermometers, and test plugs.
Shock arrestors.
Backflow preventers.
Pressure reducing valves.
Pressure and temperature relief valves.
Trap chargers and accessories.
RELATED WORK
A.
Requirements: Provide Plumbing Specialties in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
B.
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
C.
Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Product Data for the following items under provisions of the Division 1 of
the Contract:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Floor Drains (FD)
Floor Sinks (FS)
Planter Drains (PD)
Roof Drains (RD)
Overflow Drains (OD)
Downspout Nozzles (DSN)
Sillcocks (SC), Ground Hydrants (GH) and Yard Hydrants (YH)
Hose bibbs (HB) and Hose Stations (HV)
Pressure gauges (PG)
Thermometers (T)
Shock Arrestors (SA)
Backflow Preventer (BP)
Pressure Reducing Valve (PRV)
Trap Primers (TP)
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Submit printed Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data for the following
items under provisions of Operating and Maintenance Data paragraph in Section
230500:
1.
2.
1.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Backflow Preventer (BP)
Pressure Reducing Valve (PRV)
WARRANTIES
A.
Provide original copies of all warranties for specific equipment where specified
and in accordance with Section 230500.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Where acceptable manufacturers are listed, these manufacturers must submit
products that are in fact equivalent in all respects of materials, design, function,
and appearance to the manufacturer listed as the base manufacturer in the
specification body or drawing schedules. Deviations of any type will not be
acceptable.
B.
Where other acceptable manufacturers are not listed, only the base manufacturer
will be accepted.
C.
All items of like nomenclature shall be supplied by one manufacturer only.
FLOOR DRAINS (FD)
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Wade series 1100, JR Smith series 2005, Josam
series 30000, Zurn series Z-415, Watts FD-100 series.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Schedule:
Plan Code
Typical Use
Style
Material
Pipe Size
Top Size
Strainer
Vandal Proof Security
Screws
Sediment Bucket
Seepage Flange
Flashing Clamp
Trap Primer Fitting
Funnel
Deep Seal (4”) Trap
Note 1:
Note 2:
2.3
FD-1
Note 2
Round
Cast Iron
2” - 3”
5” min.
Nickel Bronze
Yes
FD-1
Note 2
Round
Cast Iron
4”
7” min.
Nickel Bronze
Yes
No
Yes
Note 1
Where Required
No
Yes
No
Yes
Note 1
Where Required
No
Yes
Provide flashing clamp device for drains in areas with waterproof
membrane and all drains above slab-on-grade.
Finished areas, showers, toilets, etc.
FLOOR DRAINS, HEAVY DUTY
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Wade series 1240, JR Smith series 2330, Josam
series 31200, Zurn series Z-512, Watts FD-340 series, MIFAB series F-1340C.
B.
Schedule:
Plan Code
Typical Use
Style
Material
Pipe Size
Top Size
Strainer
Vandal Proof Security Screws
Sediment Bucket
Seepage Flange
Flashing Clamp
Trap Primer Fitting
Funnel
Deep Seal (4”) Trap
Note 1:
Note 2:
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
FD-2
Note 2
Round
Cast Iron
2” - 8”
12”
Ductile Iron or Cast Iron
No
Yes
Yes
Note 1
Where Required
No
Yes
Provide flashing clamp device for drains in areas with waterproof
membrane and all drains above slab-on-grade.
Mechanical equipment rooms, shops, etc.
Section 221430 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
FLOOR SINKS (FS)
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Wade series 9110/9140, JR Smith series 3100/3150,
Josam series 49000/49040, Zurn series Z-1900/Z-1910, Watts FD-860 series,
MIFAB series FS-1520/FS-1730.
B.
Schedule:
Plan Code
Typical Use
Style
Size
Material
Finish
Grate
Dome Strainer
Sediment Bucket
Seepage Flange
Flashing Clamp
Vandal Resistant
Security Screws
Trap Primer
Fitting
Funnel
Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:
Note 4:
Note 5:
2.5
FS-1
Note 3
Square
12”x12”8”D
Cast Iron
Enamel Interior
Note 1
Nickel Bronze
Yes
No
Yes
Note 2
Yes
FS-2
Note 4
Square
12”x12”x8”D
Cast Iron
Enamel Interior
Note 1
Cast Iron
No
Yes
Yes
Note 2
No
FS-3
Note 5
Square
8”x8”x6”D
Cast Iron
Enamel Interior
Note 1
Nickel Bronze
Yes
No
Yes
Note 2
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Provide full grate unless otherwise noted, provide 1/2 or 3/4 grate
where indicated on Drawings.
Provide flashing clamp device for drains in areas with waterproof
membrane and all drains above slab-on-grade.
Indirect waste for kitchen, laundry, etc.
Indirect waste and floor drainage for mechanical equipment rooms.
Indirect waste for icemakers, sterilizers, etc.
PLANTER DRAINS (PD)
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Wade series 3220 PA, JR Smith series 2675, Josam
series 39600, Zurn series Z-348, Watts FD-860 series, MIFAB series F-1820.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Schedule:
Plan Code
Typical Use
Style
Material
Strainer
Screen
Vandal Proof Security Screws
Flashing Clamp
Bearing Pan
Deck Clamp
Perforated Gravel Stop
Note 1:
Note 2:
2.6
PD-2
Note 2
Round
Cast Iron
Cast Iron Dome
Stainless Steel
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Slab on grade planters.
Planters above slab on grade.
ROOF DRAINS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Wade series 3000/3200, JR Smith series 1010/1330,
Josam series 21500/22080, Zurn series Z-100/Z-125, Watts RD-300/200 series,
MIFAB series R-1200.
B.
Schedule:
Plan Code
Material
Size
Dome
Flashing Clamp
Deck Clamp
Bearing Pan/Receiver
Vandal Proof Security Screws
Adjustable Extension
Extended Perforated Gravel
Stop
Pipe Size
2.7
PD-1
Note 1
Round
Cast Iron
Cast Iron Dome
Stainless Steel
No
Yes
No
No
No
RD-1
Cast Iron
15” nom.
Cast Iron
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
RD-2
Cast Iron
8” nom.
Cast Iron
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
2”-10”
2”-4”
OVERFLOW DRAIN
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Wade series 3000/3200, JR Smith series 1010/1330,
Josam series 21500/22080, Zurn series Z-100/Z-125, Watts RD-300/200 series,
MIFAB series R-1200-R.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Schedule:
Plan Code
Material
Size
Dome
Flashing Clamp
Deck Clamp
Bearing Pan/Receiver
Vandal Proof Security Screws
Stand Pipe
Extended Perforated Gravel
Stop
Dam
Note 1:
2.8
OD-2
Cast Iron
8” nom.
Cast Iron
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note 1
Yes
Note 1
Note 1
Provide overflow drains with 2" high stand pipe or dam as appropriate
for the style of drain furnished.
DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Wade series 3940, JR Smith series 1770,
Josam series 25010, Zurn series Z-199, Watts RD-940 series, MIFAB series R1940.
B.
Schedule:
Plan Code
Material
Wall Flange
Size
2.9
OD-1
Cast Iron
15” nom.
Cast Iron
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note 1
Yes
DSN
Polished Bronze
Yes
2”-8”
FLOOR CLEANOUTS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Wade series 6000, JR Smith series 4020/4100/4200,
Josam series 56000, Zurn series Z-1400, Watts CO-200-R/200-RX/200-US
series, MIFAB series C1100-R/C1100-XR/C1100-UR.
B.
Cast iron adjustable body, ABS plug:
1.
2.
Provide flange and flashing clamp for Cleanouts in areas with waterproof
membrane and all cleanouts above slab-on-grade.
Provide nickel bronze top to match floor finish as indicated in the
Architectural finish schedule. Provide heavy duty nickel bronze top for
cleanouts in storage rooms, kitchens, and similar areas. Provide heavy
duty cast iron or ductile iron top for cleanouts in equipment rooms, traffic
areas, parking areas, and similar unfinished areas.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.10
2.11
WALL CLEANOUTS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Wade series 8560 with 8480R, JR Smith series
4530, Josam series 58790, Zurn series 1446, Watts CO-460-RD series, MIFAB
series C-1460.
B.
Cast iron clean out tee, ABS plug, <vandal proof security screws>, stainless steel
cover with screw.
SAFE PANS AND DRAIN FLASHINGS
A.
Provide one of following systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.12
2.13
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
4 lb./sq.ft. sheet lead with 15 lb. asphaltic felt sub pan (underliner).
#24 B&S gauge (0.021") minimum sheet copper with l5 lb. asphaltic felt
sub pan (underliner).
0.040" non-plasticized chlorinated polyethylene sheet with 30 lb. felt
underliner.
3 ply 15 mil polyvinylchloride sheet with 30 lb. felt underliner.
WATER HEATER SAFETY PAN (WHSP)
A.
Provide Shamrock Industries Inc. or equivalent gray polyethylene pan 2" larger
than heater on all sides and minimum 1-1/2” deep with side or bottom drain fitting
on electric water heaters installed above ceilings, under counters or on wood
flooring.
B.
Provide Ruud Mfg. Co. "Heater Pan", Canplas or equivalent spun aluminum pan
2” larger than heater on all sides and minimum 1-1/2” deep with side or bottom
drain fitting on gas fired water heaters installed on combustible foundations with
3/4" thick fire proof liner between pan and combustible construction.
SILLCOCK, EXPOSED, NON-FREEZE
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Woodford series 65, JR Smith series 5609, Josam
series 71050, Zurn series Z-1310, Wade series 8600, Watts HY-420 series.
B.
Schedule:
Plan Code
Freeze Proof
Vacuum Breaker
Material
Finish
Outlet
Operator
Wall Clamp
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
SC-1
Yes
Yes
Brass
Polished Brass
¾” Hose Thread
Loose Key
Yes
Section 221430 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.14
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SILLCOCK, WALL BOX, NON-FREEZE
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Woodford series B65, JR Smith series 5509, Josam
series 71150, Zurn series Z-1300, Wade series 8600,175, Watts HY-725 series.
B.
Schedule:
Plan Code
Freeze Proof
Vacuum Breaker
Material
Finish
Outlet
Operator
Lockable Wall Box
2.15
HOSE BIBBS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: As listed in schedule.
B.
Schedule:
Plan Code
HB-1
HB-2
HB-3
Typical use
Material
Finish
Vacuum Breaker
Outlet
Operator
Wall Flange
Chicago Faucet
Woodford
T & S Brass
Note 1
Brass
Polished Chrome
Yes
3/4" Hose Thread
Loose Key
Yes
No. 952
----B-720
Note 2
Brass
Polished Chrome
Yes
3/4" Hose Thread
Lever or Tee
Yes
No. 13
24 P
B736-POL
Note 3
Brass
Rough Brass
Yes
3/4" Hose Thread
Tee or Wheel
Yes
No. 13T
24
-----
Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:
2.16
SC-4
Yes
Yes
Brass/Bronze
Polished Brass
¾” Hose Thread
Loose Key
Yes
Toilet rooms, Janitor's mop station, etc.
Finished areas.
Equipment rooms, unfinished areas.
STATIONARY PRESSURE GAUGES
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Trerice 600C Series, Weksler Regal Series, Weiss
Instruments.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Schedule:
Plan Code
Type
Bourbon
Tube/Socket
PG-1
4-1/2” Dial
Phosphor Bronze Tube
Brass Socket
Accuracy
ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A
1% F.S. over middle half
of range
Cast Aluminum
Clear Glass
Yes
For Steam Service
Yes
No
No
No
Case
Window
Snubber
Coil Syphon
Gauge Cock
Set Hand
Silicone Filled
Weatherproof
C.
Range: Select gauges for the following standard ranges unless otherwise
indicated on drawings, or as required for special systems.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.17
PG-2
4-1/2” Dial
Stainless Steel Tube
316 Stainless Steel
Socket
ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A
1% F.S. over middle
half of range
Cast Aluminum
Clear Glass
Yes
For Steam Service
Yes
No
No
No
Domestic Water
Low Pressure Steam
Steam
Compressed Air
Vacuum
Pump Gauges
0 to +160 psi
-30 in Hg to +60 psi
-30 in Hg to +150 psi
0 to +160 psi
-30 in Hg to +15 psi
-30 in Hg to +100 psi
STATIONARY THERMOMETERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Trerice Industrial Series, Ametek Industrial Series,
Weiss Instruments, Miljoco, Weksler.
B.
Schedule:
C.
Plan code:
T-1
T-2
Type
Case
Window
Tube
Stem
Separable
Socket
Adjustable angle
9" cast aluminum
Clear acrylic
Red mercury
Aluminum, insertable
Brass
Rigid
9" cast aluminum
Clear acrylic
Red mercury
Aluminum, insertable
Brass
Range: Select thermometers, for the following standard ranges unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings, or as required for special systems.
1.
Chilled water
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
0 to 100 °F
Section 221430 – Page 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Heating water
Steam
Steam condensate
Domestic cold water
Domestic hot water
30 to 240 °F
50 to 400 °F
30 to 240 °F
0 to 100 °F
30 to 240 °F
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE TEST PLUGS (T&PTP)
A.
Manufacturer: Trerice, Fairfax, Flow Design, Peterson Equipment, Weksler.
B.
Plugs suitable for vacuum to 600 psig and temperatures of -20 deg.F to 300
deg.F with cap and extension for insulated pipe where required.
SHOCK ARRESTORS FOR WATER (SA)
A.
Manufacturer: Precision Plumbing Products Co., Wade Shokstop, J.R. Smith
series 5000, Josam series 75000, Zurn Z-1700, Watts SS series.
B.
Schedule:
PLAN CODE
"P.D.I." SIZE
FIXTURE UNITS
SA-A
SA-B
SA-C
SA-D
SA-E
SA-F
A
B
C
D
E
F
1-11
12-32
33-60
61-113
114-154
155-330
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Conbraco Series 40-200, Watts series 009 and 909,
Febco series 825Y, Hersey series FRP-II.
B.
Bronze body, independent spring loaded check valves, diaphragm type
differential pressure relief valve, shut-off ball valves, strainer, test cocks. Suitable
for water temperature range of 33-140 °F.
C.
Approved under ASSE 1013 and AWWA C511.
D.
Backflow preventer test kit: Provide complete test kit including pressure gauge,
test valves, high pressure hoses, adaptor fittings, mounting strap, and
instructions, in a corrosion resistant carrying case.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE (PRV)
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Watts series N223B, Conbraco, Hoffman.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 10
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.22
2.23
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
B.
300 psi bronze body, replaceable seat, strainer, adjustable outlet pressure,
thermal expansion by-pass. Suitable for water temperature up to 160 °F.
C.
Approved under ASSE 1003 and IAPMO.
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES (T&P)
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Kunkle, Watts, Conbraco, McDonnell and Miller.
B.
Schedule:
TYPES
SIZE
MAKE
MODEL
SERVICE
MAX
PRESS
ASME
MAX
TEMP
ASME
RATING
BTUH
MAXIMUM
T&P
3/4"
Kunkl
e
137
125 psig
250 F
2,230,000
Press
3/4"
84-45
125 psig
300 F
NA
Vac
3/4"
80-45
Vacuum
15" Hg
300 F
NA
T&P
3/4"
Kunkl
e
Kunkl
e
Watts
Water
Pressure
Vessel
Air
40XL8
Water
Heater
125 psig
210 F
777,600
TRAP CHARGERS AND ACCESSORIES (No Plan Code)
A.
Manufacturer: Precision Plumbing Products, Co. ("P.P.P.")
B.
Pressure Activated Trap Primers:
C.
MODEL
DISTRIBUTION UNIT
SUPPLY TUBE
P-1
1 thru 4 outlets per
unit as shown on
drawings.
Single
Electronic Trap Primers:
1.
Electric solenoid valve actuated with integral electronic timer with manual
override switch, water inlet, water supply isolation valve, atmospheric
vacuum breaker, water hammer arrestor, calibrated manifold for equal
quarter distribution; all housed in steel box with cover for surface
mounting or recessed mounting in wall.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 11
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Schedule:
MODEL
Auto Prime 500
Prime Time
PT/PTS
DISTRIBUTION UNIT
1 thru 4 outlets per unit as
shown on drawings.
4 thru 30 outlets per unit as
shown on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
DRAINS
A.
Coordinate drain placement with Contractor for Division 3 - Concrete.
B.
Drain, strainer, and grate finishes shall be as specified, cover all finished surfaces
during construction to prevent damage.
C.
Install drains with "P" pattern traps and vents as required.
D.
All drain bodies shall be plugged during construction to prevent foreign objects,
dirt, concrete, etc. from entering the drain and drainage piping.
E.
Planter drains shall not receive domes until final landscaping is accomplished.
Provide closure plugs until landscaping and dome installation is furnished.
F.
Drains shall be set flush and level with finished surfaces, with grate pattern
parallel or perpendicular to adjacent walls or floor patterns.
G.
Flash all drains on roofs, upper floors, and floor over crawl spaces with 24"x24"
minimum flashing pans. Shower pans shall be turned up in walls to a minimum of
6" above the shower receptor threshold.
H.
Clean and polish all drain bowls, rims, strainers, and grates prior to final
inspection.
CLEANOUTS
A.
Provide cleanouts in waste, soil, and storm piping at each change in direction
greater than 45°, as required by Jurisdictional Code.
B.
Provide cleanouts at 50 feet on center for all interior sanitary and storm piping,
and at each base of waste, soil or storm pipe stack or drop, 100 feet on center for
all exterior sanitary and storm piping or as required by jurisdictional code.
C.
Provide appropriate access tops for imposed construction.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 12
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.3
3.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
D.
Coordinate interior floor cleanout locations with contractor for Division 3 Concrete.
E.
Cleanouts to be provided with ABS or Delrin plugs. Lead sealed, brass, or cast
iron plugs will not be acceptable unless specifically required by jurisdictional code
authority.
F.
Where cleanout arms extend horizontally and/or vertically more than 15 feet from
the sewer main which they are serving, provide 2" minimum vent off the end of
the arm and connect to the building vent system.
G.
Clean and polish all cleanout access covers prior to final inspection.
H.
Cleanout access covers shall be flush and level with finished building surfaces.
I.
Install cleanout plugs on exposed or accessible piping. Plugs shall be line size
up to 3" and over 8", 4" plugs for sizes 4" thru 8".
J.
Provide wall cleanouts where piping is concealed in walls or non-accessible
chases, use tapped cleanout tee or tapped extension to within 4" of wall face. Do
not use no-hub type blind plugs for wall cleanouts.
DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES (DSN)
A.
Terminate storm and overflow drains into full size bronze downspout nozzles,
seal annular space between wall opening and pipe with silicone seal, anchor
nozzle wall flange with three 1/4" flat head machine bolts and lead expanders.
Set DSN a minimum of 6" and a maximum of 12" above the splash block surface,
unless otherwise noted.
B.
Install drain pipe to thread adaptors and threaded galvanized schedule 40 nipples
or short pipe through exterior wall for threading on the DSN. T.O.E. nipples or
short pipe may be used for "NO-HUB" system where galvanized and drain pipe
are joined by an approved No Hub coupling adaptor. Anchor pipe to building
immediately downstream of adaptor.
SAFE PANS AND DRAIN FLASHINGS (no plan code)
A.
Provide safe pans for all shower bases, shower rooms, wet rooms and kitchen
areas. Pans shall extend wall to wall and turn up at least 6" above finish floor
level or receptor rims into wall construction. Pans shall be laid over nonpuncturing base such as heavy asphaltic felt, fine sand that bears no silica, or
other acceptable material.
B.
All drains on upper floors or over crawl spaces shall be flashed with flashing
extending a minimum of 12" beyond the drain top dimensions.
C.
Seams to be folded and shaped as required:
1.
Solder lead seams.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 13
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
3.5
3.6
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Solder sheet copper seams with 50/50 (50% tin, 50% lead) or 45/55 (45%
tin, 55% lead) commercial grade solder.
Solvent weld PVC and un-plasticized chlorinated polyethylene seams.
WATER HEATER SAFETY PAN (WHSP)
A.
Install safety pans for all electric water heaters installed above ceilings, under
counters or on wood flooring. Route drain to floor sink/drain with indirect
connection.
B.
Install safety pans for all gas fired water heaters installed on combustible
foundations or where leakage will cause damage. Route drain to floor sink/drain
with indirect connection.
C.
Provide structural supports, air gapped pan drains, drain extensions and pan
drain connections as required.
SILLCOCKS (SC)
A.
Provide sillcocks at 100 feet maximum spacing around building perimeter, and at
other locations shown on Drawings.
B.
Provide all sillcocks with accessible stop and drain valves in heated areas,
provide access panels where required.
C.
Provide flush or surface mounting, square and plumb to building walls, with
supply tube pitched for complete drainout.
D.
Anchor all sillcocks with anchor flange provided by manufacturer.
E.
Caulk annular space between walls and sillcock and sillcock piping with
non-hardening silicone base sealant.
F.
Mount sillcocks at 24" above finished grade or surfacing.
G.
Where mounting heights other than 24" are shown on the Drawings, the
Drawings shall supercede the Specifications.
H.
Vacuum breakers to be non-removable.
I.
Clean all surfaces including faceplate, box, access door, cam lock and interior of
box prior to final inspection.
J.
Sillcocks shall not be operated by hand tools, provide 2 keys per sillcock. Units
found to be marred due to hand tool operation or other causes, shall be replaced
at no increase to the Contract Sum.
K.
Clean and polish entire sillcock prior to final inspection.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 14
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
HOSE BIBBS (HB)
A.
Provide hose bibbs in each equipment room, toilet room and kitchen area
equipped with floor drainage systems and where shown on drawings, maximum
spacing shall accommodate 50 feet of hose to any point within the drainage area
measured around obstructions and equipment, in lieu of straight line
measurement. Hose bibbs in toilet rooms mounted under standard lavatory, do
not install near ADA lavatory where it could impede access.
B.
Anchor hose bibb within wall for rigid flush flange mounting.
C.
Install bibb true and plumb with wall flange flush to surface, caulk annular space
between wall and flange.
D.
Mounting height to be 18" above floor in toilet rooms and immediately under
furthest lavatory from entry, 60" above floor in equipment rooms or as shown on
drawings.
E.
Hose bibbs shall not be operated with hand tools, use only tee handle, furnish
one tee handle per bibb. Units found marred due to hand tool operation or other
causes will be replaced at Contractors expense.
F.
Clean and polish hose bibbs prior to final inspection.
STATIONARY PRESSURE GAUGES (PG)
A.
Provide gauges for steam, water, air and vacuum systems, complete with gauge
cocks and snubbers, where required by Drawings.
B.
Install in semi or upright position, tilted so as to be readable from floor level.
C.
Clean gauge, and glass, and calibrate by test prior to final inspection.
STATIONARY THERMOMETERS (T)
A.
Install thermometers where indicated on Drawings in upright position with case
tilted to be readable from floor level.
B.
Clean case and glass prior to final inspection.
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE PLUGS (T&PTP)
A.
Provide plugs where periodic temperature and/or pressure indication is required
as shown on drawings. Provide 1/4" MPT tapping, cap and seal for plug and
extension for insulated pipe as applicable.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 15
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.11
3.12
3.13
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SHOCK ARRESTORS FOR WATER (SA)
A.
Provide shock arrestors in accordance with Plumbing Drainage Institute (PDI)
Standard WH-201 and as shown on drawings.
B.
Provide 8"x8" minimum access panels centered on each shock arrestor that is
otherwise inaccessible.
C.
Shock arrestors shall be mounted as close to the line or quick closing valve as
possible. Remote mounting or excessive (over 6") nipple mounting will not be
acceptable.
D.
Gate valves installed at each shock arrestor will not generally be required.
Furnish only where specifically shown on drawings.
E.
Each shock absorber piston shall be exercised at least once prior to final
installation. (Physically move the piston up into chamber from throat of unit. Use
wooden push rod only in the performance of this exercise.)
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER (BP)
A.
Provide reduced pressure type backflow preventers on all connections between
the domestic water system and make-up supplies to any non potable system, i.e.:
Heating, Boilers, Cooling Towers, Chiller, Evaporative Coolers, and the like.
B.
Anchor backflow preventer in place.
C.
Clean and test assembly in place in accordance with State Health Code.
D.
Provide funnels and attach to unit per manufacturers instructions, in true, level
and plumb position.
E.
Provide IPS to solder adaptor to funnel outlet and run type M copper tubing in an
unobtrusive manner routed to an approved drain receptor.
F.
Hang and anchor drain tubing so as to be rigid and stable.
G.
Permanently affix drain outlet at drain receptor so as to be rigid and unmovable.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE (PRV)
A.
Provide unistrut or similar frame for mounting all components of the pressure
reducing valve station.
B.
Arrangement shall be as shown on Drawings including by-pass.
C.
Provide drain valves both sides of station on headers on low points.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 16
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.14
D.
Provide unions, strainer, valves, petcocks, gauges, straps and other accessories
as detailed on Drawings.
E.
Set each pressure reducing valve using full system pressure and flow individually
to outlet pressures specified.
F.
All gauges shall be installed to be readable from floor level. Provide petcocks on
each gauge connection.
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES (T & P)
A.
3.15
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide temperature and pressure relief valves, with full size drains extended and
air gapped to floor drains or approved receptor. Provide relief valves on all water
heaters, pressure vessels and closed piping systems.
TRAP CHARGERS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide trap primer valve, gooseneck connection, distribution boxes, distribution
tubing, air gap or vacuum breaker, extension drains, and pattern traps with
charger connections for all emergency floor drains.
B.
Support and brace charger, distribution boxes, piping and connections as
appropriate.
END OF SECTION 221430
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Section 221430 – Page 17
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 224450 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
B.
1.2
1.3
Water Heaters and Accessories
Sumps and Pumps
RELATED WORK
A.
Requirements: Provide Plumbing Equipment in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
B.
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
C.
Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
D.
Section 230540 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.
E.
Section 230548 - Mechanical Seismic Control.
F.
Section 221410 - Plumbing Piping.
G.
Section 221430 - Plumbing Specialties.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit product specification data for the following items under provision of
Division 1 of the Contract:
1.
2.
B.
Submit printed Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data for the following
items under provisions of Operating and Maintenance Data paragraph in Section
230500:
1.
2.
1.4
Water Heaters, Accessories and Controls.
Sumps and Pumps.
Water Heaters and Accessories.
Pumps.
WARRANTIES
A.
Provide original warranties for specific equipment of term specified and in
accordance with Section 230500.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
Section 224450 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers are listed for each product, and manufacturers shall
submit products that are in fact equivalent in all respects of material, design,
function, size, and appearance to the manufacturer specified. Deviations of any
type will not be acceptable.
B.
Where acceptable manufacturers are not listed, only the manufacturer specified
will be accepted.
C.
All equipment of like use and nomenclature shall be supplied by one
manufacturer only.
ELECTRIC POWERED STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: A.O. Smith, Hatco, Lochinvar, P.V.I. Industries, Ruud,
State Industries, Bradford White.
B.
Description and Schedule:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Provide energy efficient blanket or foam insulation R=16 minimum,
glass-lined tank rated for 150 psi working pressure, 300 psi test ASME
Certified and Labeled UL listed and in conformance with ASHRAE 90.1
Energy Conservation Standards.
Provide ASME certified pressure and temperature relief valve, built-in heat
trap to prevent thermal siphoning, low watt density, "INCOLOY" immersion
heating elements. Density shall not exceed 80 watts per square inch at
240 volts.
Provide magnesium anode rod, cold water dip tube, enameled steel
jacket, pre-wired, accessible control and wiring block, one thermostat for
each element, thermostats to be immersion or surface mounted and
adjustable from 100 to 190 deg.F.
Provide ten year full non-prorated full replacement warranty.
INSTANTANEOUS POINT OF USE ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: International Technology Sales Corp. (trade name
ITS), Chronomite Industries, Bradford White, Rinnai, Noritz, Takagi, Bosch,
Stiebel Eltron, EEMAX, Inc.
B.
Warranty: 1 year full non-prorated for entire unit, including the element.
C.
Standard: UL 499 for electric, tankless water heating appliances.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
Section 224450 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.4
D.
Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61, with ASME B
1.20.1 pipe thread connections, rated to 150 PSIG, flow control fitting, electric
resistance heating element, high-temperature limit cutoff, and housed in an
aluminum or steel jacket with enamel or plastic finish.
E.
Provide power cord; plug, mounting brackets, stops, and connection as required.
Be responsible to coordinate with appropriate power supply receptacle provided
by Division 26 Contractor.
DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Taco
Bell and Gossett
Grundfos
Armstrong
Patterson
B.
Provide in-line type circulating pumps, all bronze construction, face bracket, cast
bronze one piece enclosed type impeller hydraulically and dynamically balanced,
alloy steel shaft with cupro-nickel shaft sleeve, carbon/ceramic mechanical shaft
seal, non metalic noiseless coupler, resilient mounted dry proof motor with sleeve
bearings and over load protection, pump bearing and seal assembly shall be
replaceable cartridge design, one cartridge and seal to fit all pumps supplied,
provide two extra cartridges and seals, oil level dip sticks (one for each pump),
and oil drain plug, 125 psig @ 240 deg.F rating.
C.
Provide one aquastat pump operating switch for remote mounting as shown on
drawings.
SUMP PUMPS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Enpo-Cornell
Hydromatic
Kenco
Weil Pump Company
Grundfos
Paco
Liberty Pumps
Bell & Gossett
Submersible Type:
1.
Provide cast iron construction submersible simplex sump pumps, power
cord of length required, mercury float switches, strap mounted, for pump
on, pump off.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
Section 224450 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
ELECTRIC POWERED STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS
A.
Coordinate electrical service and control with Division 26 Contractor in
accordance with Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B.
Set level and plumb, adjust elements to proper sequence and temperature
setting.
C.
Provide ASME temperature and pressure relief valve with full size discharge
piped and air gapped to nearest floor drain or other acceptable receptacle.
D.
Provide hose and drain valve, mixing valve, blending chamber shut off valves and
dielectric connections as required or appropriate.
INSTANTANEOUS POINT OF USE ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A.
Attach firmly to structure, provide union connections and install per
manufacturers, U.L., and jurisdictional authorities requirements and
recommendations.
B.
Units shall be level, plumb and square.
C.
Provide unit isolation valves and unions.
D.
Provide factory trained technician for start up of all units.
E.
Coordinate electrical power requirements with Division 26 Contractor in
accordance with Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS
A.
Coordinate wall mounted "on-off" toggle switch for pump and electrical power
requirements with Division 26 Contractor in accordance with Section 230529 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B.
Set pump level, plumb and square where indicated on contract documents on
vertical pipe leg extended to and supported by floor, provide floor plate and
capped leg at floor.
SUMP PUMPS
A.
Coordinate electrical power and control wiring, panel mounting and remote and
local alarm systems wiring with Division 26 Contractor in accordance with Section
230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
Section 224450 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
B.
Provide sumps and basins level and plumb, all openings thru basin or cover to be
gas tight, provide unions, valves and checks as appropriate. Note: pump
discharge check valves to be non slam type, tilting disc or pilot operated 45
degree swing design. Lift type or spring operated types will not be allowed.
C.
Operating floats shall be tied to vertical float rod and shall not swing free in basin.
D.
Provide pump power cords of sufficient length to exit basin and connect to power
source above floor outside of basin area.
END OF SECTION 224450
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
Section 224450 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 224460 - SPECIAL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Grease Removal System
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General
Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all
requirements of these documents.
B.
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B.
Section 221410 - Plumbing Piping.
D.
Section 224450 - Plumbing Equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Shop Drawings for the following items under provision of The General
Conditions of the Contract:
1.
B.
Submit Product Data for the following items under provision of The General
Conditions of the Contract:
1.
C.
Grease Removal System.
Grease Removal System.
Submit printed Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data for the following
items under provisions of Operating and Maintenance Data paragraph in Section
230500:
1.
Grease Removal System.
SPECIAL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS
Section 224460 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.5
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
WARRANTIES
A.
Provide original warranties for specific equipment of term specified and in
accordance with Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GREASE REMOVAL DEVICE (GRD)
A.
General:
Grease Removal Device shall be complete with single chamber secondary solid
interceptor with hinged, gasketed lid and filter insert, high efficiency Mazeamax™
oleophillic media, internal/external piping system, factory set self-regulating
enclosed electric immersion heater, control panel, 3/4” grease/air draw off valve,
5 gallon rendering receptacle, gasketed and fully removable housing lid, (1) 2”
inlet, (1) 2” wet vent, (1) 2” outlet, and vessel drain. Grease Removal Device and
System shall be equal to ECH2O GRS.
B.
Body and Housing:
The grease removal device housing shall be constructed of welded and painted
Schedule 80 PVC exterior and interior. Gasketed and bolted access lids allowing
for top access to Mazeamax™ oleophillic media and secondary filter insert
assembly for maintenance and inspection.
C.
Control Panel:
A central control system installed within a weatherproof enclosure will be
provided. It shall be rated NEMA 4X and be constructed of U.V. stabilized
thermoplastic and U.L. listed to meet and/or exceed industry safety standards.
The panel will contain power ON/OFF switch and buzzer and manual F.O.G.
extract buttons. It will control GRD operation of heater, power, automatic and/or
manual F.O.G. extraction. GRD control panel shall be connected to lift station
control panel for power and manual pump override.
D.
Filter Insert:
Filter insert shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel wire mesh welded on
a 316 stainless steel frame, which shall remove solid particles of 40 microns or
larger. The filter inserts are reusable, durable, and should be cleaned daily.
E.
Media:
Media shall be permanent and rechargeable by pressure wash or replacement.
Manufacturer shall furnish media.
SPECIAL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS
Section 224460 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
F.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Heater:
Heater shall be of the electric immersion type with adjustable built in thermostat.
Manufacturer shall furnish heater.
H.
Piping:
All system piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC and shall be provided with service
ball valve, full swing check valves, and all other components to make complete
assembly.
I.
Testing:
Grease removal device shall be tested to include the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
All power and remote cords shall be visually inspected for imperfections,
cuts or nicks.
The device shall be visually inspected for leakage and cracks.
The device controls and components will be tested for proper and efficient
operation.
SIMPLEX LIFT STATION (SLS-3048-F-4)
A.
General:
Filtered wastewater from GRS, Inc. solids interceptor(s) attached to high flow
compartment sinks, dishwasher and floor drains, shall collect in lift station. When
the wastewater reaches an adjustable level, the pump shall be activated
automatically by a pressure bell control. The wastewater is then pumped to GRS
Grease Removal Device for treatment. Lift station operation shall be automatic by
wall mounted lift station panel and manually controlled by GRS, Inc. Grease
Removal Device by remote lead.
Lift station shall be complete with simplex control panel with power, pump and
float connects, gasketed and bolted cover, inlet hub coupling, vent, (1) 2” outlet,
(2) submersible effluent sump pumps which are controlled by a pressure bell
pump control, internal/external piping, compression swing check valves, electrical
junction boxoverflow baffle(s) and all other components to make a complete unit.
Lift station shall be custom built to contractor's measurements of pipe elevation
and diameter. Lift station shall be USA manufactured.
B.
Basin:
1.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, the plastics terminology used in this
standard shall be in accordance with the definitions given in the American
Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Designations D3753-99.
SPECIAL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS
Section 224460 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
2.
Resin: The resin used shall be of a commercial grade and shall either be
evaluated as a laminate by test or determined by pervious service to be
acceptable for the environment.
3.
Reinforcing Material: The reinforcing material shall be a commercial grade
of glass fiber having a coupling agent which will provide a suitable bond
between the glass reinforcement and the resin.
4.
Laminate: The laminate shall consist of an inner surface, an interior layer,
and an exterior layer of laminate body.
5.
Inner Surface: The inner surface shall be free of cracks and crazing with a
smooth finish. This may be a gelcoat surface or reinforced with glass
surface veil.
6.
Interior Layer: A minimum of 0.100 inch of the laminate next to the inner
surface shall be reinforced with not less than 20 percent nor more than 30
percent by weight of non-continuous glass stands having fiber lengths
from 0.5 to 2.0 inches.
7.
Exterior Layer: The exterior layer of body of laminate shall be of
construction suitable for the service intended and contain sufficient glass
by weight to provide the aggregate strength necessary to meet the tensile
and flexural requirements. The exterior surface shall be relatively smooth
with no exposed fibers or sharp projections. Hand work finish is
acceptable, but enough resin shall be present to prevent fiber show.
8.
Tank Wall: Must be designed to withstand wall collapse based on the
assumption that saturated soil exerts hydrostatic pressure of 120 pounds
per cu. ft. The tank wall laminate must be constructed to withstand or
exceed two times the actual imposed loading on any depth of basin.
Stress calculations must be submitted verifying the results obtained using
120 pounds per cu. ft. hydrostatic pressure and two times actual imposed
loading on any depth basin.
9.
Appearance: The finished laminate shall be as free as commercially
practicable for visual defects such as foreign inclusions, dry spots, air
bubbles, pinholes, dimples and delaminations.
10.
Basin: The pump basin shall be constructed of fiberglass in any standard
model. The bottom of the basin shall be reinforced with a fiberglass antifloat flange extending beyond the basin diameter for anchoring to a
concrete pad.
Solid Fiberglass Cover:
The solid fiberglass cover shall be constructed with continuous mat or choppedstrand glass fiber reinforcement with a thickness of 1/4" inches. The cover shall
be mounted to the lift station with 300 series stainless steel fasteners and gasket.
SPECIAL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS
Section 224460 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Pump:
A submersible pump will be provided. Pump shall be rated 1/3 HP, 115 volts,
single phase, 60 hertz and operate at 1550 rpm. The pump shall deliver a
maximum of 40 U.S. GPM with up to 22 feet of head and handle ¾” spherical
solids. Pump motor type shall be oil-filled shaded pole with automatic reset
thermal overload and handle a maximum liquid temperature of 200°F. Pump
shall be of the sealed submersible type and be energy efficient.
E.
Control Panel:
A central control system installed within a weatherproof enclosure will be
provided. The pressure systems combine the features of a pressure transducer, a
pump controller with remote level settings and manual test / run switches, as well
as battery backed up audible alarms. It shall be rated NEMA 4X and be
constructed of U.V. stabilized thermoplastic and U.L. listed to meet and/or exceed
industry safety standards. The panel will contain 25 amp “DP” Heavy Duty
Definite Purpose Contactors, properly sized circuit breakers, power indication,
alarm and pump run lights, fully adjustable “Pump Off”, “Pump Run” and “High
Level” water level setting dials and hand run pushbuttons for each pump. Panel
shall also include 360 degree visual alarm light with 95 db audio alarm with
“Touch to Silence” circuitry. All pump and level control connections will pass
through the electrical conduit from junction box in lift station basin and into the
bottom of the control panel.
F.
Junction Box:
When the control panel is remotely located from the station, a weatherproof
junction box will be provided near the top of the station to accept the equipment
control cables. A conduit connection will be provided for connection to the top of
the lift station for connection to the panel.
G.
Electrical Conduit:
A 1 1/2"” nominal pipe diameter thermoplastic pipe grommet shall be factory
installed in the lift station basin. The pipe grommet shall provide a mechanical
seal and shall not require any secondary sealing materials.
H.
Discharge Coupling:
A 2” nominal pipe diameter thermoplastic pipe grommet shall be factory installed
in the lift station basin. The pipe grommet shall provide a mechanical seal and
shall not require any secondary sealing materials.
I.
Inlet Hub:
A 4” nominal pipe diameter thermoplastic pipe grommet shall be field installed by
the contractor in a 5” diameter hole in the lift station wall. The pipe grommet shall
provide a mechanical seal and shall not require any secondary sealing materials.
SPECIAL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS
Section 224460 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
K.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Level Control:
One pressure bell level control will be suspended from a bracket mounted inside
the lift station. It shall consist of 50 feet of pressure tubing, a thermoplastic
housing and diaphragm. This pressure bell will control the “Pumps Off”, “Lead
Pump Run”, “Lag Pump Run” and “High Level” levels based upon the pressure
applied to its diaphragm.
L.
Level Control Bracket:
The pressure bell level control bracket shall be fabricated from 300 series
stainless steel with 2 finger screws for adjustment and service purposes. It shall
be factory installed with lift station wall penetrations sealed with silicone sealer.
M.
Piping:
The station piping will be schedule 80 PVC. Each pump discharge line will have a
compression swing check valve for easy disconnect and pump servicing. The
common discharge pipe will exit the station through a thermoplastic pipe grommet
shall be factory installed in the lift station basin. The pipe grommet shall provide a
mechanical seal and shall not require any secondary sealing materials.
N.
Testing:
Lift station shall be tested to include the following:
1.
The pump power and pressure bell tubing shall be visually inspected for
imperfections, cuts or nicks.
2.
The piping system shall be visually inspected for leakage and cracks.
3.
The lift station controls and pumps will be tested for proper and efficient
operation.
2.3
SOLIDS INTERCEPTOR (GF-125-2)
A.
General:
Wastewater from compartment sinks, dishwasher and floor sinks, shall gravity
flow into interceptor inlet(s) continuing through interceptor inserts from the inside
out allowing solids to accumulate on the inside surface of inserts. The
wastewater shall continue to drain to the outlet of interceptor housing.
The interceptor shall be complete with 2” inlet/outlet, interceptor insert with
internal screen scraper, gasketed lid, adjustable stainless steel stand and all
other components to make a complete unit.
B.
Interceptor Body and Housing:
The interceptor housing and lid shall be constructed of rotational molded HDPE.
Gasketed lid allows for front access to interceptor insert allowing for installation
on low clearance appliances.
SPECIAL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS
Section 224460 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Interceptor Inserts:
Interceptor inserts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel perforated
sheet attached to Type 1 PVC end pieces which shall remove solid particles 400
microns and larger. The interceptor insert shall include an internal screen scraper
that will clean the collected solids off the screen. The interceptor insert is
reusable, durable, and should be cleaned daily.
D.
Testing:
The solids interceptor shall be water tested for leakage and cracks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GREASE REMOVAL SYSTEM
A.
Installation:
The GRS grease removal system shall be installed by the contractor according to
the manufacturer’s published instruction. Contractor shall run conduit from
device control panel to system lift station control panel and connect coinciding
terminals between both panels.
B.
Start-up Service:
The initial startup of the GRS grease removal device shall be performed by a
qualified factory representative of the manufacturer. It shall be the responsibility
of the factory representative to supervise the start-up and instruct the owner’s
personnel in the proper operation and maintenance procedures for the entire
GRS grease removal device.
END OF SECTION 224460
SPECIAL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS
Section 224460 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 230500 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Basic requirements common to the work in general of Division 23 and other
Divisions and Sections of the Specification where referenced.
B.
Provide, unless specified otherwise, all labor, materials and equipment necessary
for completely finished and operational mechanical systems described and
specified under other Sections of this Division 23.
C.
Provide all minor incidental items such as offsets, fittings, and accessories
required as part of the work even though not specified or indicated.
D.
Inspection: Inspect work preceding or interfacing with work of Division 23 and
report any known or observed defects that affect the Work to the Construction
Manager/General Contractor. Do not proceed with the work until defects are
corrected.
E.
Existing Utilities: Are indicated as accurately as possible on the Drawings. Close
openings and repair damage in acceptable manner to utilities encountered. This
Contractor shall be responsible for field surveying all aspects of existing
conditions prior to bid date. Change orders will not be issued for a failure to
review existing conditions which affect Division 23000 work.
RELATED WORK
A.
1.3
Requirements: Provide Basic Requirements in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
REFERENCES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal
Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more
rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
The date of the standard is that in effect at the date of the Contract
Documents, except when a specific date is specified.
When required by individual Specification sections, obtain copy of
standard. Maintain copy at job site during work until substantial
completion.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Schedule of Referenced Organizations: The following is a list of the acronyms of
organizations referenced in these Specifications:
ADC
Air Diffusion Council
1000 E. Woodfield Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173
www.flexibleduct.org
AGA
American Gas Association
400 No. Capitol St. N.W.
Washington, DC 20001
www.aga.org
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association
30 West University Drive
Arlington Heights, IL 60004
www.amca.org
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
1819 L Street N.W.
Washington, DC 20036
www.ansi.org
ARI
ASHRAE
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
4301 No. Fairfax Drive.
Arlington, VA 22203
www.ari.org
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, N.E.
Atlanta, GA 30329
www.ashrae.org
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Three Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016
www.asme.org
ASPE
American Society of Plumbing Engineers
8614 W. Catalpa Ave.
Chicago, IL 60656
www.aspe.org
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
901 Canterbury
Westlake, OH 44145
www.asse-plumbing.org
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbor Dr.
West Conshohoeken, PA 19428
www.astm.org
AWS
American Welding Society
550 N.W. LeJeune Rd.
Miami, FL 33126
www.aws.org
AWWA
American Water Works Association
6666 West Quincy Avenue
Denver, CO 80235
www.awwa.org
CDA
Copper Development Association
260 Madison Avenue
New York, NY 10016
www.copper.org
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
5959 Shallow Ford Rd., Suite 419
Chattanooga, TN 37421
www.cispi.org
CS
Commercial Standard of NBS
(U.S. Dept. of Commerce, National Institute of Standards
and Technology)
Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute
530 Wells Fargo Drive
Houston, TX 77090
www.cti.org
ICC
International Code Council
5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 600
Falls Church, VA 22041
www.intlcode.org
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical
Officials
20001 E. Walnut Drive South
Walnut, CA 91789
www.iapmo.org
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
NEBB
NEC
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
8575 Grovemont Circle
Gaithersburg, MD 20877
www.nebb.org
National Electric Code (of NFPA)
NEMA
National Electric Manufacturer’s Association
1300 N. 17th Street
Rosslyn, VA 22209
www.nema.org
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
One Batterymarch Park
P.O. Box 9101
Quincey, MA 02269
www.nfpa.org
NSF
OSHA
NSF International
789 No. Dixboro Rd.
Ann Arbor, MI 48113
www.nsf.gov
Occupational Safety Health Administration
(U.S. Dept. of Labor)
Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
www.osha.gov
PDI
Plumbing and Drainage Institute
45 Brystal Drive
South Easton, MA 02375
www.pdionline.org
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractor’s National Association
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151
www.smacna.org
UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
333 Pfingston Rd.
Northbrook, IL 60062
www.ul.com
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
DEFINITIONS
A.
Specification Language Explanation: These Specifications are of abbreviated,
simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete sentences. Omissions of
words of phrases such as "the Contractor shall", "in conformity therewith", "shall
be", "as noted on the drawings", "a", "the", are intentional. Supply when "NOTE"
occurs on Drawings. Supply words "shall be" or "shall" by inference when colon
is used with sentences or phrases. Supply words "on the Drawings" by inference
when "as indicated" is used with sentences or phrases. Singular words will be
interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where
applicable and where full context of the Contract Documents so indicates.
B.
Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "furnish" is used to
mean supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance.
C.
Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "install" is used to
describe operations at Project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.
D.
Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "provide" means
furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each
instance.
E.
Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to graphics, notes or
schedules on Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications,
and to similar means of recording requirements in contract documents. Where
terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of
"indicated", it is for purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference, and no
limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.
F.
General Contractor: The term "General Contractor" used in Division 23 and
elsewhere in the Contract Documents means the party with whom the Owner has
executed the Owner-Contractor Agreement.
G.
Approved Equal: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "approved
equal" means that any materials, equipment, work procedures and techniques
shall be either addressed on the drawing, specifications or addendum by
manufacturer or by detailed material description. When brand names are
referenced it implies that only the manufacturers listed are approved. All
approved material, equipment, work procedures, and techniques will be noted in
the specifications, drawings, or by addendum prior to bid date. Items not
approved in this manner will not be considered.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Quality Control:
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Materials and apparatus required for the work to be new and of first-class
quality unless otherwise noted; to be furnished, delivered, erected,
connected and finished in every detail; and to be so selected and
arranged so as to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific
kind or quality of material is given, a first-class standard article shall be
furnished.
Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who will be
constantly in charge of the installation of the work, together with all skilled
workmen, fitters, metal workers, certified welders, plumbers, millwrights,
sprinkler fitters, drain layers, helpers, and labor required to unload,
transfer, erect, connect, adjust, start, operate and test for each system.
Sprinkler piping and ductwork may be removed and reinstalled where
noted.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Execute work per Underwriters, Public Utility, Local and State Codes, Ordinances
and applicable regulations. Obtain and pay for required permits, inspections, and
certificates. Notify Architect of items not meeting said requirements.
B.
Comply with editions of all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations in effect
at the time of bid opening including but not necessarily limited to the following:
International Mechanical Code
International Plumbing Code
International Fuel Gas Code
State Department of Health Requirements
State Energy Code
National Fire Protection Association Standards
International Fire Code
International Building Code
National Electrical Code NFPA-70
State Boiler Code
Jurisdictional County Health Department
Jurisdictional City Wastewater Management Division or District
Jurisdictional City Water Department
Jurisdictional Water Conservation Standards
C.
If discrepancies occur between the Contract Documents and any applicable
codes, ordinances, acts, or standards, the most stringent requirements shall
apply.
D.
Where hourly fire ratings are indicated or required, provide components and
assemblies meeting requirements of the IBC, and listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.7
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data as required by various Sections of
Division 23 in accordance with The General Conditions of the Contract. The
Contractor agrees that these Submittals processed by the Engineer are not
Change Orders; that the purpose of these Submittals by the Contractor is to
demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design
concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment
and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and
installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if
deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between these Submittals and the
Contract Documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are
discovered either prior to or after these Submittals are processed by the
Engineer, the Design Drawings and Specifications shall control and shall be
followed.
B.
The submittals shall be submitted in a single package with all mechanical
equipment for the project enclosed. The submittals shall be enclosed in a stiff
back, 3-ring binder. All mechanical equipment shall be separated with tabbed
index cards with an indexed legend provided in the front of the binder.
C.
Test Reports: Submit certified test reports as required by various Sections of
Division 23 showing compliance in accordance with General Conditions of the
Contract. Signed copies shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
D.
Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data: Prepare and submit printed
operating instructions and maintenance data in accordance with Operating and
Maintenance Data paragraph in this Section.
E.
Submittals will be reviewed and marked as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
No Exceptions Taken: No action required.
Make Corrections Noted: Correct the submittals per notes by engineer
and submit new copies of submittal to contractor for project records. Do
not resubmit to engineer.
Rejected: Equipment as submitted does not meet requirements of
contract documents. Revise and/or clarify per comments and resubmit to
engineer.
Submittal Not Requested: Submittal not required per specification.
Submittal returned with no review.
Note that the submittal review process does not relieve Contractor from being
ultimately responsible for ensuring that submitted items satisfy all requirements of
the Contract Documents.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
G.
Site Condition and Coordination:
1.
1.8
1.9
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Before any ductwork is fabricated or equipment installed and before
running and/or fabricating any lines of piping or ductwork, the Contractor
shall provide Architect and Engineer ¼” scale drawings of all ductwork,
coordinated with all trades with submitted equipment and verify all other
areas to assure himself that they can be run and installed as
contemplated in cooperation with Contractors of other Divisions of the
Work and the physcial constraints of the Structural and Architectural Work
and maintain access maintenance.
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions and Prior Approvals: Substitutions and prior approvals will be
acceptable only when the proposed substitute has been submitted to the
Engineer and approved through an addendum or change order. Request for prior
approval shall be submitted a minimum of 10 calendar days prior to bid.
B.
Some materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer and catalog
numbers. The manufacturer and catalog numbers are used to establish a degree
of quality and style for such equipment and material.
C.
NOTE: When alternate or substitute materials and equipment are used Division
23 Contractor shall be responsible for engineering/redesign costs, space
requirements, configurations, performance, changes in bases, supports,
structural members and openings in structure, electrical changes and other
apparatus and trades that may be affected by their use. Notification of General
Contractor and other affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of the
Division 23 Contractor.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Comply with Division 1.
B.
Job Site Documents: Maintain at the job site, one record copy of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drawings
Specifications
Addenda
Reviewed Shop Drawings
Field Test Records
Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in
clean, dry legible condition, apart from documents used for construction.
C.
Record Information: Label each document "Record Document". Mark
information with red ink. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal
any work until required information is recorded.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
D.
Record following information on Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities to be dimensioned
from column lines.
Dimensioned location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction.
Field changes of dimension and detail.
Changes by change order or field order.
Details not on original contract drawings.
Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product
and item of equipment actually installed shall be indicated on equipment
schedules.
Record the following information on Specifications:
1.
2.
1.10
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Changes by change order or field order.
Other matters not originally specified.
F.
Shop Drawings: Maintain shop drawings as record documents recording
changes made after review as specified for drawings above.
G.
Submittal: At completion of project, deliver record documents to Owner's
representative and transmit a copy of signed receipt from Owner to the Engineer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
General: Deliver and store materials and equipment in manufacturer's unopened
containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class,
grade, size and color.
B.
Protection: Store materials and equipment off the ground and under cover,
protected from damage. Maintain caution labels on hazardous materials.
C.
Large Items: Make arrangements with other contractors on the job for
introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished
openings.
D.
Handling of Materials: Materials shall be handled, sorted and distributed using
appropriate handling methods to protect all materials from damage. Dented,
rusted, corroded or otherwise damaged materials shall be removed from the
project site. Determination of materials deemed unusable or inappropriate for
installation shall be made by the Architect/Engineer.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.11
PROJECT CONDITIONS AND ASBESTOS HAZARD
A.
Accessibility:
1.
B.
C.
Before any ductwork is fabricated and before running and/or fabricating
any lines of piping or ductwork, the Contractor shall assure himself that
they can be run as contemplated in cooperation with Contractor of other
Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural and
Architectural Work.
Scaffolding, Rigging and Hoisting:
1.
D.
Division 23 Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size
of shafts and chases and the adequate clearance in double partitions and
hung ceilings for proper installation of his work. He shall cooperate with
Contractors of other Divisions of the Work whose work is in the same
space and shall advise the General Contractor of his requirements. Such
spaces and clearances shall, however, be kept to the minimum size
required.
Fabrication:
1.
1.12
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for
erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus
furnished; remove same from premises when no longer required.
If Contractor during the course of work observes or suspects the existence of
asbestos in the structure or building, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and
Architect/Engineer. Owner shall consult with Architect/Engineer regarding
removal or encapsulation of the asbestos material and Contractor shall not
perform any work pertinent to the asbestos material prior to receipt of special
instructions from Owner through the Architect/Engineer.
COORDINATION
A.
General: Coordinate and order the progress of mechanical work to conform to
the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as
soon as the condition of the building will permit.
B.
Coordination with Electrical Work: Section 230529.
C.
Utility Interruptions: Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions with the Owner
and the Utility Company. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a
minimum.
D.
Cutting and Patching: Section 230529.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 10
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
E.
Drawings and Specifications: The Mechanical Drawings indicate the general
design and arrangement of lines, equipment, systems, etc. Information shown is
diagrammatic in character and does not necessarily indicate every required
offset, fitting, etc. Do not scale the Drawings for dimensions. Take dimensions,
measurements, locations, levels, etc., from the Architectural Drawings and
equipment to be furnished.
F.
Discrepancies: Examine Drawings and Specifications for other parts of the work,
and if any discrepancies occur between the plans for the work of this Division and
the plans for the work of others, report such discrepancies to the Construction
Manager/General Contractor and obtain written instructions for any changes
necessary.
G.
Order of Precedence: The precedence of mechanical construction documents
are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.13
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take
precedence over the original Drawings and Specifications.
Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or within Drawings of
the same scale, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall
apply.
In the Drawings, the precedence shall be Drawings of larger scale over
those of smaller scale, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and
noted materials over graphic indications.
Should there be a conflict in dimensions or locations between Mechanical
Drawings and Architectural Drawings, the Architectural Drawings shall
have precedence.
SCHEDULE OF TESTING
A.
Provide testing in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.
B.
A schedule of testing shall be drawn up by the Division 23 Contractor in such a
manner that it will show areas tested, test pressure, length of test, date, time and
signature of testing personnel.
C.
All testing must be performed in the presence of the Architect's 's/General
Contractor's representative; his signature for verification of the test must appear
on the schedule.
D.
All testing must be performed in accord with the procedures set forth in Division
23 and other Sections of the Specifications where referenced. At completion of
testing, the completed schedule shall then be submitted in triplicate to the
Architect and a copy shall be forwarded to the 230593 Contractor for inclusion in
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
E.
Make all specified tests on piping, ductwork and related systems as specified in
this specification.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 11
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.14
1.15
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
F.
Complete all tests required by Code Authorities, such as smoke detection, life
safety, fire protection and health codes.
G.
After test runs have been completed and systems have been demonstrated to be
satisfactory and ready for permanent operation, all permanent pipeline strainers
and filters shall be cleaned, air filters cleaned or replaced, settings on pressure
relief valves properly adjusted, valve and pump packings properly adjusted, belt
tensions adjusted, drive guards secured in place, lubrication checked and
replenished if required.
CLEANING AND FINISHING
A.
Provide cleaning in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1.
B.
Cleaning shall include but not be limited to removing grease, dirt, dust, stains,
labels, fingerprints and other foreign materials from sight-exposed piping,
ductwork, equipment, fixtures and other such items installed under Division 23 of
the work. If finishes have been damaged, refinish to original condition and leave
everything in proper working order and of intended appearance.
C.
Section 232113 Contractor shall be responsible to certify that all HVAC Piping
Systems have been cleaned in accordance with Section 232500 - HVAC Water
Treatment whether actually done by the Section 232113 Contractor or by the
232500 Contractor.
WARRANTIES
A.
Warranty: Provide a written warranty to the Owner covering the entire
mechanical work to be free from defective materials, equipment and
workmanship for a period of one year after Date of Acceptance. During this
period provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects.
Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess
of one year. Submit to the Construction Manager/General Contractor for delivery
to the Architect. Include a copy of all warranties in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
B.
This warranty will be superseded by the terms of any specific equipment
warranties or warranty modifications resulting from use of equipment for
construction heat or ventilation.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 12
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.16
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Project Observation Reports:
At or near the completion of the construction phase of this project, the Engineer
will generate one or more Project Observation Reports for the owner. These
reports will list the items of construction observed by the Engineer which are not
in compliance with the Contract Documents.
The Mechanical Contractor and/or subcontractors shall certify completion of each
listed item in writing and forward copies to the Architect, Engineer and General
Contractor. The Engineer will not recommend the payment of retainage until this
compliance certification has been received.
Each item on the Project Observation Report shall have a signature/date in the
margin of the report indicating completion of that item.
1.17
CERTIFICATES
A.
Certificates: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Construction
Manager/General Contractor one copy of Certificate of Final Inspection.
END OF SECTION 230500
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 230500 – Page 13
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 230529 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED WORK
A.
1.2
The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to this
Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these
documents.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The work includes, but is not limited to the following:
Materials and methods common to the work in general of Division 23 and other
Divisions and Sections of the Specifications where referenced.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
Reference Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the
Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following:
1.
Comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSIB31.1) Code for
Pressure Piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VALVES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide valves as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings
complete with accessories and attachments as required and appropriate
for the pressure/temperature of system.
Supply valves for proper pressure ratings determined by the system
working pressures at point of use and of proper types for systems and
functions indicated.
Provide like type valves of one manufacturer only unless specified
otherwise.
Plainly and permanently mark valves with manufacturer's name or
trademark, pressure rating, both Cold Working Pressure (CWP) and
Steam Working Pressure (SWP), as applicable and flow direction when
required to prevent improper installation.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
5.
6.
B.
Mark valves requiring approval by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) or
Factory Mutual Engineering Division (FM) with appropriate markings cast
into the valve body.
Provide extended necks as appropriate for insulation.
Manufacturers:
1.
The following manufacturers are acceptable providing the product to be
considered is equivalent in every respect to the nomenclature provided by
the specified make and model.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Bronze Valves: Powell, Milwaukee, Crane, Hammond, Nibco.
Ball Valves: Hammond, Watts, Jamesbury, Worcester,
Milwaukee, Apollo, Powell, Dynaquip, Nibco, Spirax Sarco.
Stop and Drain and Drain Valves: Milwaukee, Hammond,
Red-White, Prier, Nibco or United Brass.
Valve Schedule:
1.
Standard Bronze Valves - 150 SWP/300 CWP, per ASTM B61/B62. No
brass materials will be accepted.
a.
b.
c.
Check, Gate, and globe with union bonnet and rising stem.
Sizes 1/8 through 2 inches.
Schedule:
Plan Code:
G.V.
GL.V.
C.V.
L.C.V.
Valve Type:
Gate
Globe
Swing
Lift
Make:
Nibco
Nibco
Nibco
Crane
Straight Threaded:
T-134
T-235Y
T-433Y
365.5
Straight Soldered:
S-134
S-235Y
S-433Y
--
Angle Threaded:
--
T-335Y
--
--
Angle Soldered:
--
--
--
--
2.
Ball Valve:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Blowout proof stem.
Full port type with appropriate seals and seat, as specified.
Bronze bodies per ASTM B61/B62 or ASTM B-584. No brass
material will be accepted.
Stainless steel bodies per ASTM A-351, Grade CF3M.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
e.
Schedule:
Plan Code:
B.V.
B.V.
H.V.
S.B.V.
Service:
Balancing
In line control and
isolation
Refrigeration
Pressure:
Sizes/Inches:
150 SWP/300 CWP 150 SWP/300
CWP
1/4 thru 2-1/2
1/4 thru 3"
Steam and
Steam
Condensate
150 SWP
Make:
Nibco
Nibco
3/8" thru 2
1/8"
Nibco
Straight Threaded:
T-580-70-66
T-585-70-66
--
Straight Solder
End:
Actuator:
S580-70
S585-70
S595-Y-66
T-595-Y-S6R66
--
Lever with memory
stop
Standard
Lever
Lever
Lever
Full
Full
full
Port:
500 CWP
½” thru 2”
Nibco
* Steam ball valve includes a three-piece body, seals rated for steam operating temperatures up
to 400°F.
3.
Specialty Valves:
a.
b.
2.2
Petcock, stop and drain, drain, needle.
Schedule:
Plan Code:
PTK
S&D.V.
D.V.
N.V.
Type:
Petcock
Gate
Ball
Needle
Pressure:
250 LB.
125 LB.
125 LB.
200 LB.
Size/Inches:
1/8
1/2 and ¾
3/4
1/8 thru 3/4
Make:
Powell
Nibco
Apollo
Jenkins
Model:
922
76 or 726
78-104
743G
Ends:
Threaded
Threaded or
Soldered
Threaded and
Hose End
Adaptor
Threaded
PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES PROTECTION
A.
General:
1.
Provide hangers, rods, clamps, brackets, attachments, inserts, bracing,
nuts, coach screws, eye bolts, clips, plates, and washers as required for
appropriate installation for building structure provided.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
4.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
All hangers and accessories shall be manufactured by one manufacturer
for compatibility of all components.
All hangers, attachments, and accessories shall be provided with a
certified manufacturers safety factor of five (5).
All hangers, attachments and accessories shall comply with the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
B.
Safety factor of 5 (actual load vs. ultimate load).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) (except as amended
by provisions of this Specification for minimums) and as
applicable.
Factory Mutual Engineering Division (FM) as applicable.
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS).
Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered
methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96.
Material:
1.
2.
3.
4.
*
Hangers in contact with steel, iron, cast or ductile iron shall be hot dipped
galvanized or cold galvanized with "Galvilite by ZRC" cold galvanized
compound only to a thickness of not less than 3.0 mil (.003 inches).
"Galvilite by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA. Tel: (800) 831-3275,
www.zrcworldwide.com” or equal.
Hangers in contact with copper piping shall be copper clad or provided
with heavy density felt (20 oz.) pad permanently attached to the hanger
and placed so as to prevent direct contact between pipe and hanger. Felt
shall be mildew and moisture rot-proof. Heavy polyvinyl chloride coating
on hanger, 5 mil thickness minimum will be acceptable in lieu of felt.
Hangers in contact with "plastic" or "glass" piping shall be galvanized in
accordance with Sub-paragraph B-1, above and padded in accordance
with Sub-paragraph B-2, above.
Hangers for insulated piping shall be provided on all piping of this size
with insulation shields or insulation saddles* as applicable and appropriate
and in accordance with the following schedule:
Nominal Pipe
or Tubing Size
½" thru 3"
Shield
Length
12"
Shield Gauge Material
Thickness
18
Galvanized
4"
12"
16
Galvanized
5"
15"
16
Galvanized
6"
18"
16
Galvanized
8"
24"
--
B-line (B3160-3165)
over 8"
36"
--
B-line (B3160-3165)
Insulation inserts between piping and shield shall be furnished by 230700
Contractor for appropriate pipe size and insulation thickness for all
insulated piping requiring a vapor barrier.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide swivel ring hangers similar and equivalent to B-Line B-3170,
3170CT, and 3170C for pipe sizes 1/2" thru 8".
Clevis type hangers may, at the Contractors option, be provided when
similar and equivalent to B-Line B-3100, and 3100C.
Roller type hangers shall be used on all steam piping 4" and larger and
when appropriate shall be equivalent to B-Line B-3110 black steel with
cast iron roller. Provide insulation saddles for all roll-type hangers, B-Line
B3160-3165. Calcium silicate inserts, in conjunction with insulation
saddles shall be provided on all steam piping.
Beam and bar joist clamps shall be appropriate for attachment locations,
top beam, bottom beam, etc., and provided with retainer rods, clips or
straps as required.
Hanger spacing and minimum rod sizes shall be based on the applicable
Mechanical and Plumbing Codes for the type of piping installed.
Riser clamps shall be provided on all vertical risers at each floor and shall
conform to materials and protective coatings or pads as specified in
Paragraph B of this Article 2.05. Clamps shall be similar and equivalent to
B-Line B-3131 and B-3148.
Provide concrete inserts where required in flat slab construction similar
and equivalent to B-Line B-22-1 Series 2000 lbs. per foot load capacity
and spaced per hanger spacing schedule (sub-paragraph B-9 above)
provide all accessories and nuts required.
Trapeze hangers shall be constructed of channel similar and equivalent to
B-Line Series B-11 thru B-72 as appropriate complete with pipe clamps,
nuts, rollers etc., as required. Channel to bear 5 times actual weight of all
piping on trapeze system with minimum deflection. (.01 inch maximum). At
a minimum, install pipe clamps on every other trapeze hanger, and where
required to comply with seismic restraint design.
Wall brackets shall be fabricated "knee" brackets conforming to
requirements of sub-paragraph B-12 above and made up with B-Line
Series B-11 thru B-72 channel. Angle clips may be used in wood joist
construction when similar and equivalent to B-Line B-3060 or 3061.
Hangers attached to wood construction shall be attached by use of eye
bolts, coach screws or lag bolts when load bearing ratings maintain a
safety factory of 5.
All other means of support i.e., special construction, pipe stands,
earthquake bracing, sway bracing, etc., shall be provided as required and
in conformance with jurisdictional authority and these Contract
Documents, submit all special or required support and bracing systems for
review by the Architect/Engineer prior to installing any item.
All vertical refrigeration suction and hot gas, and all steam piping shall be
provided with insulation shields and calcium silicate inserts at each
support location.For plenum applications use pipe supports that meet
ASMT E-84 25/50 standards.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Manufacturers acceptable to this Specification are as follows, all other
manufacturers must submit for acceptance.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.3
B-Line
Fee & Mason
Grinnell
Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE
P.H.D.
Michigan
Tolco
DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS AND ISOLATORS
A.
Manufacturer: Epco Sales Inc., Victaulic.
B.
Schedule: (complete unions)
C.
D.
Model:
FX
GX
Sizes:
½" thru 2"
2" thru 12"
Maximum Pressure:
250 psi
175 psi
Maximum Temp.:
210 deg. F
210 deg. F
Epconite Gasket:
#2
#2
Ends:
FPT x Solder
FPT x Solder
Type:
Union
Flanged Union
Schedule: (companion flanges)
Model:
X
W
H
Sizes:
1-1/2" - 10"
1-1/2" - 12"
1-1/2" - 12"
Maximum Pressure:
175 psi
175 psi
175 psi
Maximum Temp.:
210 deg. F
210 deg. F
210 deg. F
Epconite Isolators:
#2
#2
#2
End Style:
Solder (Brass)
Weld neck
Iron Pipe Thread
Type:
Companion
Companion
Companion
Face Gasket:
Same as Isolators
Dielectric fittings shall conform to ASA B16.8, and shall be plated as applicable a
minimum of .0005" and have no flow restriction when assembled.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Unless otherwise specifically indicated on Drawings or in Specifications,
install equipment and materials in accordance with recommendations of
manufacturer, including performance of tests as manufacturer recommends.
B.
Protection:
1.
3.2
Close ends of pipe and ductwork during construction and cover
equipment to prevent entry of foreign material. Protect insulation against
dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage before, during and after
installation. Cover floor drains and protect fixtures and equipment against
damage during concrete pours and mechanical work.
SLEEVES, PLATES AND CLOSURES
A.
Division 23 Contractor shall provide and locate pipe sleeves, and inserts required
before new floors and walls are built or shall be responsible for the cost of cutting
and patching required where sleeves and inserts were not installed or where
incorrectly located.
B.
Provide sleeves for mechanical piping passing through concrete floor slabs and
through concrete, masonry, tile, and gypsum wall construction. Provide metal
collars to close and protect openings.
C.
Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction will occur, make sleeves of
sufficient diameter to permit free movement of pipe. Where sleeves pass
insulated pipes, the sleeves shall be large enough to pass the pipe only and the
insulation shall be made to butt against the construction, except for pipes
requiring insulation having a vapor barrier, in which case, the sleeves shall be
large enough to pass the pipe and insulation. Check floor and wall construction
finishes to determine proper length of sleeves for various locations, make actual
lengths to suit the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Terminate sleeves flush with floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings.
Seal annular space around pipes watertight at floor penetrations.
In areas where pipes are concealed, as in chases, terminate sleeves flush
with floor.
In all areas where pipes are exposed, extend sleeves 1/4" above finished
floor, except in rooms having floor drains, where sleeves shall be
extended 2" above floor and in Kitchens and Mechanical Equipment
Rooms, where sleeves shall be extended 4" above floor.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.3
D.
Sleeves shall be constructed of 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel with lock seam
joints for all sleeves set in concrete floor slabs terminating flush with the floor. All
other sleeves shall be constructed of galvanized steel pipe unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings. "Crete Sleeve" (plastic type) sleeves are acceptable
for concrete construction as manufactured by Sperzel Division, Shamrock
Industries.
E.
Fasten sleeves securely in floors and walls so that they will not become displaced
when concrete is placed or when other construction is built around them.
F.
Provide tight fitting floor and ceiling plates on pipes passing thru walls, ceilings,
and floors. Nickel or chrome plated in finished areas, galvanized cast iron in
unfinished areas. Provide wall and ceiling flanges for ducts in finished areas.
G.
Provide all cutting, patching of holes, openings, notches. Obtain written approval
for notching, boring, chipping, burning, drilling, welding to structural members in
accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.
H.
Where pipe sleeves penetrate fire rated walls and floors, this contractor shall use
fire safing to seal openings.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cutting in Existing Building:
1.
B.
The General Contractor shall make arrangements for required openings in
the existing building to facilitate the passage of ductwork, piping, etc. thru
existing floors, walls, and beams. Division 23 Contractor to coordinate all
requirements.
Patching in Existing Building:
1.
3.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
The General Contractor shall patch all existing walls and floors to match
existing.
PIPE HANGERS/SUPPORTS
A.
Use inserts, anchors, expansion bolts or other approved and acceptable means
of attachment to concrete construction. Set inserts in advance of concrete
installation, provide required reinforcement rod for all inserts carrying loading
equivalent of one 4" pipe or more. All inserts shall be flush with face of slab or
wall containing insert.
B.
Provide flat square washers for rods thru metal decking with nut above washer,
when acceptable and approved.
C.
Cinch hangers to carry appropriate share of loading and slope piping without
sags or "pocketing" as appropriate and required.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.5
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
D.
Rod offsets, or angle installation, plumber tape or wire will not be accepted.
Hanger rods shall be true and plumb.
E.
Piping shall not be hung from other piping or equipment items. Provide
attachments to building structure only. Use trapeze, wall brackets, knee brackets,
etc., where hanger rods cannot be attached within spacing plumb to structures.
F.
Provide sway and earthquake bracing where required in accordance with Section
230548 - Mechanical Seismic Control.
INSTALLATION OF VALVES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Provide valves as shown on Contract Documents and as required for
pressure relief, balancing and/or control of flow.
Provide isolation valves for maintenance and service on each piece of
equipment regardless of whether or not shown on Contract Drawings.
Provide isolation valves for all branch line take-offs that serve more than
two items of fixtures or equipment.
Provide balancing valves for each leg of domestic hot water return piping
of two branches or more, all heating/cooling water returns and/or supplies
to equipment as shown on Contract Documents.
Provide access means for each valve or group of valves either by access
panels or utilization of inherent access provided by building methods i.e.,
lift out ceiling construction or exposed valve installations in non critical
areas such as janitors closets, storage rooms, etc.
Install all valves with valve bonnets or operating stems in vertical (upright)
position when possible, valves may be installed with bonnets or stems not
less than 35 degrees downward from vertical plane except valves on
vertical piping may be 90 degrees from vertical plane. Swing type check
valves shall be installed on horizontal piping no more than 45 degrees
upward slope from horizontal plane, using lift checks on vertical piping.
Lift check valves shall not be used on sewage or sump pump discharge
piping.
Inspect and tighten all bonnet nuts, bolts, packing glands, lubricate all
valves requiring lubrication, secure all hand wheels and identification
plates, be responsible for all valves having manufacturers name, trade
name, working pressure and size stamped or cast into the body of the
valve. Perform all maintenance, repacking and inspection prior to
installation of valve.
Proper Installation of Valves:
1.
Provide valves in accordance with the following schedule unless specified
otherwise in Contract Documents.
a.
Dead-end shut off: Gate, ball, butterfly, plug, stop and drain.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Provide all valves which are not accessible for repair without removal from
piping with union connection immediately adjacent to valve outlet.
FIRE SAFING
A.
3.7
Throttling: Ball, plug, globe, diaphragm, needle, butterfly (when
using butterfly valves for throttling, additional valves must be
provided for service shutoff.)
Backflow prevention: Check.
Water hammer prevention: Silent or pilot operated non slam
check.
Gas piping: Lubricated plug (or ground joint cock up to 1" only), or
UL-Listed ball valve.
Removal and Repair Provisions:
1.
3.6
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Mechanical Contractor shall provide fire safing for his work as follows: Where fire
rated separations are penetrated by pipes, conduit or ductwork, the annular
space around the pipe, conduit or ductwork shall be filled with a U.L. Rated fire
safing material
DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS AND ISOLATORS
A.
Provide dielectric pipe fittings and isolators at all connections between dissimilar
metals in the domestic water, and fire protection systems to control corrosion
potential caused by galvanic or electrolytic action.
B.
Typical locations for dielectric isolation are; water heaters, storage and pressure
tanks, water conditioning equipment, pumps, changes in service piping materials,
make-up connections to boilers and chilled water systems, valves, deaerators,
flexible connectors and the like where materials of different electrode potential
are joined.
C.
Hangers for piping shall be isolated per Section 230529 when hanger and piping
materials are dissimilar and subject to production of electrolysis or galvanic
action.
D.
Storage tanks shall be isolated from piping and tank stands by use of
anti-electrolytic and galvanic isolators.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 10
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.8
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
EXISTING PIPES TO BE REMOVED
A.
Where existing piping is to be removed and/or relocated, all piping shall be
disconnected and capped. All existing piping and hangers not to remain in use
shall be removed completely to an existing main that is to remain in use, and
capped at the main. General Contractor shall do all cutting, patching, and
restoring that may be required for the removal of this piping and equipment.
Where it is not possible to remove branch piping not remaining in use, due to its
being concealed in the structure, the Division 23 Contractor shall cap the piping
concealed at both ends in these areas as approved by the Architect.
B.
All mechanical equipment, fixtures, and piping to be removed and not re-used
shall remain the property of the Division 23 Contractor for credit to the contract
price except as noted otherwise.
END OF SECTION 230529
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Section 230529 – Page 11
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 230540 - MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED WORK
A.
Requirements: Provide Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
B.
Related work specified in other Sections:
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Section 232113 - HVAC Piping & Specialties
Section 233300 – Ductwork and Accessories
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The work includes, but is not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Support isolation for motor/driven mechanical equipment.
Fabricated bases for distribution of equipment loading to isolation units.
Sound-linings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The Division 23 Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that all the following
sound pressure level criteria are met. Sound pressure level tests shall be carried
out by the Section 230593 Contractor in compliance with the Section 230593
specifications.
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
Section 230540 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Acoustical Criteria:
1.
Noise levels due to equipment and ductwork to permit attaining sound
pressure levels in all 8 octave bands in occupied spaces conforming to
RC curves:
All occupied spaces --------------------------------------------- RC-35
except
Occupied spaces within 15 foot radius from mechanical rooms, main
supply and return duct shafts --------------------------------- RC-40
Lobbies, Toilets, Commons Area ---------------------------- RC-40
Kitchen ------------------------------------------------------------- RC-45-50
Mechanical Rooms --------------------------------------------- RC-60-80
C.
Mechanical Acoustical Performance:
1.
Air Distribution system equipment terminal device noise:
a.
Maximum permissible discharge sound-power levels in octave
bands of airborne transmission through the terminal units or
related pressure reducing devices, when operated in installed
condition per Drawings and Specifications shall be as per Table 1,
following:
TABLE 1 - Maximum PWL (dB re 10E-12 Watt)
Octave Band
RC-30
RC-35
RC-40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
54
68
61
59
51
48
39
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
59
73
66
64
56
53
44
64
78
71
69
61
58
49
RC-45
69
83
76
74
66
63
54
Section 230540 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Pressure reducing variable air volume boxes radiated noise:
a.
Maximum permissible radiated sound-power levels in octave
bands when operated in an installed condition over occupied
spaces, shall be as per Table 2 following:
TABLE 2 - Maximum PWL (dB re 10E-12 Watt)
Octave Band
RC-30
RC-35
RC-40
RC-45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3.
59
67
63
60
58
55
51
64
72
68
65
63
60
56
69
77
73
70
68
65
61
Motor Acoustical Performance:
a.
b.
1.4
54
62
58
55
53
50
46
Motor drives for pumps when installed per Drawings and
Specifications shall operate with noise levels not exceeding
90dbA.
Noise levels shall be determined in accordance with IEEE
Standard #85 Test "Procedure for Air-Borne Noise Measurements
on Rotating Electric Equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data for the following items
in accordance with the Division 1 of the Contract.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Each type of isolator including spring diameters, deflections, compressed
spring height and solid spring height.
Sound Attenuators.
Sound Lining.
Inertia Bases.
Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance in accordance
with Division 1 of the Contract of the following items:
1.
2.
Pressure drop and insertion loss ratings for sound attenuators.
Certification that sound lining meets erosion test method described in UL
Publication No. 181.
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
Section 230540 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ISOLATION
A.
Manufacturer: Mason Industries, Inc., Vibro-Acoustics.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: Korfund,
Amber/Booth Co., Vibration Mountings and Control Co., Kinetics.
C.
Neoprene Mounting Pads (Specification Schedule Type 1)
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Double Deflection Neoprene Mountings (Specification Schedule Type 2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Mason Industries Type ND Mounting, Type DNR Rails.
Minimum static deflection 0.35 inch.
Bolt holes where required.
Steel rails above mountings to compensate for overhang where required.
Spring Isolator Mountings (Specification Schedule Type 3)
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Kinetics Noise Control Type NPD.
Minimum static deflection 0.04” for 0.22” thick pad.
Cross, double ribbed elastomer in-shear pads, capable of 60 or 120 PSI
loading, depending on load density of equipment being isolated.
Material thickness as required to provide minimum deflections listed in
table at end of the specification section.
Mason Industries Type SLF.
Free-standing, laterally stable without housing, complete with 1/4 inch
neoprene acoustical friction pads between base plate and support and
with leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to equipment.
Spring diameters no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring
at rated load.
Springs with minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent rated
deflection.
Integral Structural Steel Base (Specification Schedule Type B)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mason Industries Type WF.
Rectangular for equipment other than "T" or "L" shaped pump bases.
Pump bases for split case pumps to include supports for suction and
discharge base ells.
Beams for perimeter members minimum depth equal to one tenth of the
longest dimension of the base. Depth need not exceed 14 inches if
deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits by
manufacturer.
Provide height saving brackets to provide a clearance of one inch.
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
Section 230540 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
G.
Steel Rail Base (Specification Schedule Type B)
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.
4.
Mason Industries Type RMM.
Flexible Butyl 150 lb. hose with brass screw type ends attached by
expansion or swedging methods. Clamps are unacceptable.
Duty up to: 100 psi and 220 deg. F.
Hoses up to 1-1/4 inches shall be 12 inches in length and 1-1/2 inches to
2 inches shall be 18 inches in length.
Flexible Neoprene Sphere Pipe Connectors (2" to 12")
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Mason Industries Type K.
Rectangular structural beam or channel concrete forms for floating
foundations.
Provide bases for split case pumps large enough for suction and
discharge base ells supports.
In general, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, provide bases with a
minimum depth of one twelfth of the longest dimension of the base, but
not less than 6 inches.
Forms to include minimum concrete reinforcement consisting of 1/2 inch
bars or angles welded in place on 6 inch centers running both ways in a
layer 1-1/2 inches above the bottom, or additional steel as is required by
the structural conditions.
Forms furnished with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below the
holes to receive equipment anchor bolts.
Provide height saving brackets to maintain a 1 inch clearance below base.
Flexible Butyl Hose Pipe Connectors (Up to 2")
1.
2.
J.
Mason Industries Type ICS.
Steel members welded to height saving brackets to cradle machines
having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base.
Provide members sufficiently rigid to prevent strains in the equipment.
Concrete Inertia Bases (Specification Schedule C)
1.
2.
I.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Mason Industries Type MFNC and Type MFTNC.
Neoprene single-sphere type with 150 lb. ASA steel floating flanges.
Duty up to: 150 psi and 230 deg. F.
Movement limits: minimal 3/8 inch axial compression, 1/4 inch axial
elongation, 3/8 inch lateral movement and 15 deg. angular movement.
SOUND LININGS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Permacote, Linacoustic and
Spiracoustic.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: Knauf, CertainTeed
ToughGuard R.
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
Section 230540 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
C.
Product: Fibrous glass, acrylic surface coating, stenciled NFPA, conforming to
ASTM C1071, ASTM G21 and ASTM G22.
D.
Minimum thickness: As indicated in Part 3 of this specification.
E.
Sound Absorption Coefficient for 1" thickness per the following:
Frequency (cps)
Coefficient
2.3
2.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
=
=
125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC
0.09 0.29 0.65 0.78 0.83 0.80 0.70
F.
Flamespread: Maximum 25.
G.
Fuel contributed and smoke developed: Maximum 50.
H.
Suitable for duct velocity of 5000 fpm. Lining shall meet erosion test method
described in UL Publication No. 181.
I.
Dynamic loss coefficient: Maximum 1.2.
J.
Thermal conductivity 0.25 Btu/hr/deg F/in. @ 75°F mean temperature.
ADHESIVE AND SEALER
A.
Acceptable Products: Adhesive, Benjamin Foster "81-99", or accepted equal,
Sealer, Benjamin Foster "82-07" or accepted equal.
B.
In conformance with NFPA 90A.
C.
Flamespread: Maximum 25.
D.
Fuel contributed and smoke developed: Maximum 50.
NON-HARDENING CAULKING
A.
Acceptable Products: Tremco "Polybutene", Schuller or accepted equal.
B.
Guaranteed to be permanently elastic.
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
Section 230540 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
GENERAL - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ISOLATION
A.
Unless otherwise noted on the Equipment Mounting Schedule, provide
mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the transmission
of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure.
Vibration isolators to be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as
to produce reasonable uniform deflection. Deflections to be as noted on the
Equipment Mounting Schedule included at the end of this section.
B.
Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. Inform
other trades following the isolation work, to avoid any contact which would reduce
the vibration isolation.
C.
The installation or use of vibration isolators must not cause any change of
position of equipment or piping which would result in stresses in piping
connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. In order to meet this
objective, maintain equipment and piping in a rigid position during installation. Do
not transfer the load to the isolator until the installation is complete and under full
operational load.
D.
Support the machine to be isolated with a structural steel frame.
E.
Provide brackets to accommodate the isolator and provide a mechanical stop.
The vertical position and size of the bracket to be recommended by the isolator
manufacturer.
HANGERS
A.
Install type 2 or 3 vibration isolation piping hangers where indicated in Equipment
Mounting Schedule at the end of this section and within 20 feet (measured along
piping) upstream and downstream of all pumps 3 HP or larger.
B.
Install the isolators with the isolator hanger box attached to or hung as close as
possible to the structure.
C.
Suspend the isolators from substantial structural members, not from slab
diaphragm unless specifically accepted.
D.
Align hanger rods to clear hanger box.
EQUIPMENT BASES
A.
Provide minimum operating clearance between the equipment frame or rigid steel
base frame and the housekeeping pad or floor of 1 inch. Provide minimum
operating clearance between concrete inertia base and the housekeeping pad or
floor of 1 inch.
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
Section 230540 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.4
COIL BASES
A.
3.5
3.6
Mount floor supported coil section on a 1/4" thick layer of ribbed neoprene pad,
with a 16 gauge galvanized steel plate between coil frame and pad. Coil shall be
mounted on a concrete curb of sufficient height to allow coil drain pan to be
sloped in two directions to drain pan bottom outlet with P-trap and/or refrigerant
suction line traps to be installed without hitting floor.
FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS
A.
Provide flexible connectors for equipment that is supported by or mounted on
vibration isolators except when connected piping is made up with a Victaulic Flex
coupling system. Connectors to be installed under Section 232113.
B.
Provide connectors at pump suction and discharge, and elsewhere as required to
accommodate thermal expansion, vibration and misalignment.
C.
Provide flexible connectors on all suction and discharge connections to all base
mounted centrifugal pumps, vertical turbine pumps, air compressors, dryers,
vacuum pumps or other equipment items producing vibration, shock, noise, or
thermal motion of piping.
D.
Provide 300 psi companion flanges for connector for threaded, welded, soldered,
or brazed piping as appropriate.
E.
Connectors to be aligned, centered, and shall not bear weight of pipe, fittings, or
pipeline accessories such as valves. Piping shall be supported both sides of
horizontal or vertical connectors.
PIPE FLOOR SUPPORTS
A.
3.7
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide type 3 mountings with a minimum static deflection of 1.5 inches on
horizontal pipe floor supported at slab in equipment rooms above grade.
SOUND LININGS
A.
Dimensions of lined ductwork are clear inside dimensions after lining has been
installed.
B.
Sound linings to be held in place with mechanical fasteners as per the latest
SMACNA duct liner application standard, with joints and any tears to be coated
with Benjamin Foster or accepted equal adhesive. The transverse joints to be
coated prior to installation so that the ends of the liner are compressed together
while the adhesive is still moist, forming a seal of the leading and trailing edge of
each joint. Excess adhesive to be brushed to an even finish over the joint.
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
Section 230540 – Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.8
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
EQUIPMENT MOUNTING SCHEDULE
A.
Manufacturer: Mason Industries, Inc., Kinetics, Vibro-Acoustics.
B.
Schedule: See the following pages.
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
Section 230540 – Page 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE
EQUIPMENT TYPE
SLAB ON GRADE
BASE
TYPE
ISOL
TYPE
20 FT. FLOOR SPAN
MIN. DEFL.
(IN.)
BASE
TYPE
ISOL
TYPE
MIN DEFL.
(IN.)
PUMPS
A. Close Coupled
1.
Up to 3 HP
A
2
.25
C
3
.75
1.
5 to 7 1/2 HP
B
2
.25
C
3
.75
2.
10 HP & Over
C
3
.75
C
3
.75
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
Section 230540 – Page 10
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE
EQUIPMENT TYPE
SLAB ON GRADE
BASE
TYPE
ISOL
TYPE
20 FT. FLOOR SPAN
MIN. DEFL.
(IN.)
BASE
TYPE
ISOL
TYPE
MIN DEFL.
(IN.)
PUMPS
A. Flexible Coupled
1.
Up to 40 HP
C
3
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
.75
C
3
.75
Section 230540 – Page 11
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE
EQUIPMENT TYPE
SLAB ON GRADE
BASE
TYPE
ISOL
TYPE
20 FT. FLOOR SPAN
MIN. DEFL.
(IN.)
BASE
TYPE
ISOL
TYPE
MIN DEFL.
(IN.)
BASE TYPES:
A = NO BASE, ISOLATORS ATTACHED DIRECTLY TO EQUIPMENT
B = STRUCTURAL STEEL RAILS OR BASE
C = CONCRETE INERTIA BASE
D = CURB-MOUNTED BASE
ISOLATOR TYPES
1 = RUBBER OR GLASS FIBER PAD
2 = RUBBER FLOOR ISOLATOR OR HANGER
3 = SPRING FLOOR ISOLATOR OR HANGER
4 = RESTRAINED SPRING ISOLATOR
5 = SPRING AND RUBBER IN SERIES HANGER
NOTES:
1.
CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE VIBRATION ISOLATION AND
CALCULATIONS STAMPED BY A LICENSED PROFESSIONAL
ENGINEER.
2.
TO AVOID ISOLATOR RESONANCE PROBLEMS, SELECT
ISOLATOR DEFLECTION SO THAT NATURAL FREQUENCY IS 40%
OR LESS THAN LOWEST OPERATING SPEED OF EQUIPMENT
(SEE ASHRAE HVAC APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK, 1999 EDITION).
END OF SECTION 230540
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
Section 230540 – Page 12
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 230548 - MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Anchorage and seismic restraint systems for all Division 23 isolated and
non-isolated equipment, ductwork and piping systems.
B.
All piping/ductwork installed or modified under this contract to be isolated and/or
seismically supported shall include but not be limited to the following:
1.
2.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Piping
Ductwork
RELATED WORK
A.
Requirements: Provide Mechanical Seismic Control in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
B.
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
C.
Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
REFERENCES
A.
International Building Code, Current Edition in use by Jurisdictional Authority.
B.
NFPA Bulletin 90A, Current Edition.
C.
UL Standard 181.
D.
Tri-Services Manual, Fagel Et Al, 1973.
E.
SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for mechanical systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The Division 23 Contractor shall be responsible for supplying and installing
equipment, vibration isolators, flexible connections, rigid steel frames, anchors,
inserts, hangers and attachments, supports, seismic snubbers and bracing to
comply with the following:
1.
Short period design spectral response acceleration coefficient SDS= 0.67.
MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROL
Section 230548 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.5
One-second period design spectral response acceleration coefficient SD1=
0.67.
Site Class D.
Seismic Design Category D.
All other components have an importance factor IP of 1.0.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
All supports, hangers, bases, anchorage and bracing for all piping and ductwork
shall be designed by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the
project is located, employed by the restraint manufacturer, qualified with seismic
experience in bracing for mechanical systems. Shop drawings included with
deferred submittal for earthquake bracing and anchors from the restraint
manufacturer shall bear the Engineer's signed professional seal. All
calculations/design work required for the seismic anchorage and restraint of all
Division 23 equipment and systems shall be provided by a single firm.
SUBMITTALS
A.
A single submittal shall be provided for all seismic anchorage and restraints for all
Division 23 equipment and systems provided as part of this project. Individual
submittals for specific systems will not be accepted.
B.
Submit shop drawings, calculations, and printed data for the following items
under provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Complete engineering calculations and shop drawings for all seismic
requirements for all systems to be restrained as outlined in Paragraph 1.1
above, and as detailed on drawings.
The professional seal of the engineer who is responsible for the design of
the Seismic Restraint System.
Details for all seismic bracing.
Clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators,
seismic bracing anchors, snubbers, cables, and bolt connections.
Include confirmation that all calculations are based on the design criteria
listed in Paragraph 1.4.A of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RESTRAINT EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers and Suppliers for Non-Isolated Systems:
1.
2.
3.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Korfund
Amber/Booth Company
MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROL
Section 230548 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.2
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Vibration Mountings and Control Company
Kinetics
International Seismic Application Technology
Tolco
Vibro Acoustics
Manufacture and design of restraints and anchors for isolated equipment shall be
by the manufacturer of the vibration isolators furnished for the equipment in
accordance with Section 230540.
SNUBBERS
A.
Snubbers shall be all-directional and consist of interlocking steel members
restrained by replaceable shock absorbent elastomeric materials a minimum of
3/4 inch thick.
B.
Snubbers shall be manufactured with an air gap between hard and resilient
material of not less than 1/8 inch or more than 1/4 inch.
C.
Snubbers shall be Mason Industries Z - 1011 or accepted equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DESIGN AND INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
All mechanical piping and ductwork shall be braced, anchored, snubbed
or supported to withstand seismic disturbances in accordance with the
criteria of this specification. Provide all engineering, labor, materials and
equipment for protection against seismic disturbances as specified herein.
The following mechanical components are exempt from seismic restraint
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Components in Seismic Design Categories A and B (see 1.4-A-5
above).
Components in Seismic Design Category C (see 1.4-A-5 above)
that have an importance factor IP of 1.0 (see 1.4-B above).
Components that have an importance factor IP of 1.0 (see 1.4-B
above), that are mounted less than four feet above the floor, that
weigh less than 400 pounds, and that have flexible ductwork,
piping, and conduit connections.
Components that have an importance factor IP of 1.0 (see 1.4-B
above), that weigh 20 pounds or less, and that have flexible
ductwork, piping, and conduit connections.
Powder-actuated fasteners (shot pins) shall not be used for component
anchorage in tension applications in Seismic Design Category D, E, or F.
MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROL
Section 230548 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.
Attachments and supports for mechanical equipment shall meet the
following provisions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Attachments and supports transferring seismic loads shall be
constructed of materials suitable for the application and designed
and constructed in accordance with a nationally recognized
structural code such as, when constructed of steel, AISC, Manual
of Steel Construction (Ref. 9.8-1 or 9.8-2).
Friction clips shall not be used for anchorage attachment.
Expansion anchors shall not be used for mechanical equipment
rated over 10 hp (7.45 kW). Exception: Undercut expansion
anchors.
Drilled and grouted-in-place anchors for tensile load applications
shall use either expansive cement or expansive epoxy grout.
Supports shall be specifically evaluated if weak-axis bending of
light-gauge support steel is relied on for the seismic load path.
Components mounted on vibration isolation systems shall have a
bumper restraint or snubber in each horizontal direction. The
design force shall be taken as 2Fp. The intent is to prevent
excessive movement and to avoid fracture of support springs and
any non-ductile components of the isolators.
Seismic supports shall be constructed so that support engagement
is maintained.
Piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Seismic braces for piping may be omitted when the distance from the top
of the pipe to the supporting structure is 12" or less.
A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building or
two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode
during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and a roof; solid concrete wall
and a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill.
Unbraced piping attached to in-line equipment shall be provided with
adequate flexibility to accommodate differential displacements.
At the interface of adjacent structures or portions of the same structure
that may move independently, utility lines shall be provided with adequate
flexibility to accommodate the anticipated differential movement between
the ground and the structure.
Provide large enough pipe sleeves through walls or floors to allow for
anticipated differential movements.
MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROL
Section 230548 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
C.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Ductwork:
1.
Seismic restraints are not required for HVAC ducts with importance factor
IP of 1.0, provided that either of the following conditions are met for the full
length of each duct run:
a.
b.
c.
HVAC ducts are suspended from rod hangers and hangers are 12
inches or less in length from the point rod attaches to duct, to the
point rod connects to the supporting structure. Rods must be
secured to both top and bottom cross angles with locking nuts
above and below angle iron.
HVAC ducts have a cross-sectional area of less than 6 square
feet.
This exception is not valid if the top of ductwork is not secured to
hanger rods to limit pendulum length to 12 inches.
END OF SECTION 230548
MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROL
Section 230548 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED WORK
A.
The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General
Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all
requirements of these Documents.
B.
Related work specified in other Sections:
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
Section 233300 - Ductwork and Accessories
Section 232113 – HVAC Piping & Specialties
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The work includes, but is not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Upon completion of the installation of all the plumbing, air, heating and
cooling water systems, all necessary adjustments shall be made to
provide capacities listed on the Drawings to properly balance these
systems.
Submittals and written reports as specified.
Testing requirements as described in Specification Section 230500,
paragraph 1.16.
Witness duct leakage test required by Specification Section 230500 –
Ductwork and Accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Work under this section shall be executed under the direct supervision of a
Registered Professional Engineer having an established professional office in the
State of Utah and having an experience record of not less than five (5) years in
the mechanical contracting industry, engaged in testing, balancing and adjusting
of air and hydronic mechanical systems for not less than two (2) years of that
time, or, under the direct supervision of a qualified testing, adjusting and
balancing supervisor, possessing certification from the National Environmental
Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or from the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
B.
Comply with the applicable procedures in the chapter on Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing in the latest ASHRAE Edition of the NEBB, AABC, and SMACNA Test
and Balance documents.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Section 230593 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
C.
Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's standards and recommendations, and calibration histories for
each instrument shall be available for examination.
D.
Accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with the applicable
measurement means as listed in the latest edition of NEBB, AABC, and SMACNA
Test and Balance documents.
E.
Allowable Tolerances:
1.
2.
F.
Tolerances of adjustment for air handling systems are plus or minus 5%
for supply systems at air devices and plus or minus 10% for return and
exhaust systems from figures shown on drawings.
Tolerances of adjustment for hydronic systems, are plus or minus 10% of
design conditions shown on drawings.
Final Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of all hydronic and air systems shall be
performed by an approved separate professional Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing subcontractor meeting the above Quality Assurance requirements.
Acceptable separate professional subcontractors meeting the above
requirements are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
BTC Services, Inc.
Certified Testing & Balancing, Inc.
Bonneville Test & Balance
RS Analysis, Inc.
Danis Test & Balance, Inc.
Independent Test & Balance, LLC
G.
Subcontractors not listed above must request prior approval in accordance with
Instructions to Bidders.
H.
Within 30 days after execution of the Owner-Contractor Agreement, transmit to
Architect/Engineer the name and qualifications of the organization proposed to
perform the services.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Procedure: Submit Qualifications, Documentation, Test Schedules and Reports
in accordance with the Division 1 of the Contract:
B.
Qualifications:
1.
Submit three copies of documentation to confirm compliance with Quality
Assurance provisions:
a.
b.
Organization supervisor and personnel training and qualifications.
Specimen copy of each of the report forms proposed for use.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Section 230593 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
C.
Preliminary Report: At least fifteen days prior to starting field work, submit three
copies of:
1.
A set of report forms filled out as to the design flow values and the
installed equipment pressure drops, and the required CFM for air
terminals.
2.
A complete list of instruments proposed to be used, organized in
appropriate categories, with data-sheets for each. Show:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
b.
c.
Discrepancies noted between measured data and Contract
Documents.
Additional, or more accurate, instruments required.
Requests for re-calibration of specific instruments.
Schedules:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Manufacturer and model number.
Description and use when needed to further identify the
instrument.
Size of capacity range.
Latest calibration date.
Architect/Engineer will review submittals for compliance with Contract
Documents, and will return one set marked to indicate:
a.
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Schedule tests to comply with project completion schedules.
Schedule testing and balancing of parts of the systems which are delayed
due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other conditions beyond control
of the Contractor, as early as the proper conditions will allow, after
consultation with Architect/Engineer.
Submit reports of delayed testing promptly after execution of those
services.
Final Report: At least fifteen days prior to Contractor's request for final
inspection, submit three copies of final reports, on applicable reporting forms, for
review. Submit a fourth copy directly to the Engineer. Each individual final
reporting form must bear the signature of the person who recorded data and that
of the NEBB or AABC certified supervisor of the reporting organization. Identify
instruments of all types which were used and last date of calibration of each.
Report shall include:
1.
2.
3.
A detailed letter to Engineer outlining all abnormal or notable conditions
not covered in above data specifically identifying all locations where
specified flow tolerances could not be met.
A set of reduced black and white or blue line prints with all air openings
clearly marked to correspond with data sheets and with thermometer
locations clearly marked.
Data sheets showing amount of air handled at each opening, instrument
used, velocity readings, and manufacturer free area factor.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Section 230593 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Data sheets giving log of room temperatures in rooms exhibiting
objectionable temperatures during the heating season. Logs shall be
taken when outside temperature is 30 deg.F or colder.
Data sheets giving log of room temperatures in rooms exhibiting
objectionable temperatures during the cooling season. Logs shall be
taken with full occupant load, full lighting, and maximum solar conditions.
Equipment data sheets giving make, size and model, of fans, starters and
motors with rated amps and service factors, and drives. Include pumps,
supply fans, exhaust and recirculating fans.
Operating data including fan RPM, inlet and outlet pressures, pressure
drop across filters, face and bypass dampers, and measured motor
current and voltage, BHP and CFM (total).
For variable volume air systems, include supply fan speed and
corresponding duct static pressure in balanced condition.
For variable volume hydronic systems, include pump speed and
corresponding differential pressure in balanced condition.
Final control set points for variable volume systems will be determined
from test and balance report and programmed by controls contractor.
Heating equipment operating data including air temperatures entering and
leaving heating coils (maximum air temperature rise), together with
corresponding air flow and air pressure drop, water temperature entering
and leaving heating coil, water flow and pressure drop through heating
coil.
Cooling equipment operating data including air temperatures entering and
leaving cooling coils together with corresponding air flow and air pressure
drop, water temperature entering and leaving cooling coil, and water flow
and pressure drop through cooling coil.
Equipment and operating data as required to show performance of
pumps, heat exchangers, domestic hot water circulating systems, heating,
ventilating, and air conditioning units, cabinet heaters, unit heaters, unit
ventilators, fans and temperature control devices.
Sound pressure levels showing readings in all 8 octave bands and plotted
on RC(II) charts shall be submitted for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
15.
1.5
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
All sides of Mechanical Rooms.
Lobbies, Labs, and Commercial Area.
Conference Rooms.
Spaces within 20 ft. of parking garage ventilation fan inlets and
outlets.
All spaces exhibiting abnormally high or annoying noise levels.
Domestic hot water recirculation data including flow at each branch shown
requiring specific flow, and at the pump.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
The following job conditions must be verified before any testing, adjusting or
balancing of the environmental systems begin:
1.
Installation of the designated system is complete and in full operation.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Section 230593 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
On hydronic systems, strainers shall be cleaned, temperature control
valve operation shall be checked, pump rotation shall be checked,
pressure reducing valves shall be adjusted, and other such conditions
requiring correction.
Air systems shall be checked for dirty filters, filter leakage, equipment
vibrations, damper operation, fan rotation, and other such conditions
requiring correction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
- NOT USED –
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROCEDURE
A.
Confirm that project conditions have been verified and that necessary corrections
have been made before proceeding with the Work.
B.
The Test and Balance Contractor must proportion air/water flows in the system
while introducing a minimum amount of resistance. All systems are to be
proportionally balanced.
C.
Hydronic Systems:
1.
D.
Using system flow meters and/or contact pyrometer, the balancing firm
shall adjust the quantity of water or glycol solution handled by each pump
and supplied to each coil, solar collector, heat exchanger, cooling tower,
and such other primary source equipment to meet design requirements,
and mark each balancing cock at final setting.
Air Systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The balancing firm shall adjust all dampers, diffusers, registers, belts and
sheaves for the delivery and distribution of air quantities shown in the
Contract Documents and shall mark each balancing device at final setting.
Adjust fan speeds and motor drives within drive limitations for required air
volume, provide new sheaves as necessary, or adjustable bands on
constant volume plenum fans, and notify Division 26 Contractor of any
thermal overloads that need to be changed/replaced.
Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including
individual filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan.
Make allowances for 0.25” w.c., equivalent to 50% loading of filters.
Exhaust and recirculation air systems shall be adjusted for air quantities
shown on Drawings.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust
dampers for design conditions.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Section 230593 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
E.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and
exhaust dampers to check leakage.
Measure building static pressure in both economizer mode and minimum
outside air mode, and adjust supply, return and exhaust air systems to
provide the required relationship between each to maintain approximately
0.05 inches water column positive static pressure at the Building Entries.
Distribution system shall be adjusted to obtain uniform space
temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.
Where multiple air diffusers are shown on one terminal box, adjust
dampers for the delivery and distribution of air quantities shown in the
Contract Documents.
Variable Air Volume System Powered Terminal Units: Set each volume
controller to CFM setting shown on drawings, confirm that each unit has
all control air connections properly made and confirm proper operation for
automatic variable air volume temperature control.
Set all VAV boxes at minimum/maximum air flow shown on drawings.
Adjust air flow switches for proper operation on all fan powered VAV
boxes.
Test Run: In order to determine that the system installation is complete
and will operate satisfactorily, make a test run with equipment operating
per normal temperature control schedule and sequence for a period of
seven days for each heating and cooling season. Contractor shall notify
Architect in writing when he is ready to begin test. Provide personnel to
run test and operate and adjust equipment as may be required during test
run. Keep a log for each day indicating all malfunctions that occurred and
corrections and adjustments made. Be responsible for operation of
equipment during this test.
Report: After all adjustments are made, a detailed report shall be
prepared by the balancing firm and submitted to the Architect for approval.
Owner reserves the right to spot check the report prior to final
acceptance.
Plumbing System
1.
Hot Water Recirculation Systems: Set flow at each balancing valve
shown. Record flow at each pump. Verify the proper installation of
automatic flow control valves.
END OF SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Section 230593 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 230700 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED WORK
A.
Requirements: Provide insulation in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B.
Related work specified in other Sections:
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Section 230540 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control
Section 224450 - Plumbing Equipment
Section 232113 - HVAC Piping & Specialties
Section 235700 - Heat Transfer
Section 233300 – Ductwork and Accessories
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The mechanical insulation work required by this Section shall include materials
and methods as described herein and on the Drawings and as required by
applicable energy codes.
B.
The work includes, but is not limited to providing insulation on the following:
1.
Plumbing Systems:
Domestic Hot Water-Supply and Recirculating Hot Water
Domestic Cold Water
Primary Roof Drain System (horizontal runs)
Overflow Roof Drain Bowls
Handicap Lavatory Piping
2.
Heating Systems:
Heating Water Supply and Return
Heat Exchangers, Converters and Air Separators
Steam Piping
Gravity Steam Condensate
Pumped Steam Condensate
Steam Condensate Receivers
3.
Chilling Systems:
Chilled Water Piping
Chilled Water Pump Bodies
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Section 230700 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
4.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Air Distribution Systems:
Exterior surfaces of all built-up air unit plenums
5.
Other Systems:
2-hour fire wrap where shown.
1.3
1.4
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications: The firm executing the work of this Section shall have at least 3
years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations
similar in scope and nature to that required for this Project.
B.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: All insulation shall be in accordance with
Jurisdicational Building Code and State and Federal Energy Conservation
Standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions
for each type of mechanical insulation in accordance with the Division 1 of the
Contract. Include schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness
and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
B.
Provide schedule of pipe sizes with insulation thickness at corresponding fluid
temperatures.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery of Materials: Deliver insulation, coverings, adhesives, and coatings to
site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard
ratings of products.
B.
Storage of Materials: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and
mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Section 230700 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Acceptable manufacturers of insulation materials shall be as follows:
Certain-teed
Owens-Corning
Johns Manville
Armstrong
Knauf
Dow Chemical
Unifrax (Fyrewrap)
MATERIALS
A.
Conductivity:
TYPE OF INSULATION
MAXIMUM THERMAL
CONDUCTIVITY/INCH
Calcium Silicate
Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation
Glass Fiber Rigid Equipment
Insulation
Glass Fiber Rigid Duct Insulation
Glass Fiber Blanket Duct Insulation
Ceramic Fiber Grease Duct Wrap
0.47 at 600 degrees Fahrenheit
0.25 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit
0.25 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit
0.24 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit
0.29 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit
0.25 at 70 degrees Fahrenheit
B.
Duct Board: Rigid glass fiber board with a minimum density of 1-1/2 pounds per
cubic foot, a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.24 at 75 deg.F and complying
with National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 90A.
C.
Duct Wrap: Blanket-type fiberglass insulation 1-1/2" thick, 0.75 pounds per cubic
foot density.
D.
2-Hour Fire-Rated Wrap: One and one-half inch thick ceramic fiber duct wrap
meeting ASTM E 119 F-rating-2 hrs and T-rating-2 hrs equal to FyreWrap EZ 1.5
Ventilation Air Duct Insulation System. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
E.
Grease Duct Wrap: High-temperature ceramic fiber blanket, foil/scrim
encapsulation, max-service temp. = 2300°F.
F.
Vapor Barrier Coatings: To have a perm rating not more than 0.25 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96, procedure A.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Section 230700 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.3
G.
Adhesives, Sealers, Facings and Vapor Barrier Coatings: To be compatible with
materials to which applied, and shall not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the
pipe or insulation materials in either the wet or dry state. Use only adhesives,
sealers, facings, and vapor barrier coatings as recommended by the
manufacturer of insulation materials.
H.
Chemicals for Treating Paper: Non-soluble.
I.
Non-Collapsing Inserts: Calcium Silicate or Polyisocyanurate (Dow Trymer
2000). No Polystyrene inserts are allowed.
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A.
Insulation and accessory materials to meet the following criteria:
1.
2.
2.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Insulation Materials: To be noncombustible as defined in National Fire
Protection Association Pamphlet 220 and to be Underwriter’s Laboratory
listed.
Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation
(insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with
flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or
less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.
HANDICAP LAVATORY INSULATION
A.
Insulation System: Molded closed cell insulation, 3/16-inch nominal wall
thickness; provide pre-molded fittings to completely cover tail piece, P-trap, trap
arm, hot and cold water supply stop valves and exposed supply tubing; include
nylon fasteners for all fittings.
B.
Handi Lav-Guard manufactured by Truebro; Trap Wrap manufactured by Brocar
Products; Zeston Snap-Trap manufactured by Johns Manville or approved equal.
C.
Install at all handicap accessible lavatories installed in this project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Testing of piping and ductwork to be completed prior to application of insulation.
B.
Apply insulation tightly over clean, dry surfaces with sections or edges firmly
butted together.
C.
Make insulation continuous through sleeves or openings in walls and floors.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Section 230700 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.2
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
D.
Run sealed vapor barriers continuous throughout all cold surface insulation
systems.
E.
Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier jackets. Seal all vapor barrier
penetrations with white vapor barrier sealant.
F.
Apply adhesives so as not to exceed the coverages recommended by the
manufacturers.
G.
Leave surfaces clean and ready for painting.
H.
Do not insulate cleanouts, access openings or identification plates. Neatly bevel
insulation and finishes up to the edges of such openings and stop with sheet
metal rings.
I.
Provide non-collapsing inserts between pipe and all shields/saddles on all
insulated piping 2-1/2" and larger.
SPECIFIC INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Minimum Pipe Insulation Schedule:
2006 International Energy Conservation Code
PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES*
Nominal Pipe Diameter
Fluid
≤ 1.5”
> 1.5”
> 10”
Steam
1.5
3.0
3.0
Hot Water
1.0
2.0
2.0
Chilled Water
1.0
1.5
2.0
*Based on insulation having a conductivity not exceeding 0.27 BTU per inch/h·ft2·°F.
Exceptions:
1.
2.
3.
Factory installed piping within HVAC equipment tested and rated in
accordance with 2006 IECC referenced procedures.
Piping that conveys fluids that have a design operating temperature range
between 55°F and 105°F, unless noted to be insulated on drawings or in
specifications.
Piping that conveys fluids that have not been heated or cooled through
the use of fossil fuels or electric power, unless noted to be insulated on
drawings or in specifications.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Section 230700 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
4.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Runout piping not exceeding 4 feet in length and 1 inch in diameter
between the control valve and HVAC coil.
DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION
Location
Min. Insulation Value
In unconditioned spaces (i.e.
R-5
ceiling spaces or unheated
spaces)
Outside building envelope
R-8
Exceptions:
a.
b.
B.
When located within equipment.
When design temperature difference between the interior and
exterior of the duct or plenum does not exceed 15°F (i.e. return air
ducts in ceiling spaces).
Plumbing System:
1.
Domestic Cold Water:
Horizontal piping and where freeze protection is required, one-half inch
thick fiberglass pipe covering with all service jacket self-seal lap.
All domestic cold (PEX) piping to be insulated to maintain fire/plenum
rating where used in air plenums.
2.
Roof Drains:
Horizontal mains and vertical from horizontal to and including drain bowls,
one-half inch thick fiberglass pipe covering with all service jacket self-seal
lap.
Overflow roof drain bowls shall be insulated but not overflow drain piping.
Vertical mains shall not be insulated.
3.
Domestic Hot and Circulating Water:
Insulate entire system.
Thicknesses per table of 230700-3.2, A.
4.
Fittings:
Premolded PVC fitting covers with Fiberglass insert. PVC covers shall be
rated for return air plenum use.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Section 230700 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
5.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Valves:
All systems: Oversized pipe covering of same material and thickness as
adjacent pipe covering. Finish with six-ounce canvas and heavy coat of
vapor barrier mastic coating.
C.
Heating System:
1.
Heating Water Supply and Return:
a.
b.
c.
Fiberglass pipe covering with all-service jacket and self-seal lap.
Thicknesses per Minimum Pipe Insulation Schedule in Section
230700-3.2, A.
Heat exchangers, convertors, air separators, storage tanks and
receivers:
251 deg. - 350 deg............... 3" thick
up to 250 deg.........U.......... 2" thick
Fiberglass pipe covering or Du-All pipe and tank wrap with all
service jacket. Finish with six-ounce canvas or fiberglass
reinforcing mesh applied with heavy coat of lagging adhesive
where subject to abuse.
2.
Steam Piping Systems:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Fittings:
a.
4.
Premolded PVC fitting covers with Fiberglass insert.
Valves:
a.
D.
Fiberglass covering with all-service jacket and self-seal lap.
Thicknesses per Minimum Pipe Insulation Schedule.
Steam Condensate: Thickness per Steam Piping System of
Section 230700- 3.2 A.
All systems: Oversized pipe covering of same material and
thickness as adjacent pipe covering. Finish with six-ounce canvas
or fiberglass reinforcing mesh and heavy coat of vapor barrier
mastic coating.
Chilling System:
1.
2.
3.
Fiberglass pipe covering with all service jacket self-seal lap.
Chilled Water Supply and Return: Thicknesses per Chilled Water Piping
System of Section 230700-3.2 A.
Fittings:All systems: Premolded PVC fitting covers with fiberglass insert.
Seal all fittings at end and throat.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Section 230700 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
4.
5.
E.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Valves: All systems: Oversized pipe covering of same material and
thickness as adjacent pipe covering. Finish with six-ounce canvas or
fiberglass reinforcing mesh and heavy coat of vapor barrier mastic
coating.
Chilled Water Pump Bodies: Chilled water pump bodies shall be insulated
with 1-inch thick flexible expanded elastomeric insulation, install to allow
for maintenance access to pump.
Air Distribution System:
1.
Exterior surfaces of built-up air unit plenums:
One and one-half inch thick fiberglass three pound board with all service
jacket. Seal all joints and pins with tape material to match jacket. Apply
material with weld pins or stick clips.
2.
Concealed supply ductwork not lined:
One and one-half inch thick 0.75 pound fiberglass duct wrap with foil
scrim facings. All joints sealed. Apply material with adhesive or wire 18
inches o.c.
F.
Other Systems:
1.
Protective Insulation Jacketing:
Provide high impact polyvinyl chloride pipe covering on insulated piping.
Thickness to be 30 mil. Install where noted on drawings and per
manufacturer's recommendations for hot and cold piping systems. Seal
using solvent welding adhesive, providing slip joints as required for
expansion and contraction. Ceel-Co Ceel-Tite 300 series, Schuller
Zeston 300 series, or approved equal.
2.
Grease Duct (Shaft Alternative):
One and one-half inch thick ceramic fiber duct wrap meeting ASTM E 119
performance standard from top of hood to roof/wall penetration. Apply in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide two layers of duct
wrap as alternative to rated shaft. Secure with 3/4" stainless steel
banding. Provide insulated covers at grease duct access doors and
cleanouts.
END OF SECTION 230700
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Section 230700 – Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 233300 - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Low pressure ductwork.
B.
Manufactured duct joints.
C.
Casings.
D.
Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork.
E.
Damper operator hardware.
F.
Volume control dampers.
G.
Combination fire and smoke dampers.
H.
Gravity backdraft dampers.
I.
Flexible duct fan connections.
J.
Access door hardware.
K.
Duct access doors.
L.
Air Flow measuring devices.
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED IN THIS SECTION
A.
1.3
Outside, return, and exhaust air dampers for supply fan/return fan systems under
per Section 230900.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General
Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all
requirements of these documents.
B.
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.4
1.5
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Material and Methods.
B.
Section 230540 - Mechanical, Sound and Vibration Control.
C.
Section 230700 - Mechanical Insulation.
D.
Section 230900 - Electronic Controls.
E.
Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
REFERENCES AND CODE REQUIREMENTS
A.
ASHRAE - Handbook 2001 Fundamentals; Chapter 34 - Duct Design.
B.
ASHRAE - Handbook 2004 HVAC Systems and Equipment; Chapter 16 - Duct
Construction.
C.
ASTM A90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel
Articles.
D.
ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip.
E.
ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
by the Hot-Dip Process.
F.
ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock
Forming Quality.
G.
ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
H.
ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber
Gaskets.
I.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
J.
NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
NFPA 92A - Smoke Control Systems.
NFPA 92B - Smoke Management Systems.
K.
NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and
Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment.
L.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
M.
SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.6
1.7
N.
UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
O.
UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
P.
UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.
UL 555S - Leakage Rated Dampers for Smoke Control Systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside
lining.
B.
Low Pressure: Design and Construct to SMACNA 2 in. w.g. pressure class. Low
pressure duct shall include: Supply duct downstream of VAV boxes, return duct,
general/toilet exhaust ducts, fresh air duct, relief duct, smoke exhaust duct and
combustion air duct, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.8
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Submit Shop Drawings for the following items under provision of The General
Conditions of the Contract:
1.
Shop fabricated assemblies including duct or plenum access doors.
2.
Duct fittings, particulars such as gauges, sizes, weld, and configuration
prior to start of work for low pressure kitchen hood exhaust systems.
Submit Product Data for the following items under provision of The General
Conditions of the Contract:
1.
2.
C.
Combination fire and smoke dampers.
Backdraft dampers.
Submit printed Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data for the following
items under provisions of Operating and Maintenance Data paragraph in Section
230500:
1.
Combination fire and smoke dampers.
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.9
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Contractor shall not fabricate or install any ductwork until he has assured himself
that the ductwork can be run as contemplated in cooperation with Contractors of
other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural and
Architectural Work.
B.
Contractor shall prepare 1/4" = 1'-0" scale shop drawings of all ductwork and
plenums within confines of mechanical rooms and vertical supply air shaft for
coordination with other trades.
C.
Provide any and all off-sets and fittings required to coordinate with field
conditions. The lack of coordination will not constitute a change in contract price.
The contract drawings are of a schematic nature only, exact duct routing and
field coordination is the responsibility of the Division 233300 Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Nonmetallic air ducts and connectors shall conform to UL 181 Class 0 or Class 1.
B.
Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming
quality, having G90 zinc coating each side in conformance with ASTM A90.
C.
Aluminum Ducts: ANSI/ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14.
Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.
D.
Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type <304> <316>.
E.
Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
F.
Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating
materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
G.
Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or all
thread.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A.
Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material,
gauges, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures specified or as indicated
on drawings.
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.3
2.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
B.
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of
duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used,
provide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes
of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
C.
Construct fittings with 45 degree wye or 90 degree wye with 45 degree entry.
D.
Round take-offs shall be plain spin collar fittings of 90 degrees unless indicated
otherwise on drawings.
E.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever
possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees;
convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees.
F.
Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and
structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts
maintaining original duct area.
G.
Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes <8> < > inch
and smaller with crimp in direction of airflow.
MANUFACTURED DUCT JOINTS
A.
Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries, Inc., TDF, MEZ Industries, Hercules.
B.
Transverse duct joints of medium pressure ductwork shall be made with the
Ductmate System components of standard catalog manufacture.
CASINGS
A.
Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards for 4-inwg pressure class of not less than 18 gauge panels, unless
otherwise indicated on drawings.
B.
At floor, rivet or bolt panels on 8 inch centers to angles.
C.
Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum
supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for
access to equipment for cleaning and inspection. Set plenum doors 6 to 12
inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in
closed position. Provide a 12” x 12” viewing panel in each door with center at 4’6” A.F.F.
D.
Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gauge back
facing in supply fan sections and elsewhere if indicated on drawings. Provide 22
gauge perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers.
Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb/cu. ft. minimum mineral wool
media, on inverted channels of 16 gauge.
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.5
2.6
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and
NFPA 96.
B.
Construct of 16 gauge carbon steel using continuous external welded joints.
DAMPER OPERATOR HARDWARE
A.
Manufacturers: Ventfabrics Ventlok Regulators, Metropolitan Air.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent product: Duro Dyne, Daniel.
C.
Regulators and End Bearings.
Damper shaft length:
12" or less - Ventlok #620 Regulator.
12" to 20" - Ventlok #635 Regulator and #607 Bearings.
Larger dampers - Ventlok #640 or #641 Regulator and #607 Bearings.
2.7
D.
Provide equivalent model elevated bases for insulated ducts.
E.
Provide remote damper control where any damper does not have permanent
access. System to include a locking worm drive gear, ¼” flexible steel shaft and a
concealed ceiling cap of 1”. Manufacturers: Young Regulator or submitted equal.
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and
as indicated.
B.
Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inch.
C.
Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade
sizes 6 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or
galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.
D.
Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On
multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze
bearings.
E.
Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade
dampers.
F.
On insulated ducts, mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets,
bases, or adapters.
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.8
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS FOR STATIC SYSTEMS
(All building supply and exhaust fans shut down upon fire and/or smoke alarm)
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
B.
Furnish and install at locations shown on plans, or as described in schedules,
combination fire/smoke dampers meeting or exceeding the following
specifications. Frame shall be a minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel formed
into a structural hat channel reinforced at corners for added strength. The blades
shall be airfoil shaped double skin construction with 14 gauge equivalent
thickness. Non-airfoil blade shapes are not allowed. Blade action shall be
opposed. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve turning in an extruded hole in
the frame. Galvanized or synthetic bearings are not be acceptable. Blade edge
seals shall be silicone rubber and galvanized steel mechanically locked into
blade edge and shall withstand a minimum of 450°F. Adhesive or clip fastened
seals are not acceptable. Jamb seals shall be non-corrosive stainless steel
flexible metal compression type.
C.
Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be classified 1-1/2 hour for use in fire
resistance ratings of less than 3 hours or 3 hour for use for fire resistance ratings
of 3 hours or more. They shall be in accordance with UL standard 555, and shall
further be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Leakage Rated Damper
for use in smoke control systems in accordance with the latest version of
UL555S, and bear a UL label attesting to the same. Damper manufacturer shall
have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper sizes covering all
dampers required by this specification. Testing and UL qualifying a single
damper size is not acceptable. The leakage rating under UL555S shall be
leakage Class I (4 cfm/sq. ft. at 1" w.g. and 8 cfm/sq. ft. at 4" w.g.). As part of the
UL qualification, dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to operate (to open
and close) under HVAC system operating conditions, with pressures of at least 4"
w.g. in the closed position, and up to 4,000 fpm air velocity in the open position.
D.
In addition to the leakage ratings already specified herein, the dampers and their
non-stall type actuators shall be qualified under UL555S to an elevated
temperature of 350°F. Appropriate 120v electric actuators shall be installed by
the damper manufacturer at time of damper fabrication. Stall type and
instantaneous close type actuators not acceptable. Damper and actuator shall
be supplied as a single entity meeting all applicable UL555 and UL555S
qualifications for both dampers and actuators. Manufacturer shall provide factory
assembled sleeve of at least 17" long (contractor to verify maximum
requirement). Factory supplied caulked sleeve shall be 20 gauge for dampers
through 84" wide and 18 gauge for dampers above 84" wide. 12" or 22" single
piece picture frame mounting angles shall be factory supplied and shipped on
each damper/sleeve assembly. Factory shall supply sleeves to accommodate
square, rectangular, round, or oval ducts.
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Meet UL-555S requirements.
Section 233300 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
E.
2.9
2.10
2.11
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be equipped with a controlled 7 to 15
second heat-actuated release device. The electric EFL shall close and lock the
fire/smoke damper during test, smoke detection, power failure or fire conditions
through actuator closure springs. To prevent duct and HVAC component
damage, the damper shall at all times be connected to the actuator for controlled
closure in not less than 7 seconds and no more than 15 seconds. Instantaneous
damper closure is unacceptable. Damper shall be manually resettable after
activation by heat and after exposure to high temperature or fire, the damper
must be inspected prior to reset to ensure proper operation. Release
temperatures are 165°F. 1-1/2 hour dampers shall be Ruskin model FSD60 or
equivalent and 3 hour dampers shall be Ruskin model FSD60-3 or equivalent.
GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPERS (LOW VELOCITY COUNTERBALANCE TYPE)
(< 2.0” w.c.)
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Balance, American Warming, Arrow United (Type
655), Louvers and Dampers Inc., Prefco, Ruskin (CBD4 or CBD6), C.E. Sparrow,
Airstream, Greenheck, Pottorff.
B.
Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air
moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard
construction.
C.
Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of 16
gauge galvanized steel or extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch
width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner
with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment
device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
FLEXIBLE DUCT FAN CONNECTIONS
A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and
as indicated.
B.
Indoor: UL listed fire-resistant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA
90A, minimum density 30 oz. per sq. yd., minimum 4-inch wide, crimped into
metal edging strip.
C.
Outdoor: UL listed hypalon coated woven glass fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum
density 24 oz. per sq. yd., minimum 4-inch wide, crimped into metal edging strip.
D.
Leaded vinyl sheet, minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs, per sq. ft., 10 dB
attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range.
ACCESS DOOR HARDWARE
A.
Manufacturer: Ventfabrics Ventlok Series
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent product: Duro Dyne.
C.
Latches, hinges and gasketing:
Doors less than 4 square feet - Series 100.
Doors 4 to 8 square feet - Series 200.
Larger doors and in medium pressure systems - Series 300.
2.12
2.13
DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards as
indicated.
B.
Review locations prior to fabrication.
C.
Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets
and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one
inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.
D.
Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.
E.
Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three
hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up
to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.
F.
Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
AIRFLOW MEASURING DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers: Cambridge Air Sentinel, Air Monitor Corp, Ruskin.
B.
Each airflow measuring station shall measure airflow by the pitot tube traverse
method. Each unit shall consist of a network of static and total pressure sensors
factory positioned and connected in parallel to produce an equalized velocity
pressure. The measured velocity pressure converted to air flow (cfm) shall have
an accuracy within 2% of the full scale throughout the velocity range from 700 to
4000 fpm.
C.
Each airflow measuring station shall consist of 16 gauge sheet metal casing, an
aluminum air velocity treatment and air straightening section with an open face
area of not less than 97%, and a total and static pressure copper sensing
manifold. Each station shall contain non-combustible sensors which shall be
incapable of producing toxic gases or fumes in the event of elevated duct
temperatures. All interconnecting tubing shall be internal to the unit with the
exception of one total pressure and one static pressure meter connection.
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL SHEET METAL INSTALLATION
A.
Duct sizes fall within the limiting dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Provide
sheet metal duct systems, connections, dampers, duct turns, housings, hinged
sheet metal doors and necessary removable access doors for the complete
supply, return, and exhaust systems. Install accessories in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Seal low and medium pressure ductwork per IECC and SMACNA HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual to Seal Class A. This includes all joints, seams and wall
penetrations.
C.
Wherever exposed ducts pass through walls, floors, or ceilings, a 2-inch flanged
sheet-metal collar fitting close around ducts to be slipped along duct until flange
is tight against finished surface covering edges of openings and presenting a
neat appearance. Lock collar to duct.
D.
Wherever ducts penetrate floors or fire walls, install safing insulation to maintain
fire wall integrity.
E.
Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches,
neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. Permanent
test holes shall be factory fabricated, airtight flanged fittings with screw cap.
Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
F.
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers
and controllers.
G.
During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene
on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
H.
Where Bellmouth fittings are specifically called for on Drawings, provide standard
Bellmouth fittings per SMACNA Standards.
I.
Conduct a leakage test, per Chapter 9 of the 2006 IBC, on smoke management
system ducts to 1.5 times the design pressure. Total leakage shall not exceed
5% of design flow.
J.
Wherever dampers are concealed under insulation, provide marker ribbon for
identification. Hang ribbon below adjacent ductwork to allow view from any angle.
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 10
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.2
SEALING OF DUCTWORK
A.
Seal all ductwork to Seal Class A per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards and the most current edition of the International Energy Conservation
Code (IECC). Round runouts to VAV boxes need not be tested but require
sealing to Seal Class A when installed. Additional sealing of these runouts will
be required if audible air leaks are observed by the Engineer. Where joints are
not accessible for proper sealing, cut hand holes in duct and seal the joints from
the inside.
B.
Conduct a complete duct leakage test as outlined in the most current edition of
the SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Unless specifically noted
otherwise on Drawings, testing for medium pressure ductwork upstream of VAV
boxes <(or Lab valves) and downstream (between valve and exhaust fan) of VAV
Lab exhaust valves> is defined as Leakage Class 6 for rectangular ductwork and
Leakage Class 3 for round or oval ductwork. Low pressure supply air ductwork
downstream of VAV boxes <(or general exhaust air to Lab valves)> and return air
or general exhaust air ductwork is defined as Leakage Class 24 for rectangular
ductwork and Leakage Class 12 for round or oval ductwork.
Total leakage of each duct system not to exceed recommendations in SMACNA
Air Duct Leakage Test Manual per Leakage Classifications defined above.
Contractor shall leak test a minimum of 15% of the medium pressure ductwork.
If leakage rate exceeds maximum allowed, reseal ductwork until measured
system leakage rate is less than the maximum allowable leakage rate.
C.
3.3
MANUFACTURED DUCT JOINTS
A.
3.4
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
The installation of the manufactured duct joints shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instruction and installation manuals. Apply multiple
thicknesses of butyl gasket material at each corner of rectangular duct joints to
assure air tightness.
KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
A.
Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with
provisions for cleanout. Use stainless steel for ductwork exposed to view and
stainless steel or carbon steel for ducts where concealed. Provide cleanouts and
slope per code requirements.
B.
Seal stainless steel dishwasher exhaust ductwork watertight and slope back to
dishwasher hood.
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 11
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.5
DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
AIR SYSTEM
Low Pressure Supply (Heating
Systems)
Low Pressure Supply (System with
cooling coils)
Return and Relief
General Exhaust
Kitchen Hood Exhaust
Dishwasher Exhaust
Shower and Locker Room Exhaust
Outside Air Intake
3.6
3.7
3.9
MATERIAL
Galv. Steel, Aluminum
Galv. Steel, Aluminum
Galv. Steel, Aluminum
Galv. Steel, Aluminum
Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Galv. Steel, Aluminum
Galv. Steel
DAMPER OPERATOR HARDWARE
A.
Install per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Coordinate any
ceiling control locations prior to installation.
B.
Coordinate length of flexible shaft on site.
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
3.8
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust
systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air
balancing.
FIRE DAMPERS, SMOKE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS
A.
Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers or smoke dampers at
locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components.
Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct
connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges per
manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Demonstrate re-setting of fire/smoke dampers and/or smoke dampers to
authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative.
GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPERS (LOW PRESSURE SYSTEMS)
A.
Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside
of building and where indicated.
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 12
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
3.10
3.11
3.12
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide counter-balanced gravity backdraft dampers in return air duct sections
from CRAC units to ceiling plenums to prevent air bypass from raised floor to
ceiling space when CRAC unit fan is “off”.
FLEXIBLE DUCT FAN CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts
associated with fans and motorized equipment.
B.
At least 1-inch slack shall be allowed in these connections to insure that no
vibration is transmitted from fan to duct work. The fabric shall either be folded in
with the metal or attached with metal collar frames at each end to prevent air
leakage.
DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A.
Provide duct access doors for inspection, maintenance and cleaning at all
automatic dampers, flow station, humidifiers, fire and smoke dampers and before
and after all booster coils.
B.
Provide maximum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 24 x 24 inch size for shoulder
access and as indicated.
AIRFLOW MEASURING DEVICES
A.
Provide airflow measuring devices where indicated in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Coordinate control connections with Contractor for Section 230900 - Electronic
Controls.
END OF SECTION 233300
DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
Section 233300 – Page 13
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 233713 - AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Diffusers.
B.
Registers.
C.
Grilles.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General
Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all
requirements of these documents.
B.
Section 230500- Basic Mechanical Requirements.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Painting of ductwork
visible behind outlets and inlets.
B.
Section 233300 - Ductwork and Accessories.
C.
Section 233600 - Air Terminal Units.
D.
Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
REFERENCES
A.
AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
B.
ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
C.
ARI 890-91 - Rating of Air Diffusers.
D.
ASHRAE 70 - Methods of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets
and Inlets.
E.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard.
AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
Section 233713 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
F.
1.5
1.6
ASTM C 636 – Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE
70 and ARI 890.
B.
Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.7
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Product Data for the following items under provision of The General
Conditions of the Contract:
1.
A.
Diffusers.
Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application,
and noise level.
1.
Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of
mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and
inlets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CEILING DIFFUSERS (SEE AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE ON PLANS)
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Titus, Anemostat, Barber Colman, Krueger, Carnes,
Metal-Aire, Nailor-Hart, Tempo, Air Diffusion Products, Tuttle & Bailey, TurboX,
Price, Hart & Cooley.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
Section 233713 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Install ceiling mounted items in accordance with ASTM C 636.
1.
2.
3.
Ceiling mounted air terminals or services weighing less than 20 pounds
shall be positively attached to the ceiling suspension main runners or to
cross runners with the same carrying capacity as the main runners.
Terminals or services weighing 20 pounds but not more than 56 pounds,
in addition to the above, shall have two No. 12 gauge hangers connected
from the terminal or service to the ceiling system hangers or to the
structure above. These wires may be slack.
Terminals or services weighing more than 56 pounds shall be supported
directly from the structure above by approved hangers.
C.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position
to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
D.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers,
regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and
register assembly.
E.
Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
F.
Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
G.
Install duct connections to fire rated UL Listed and Labeled diffusers and return
grilles in strict accordance with instructions furnished by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 233713
AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
Section 233713 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 260001 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and other applicable documents also apply to
work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.2
A.
The contract documents indicate the extent of electrical work. Provide all labor,
materials, equipment, supervision and service necessary for a complete electrical
system as described in divisions 26, 27, and 28.
RELATED SECTIONS:
1.3
A.
Other Divisions relating to electrical work apply to the work of this section. See other
applicable Divisions including, but not necessarily limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Division 1 – General and Supplementary Conditions
Division 2 – Existing Conditions
Division 3 – Concrete
Division 5 – Metals
Division 6 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites
Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection
Division 8 – Openings
Division 9 – Finishes
Division 21 – Fire Suppression
Division 22 – Plumbing
Division 23 – Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Division 27 – Communications
Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security
Division 31 – Earthwork
Division 32 – Exterior Improvements
Division 33 – Utilities
INTERPRETATIONS OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
1.4
A.
Prior to bidding the job, submit requests for clarification in writing to the
Architect/Engineer prior to issuance of the final addendum.
B.
After signing the contract, provide all materials, labor, and equipment to meet the
intent, purpose, and function of the contract documents.
C.
The following terms used in Division 26, 27, and 28 documents are defined as follows:
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 260001 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
"Provide" - Means furnish, install, and connect, unless otherwise indicated.
"Furnish" - Means purchase new and deliver in operating order to project site.
"Install" - Means to physically install the items in-place.
"Connect" - Means make final electrical connections for a complete operating
piece of equipment. This includes providing conduit, wire, terminations, etc. as
applicable.
"Or Equivalent" - Means to provide equivalent equipment. Such equipment must
be approved by the Engineer prior to bidding.
EXAMINATION OF SITE:
1.5
A.
Visit the site and verify existing field conditions prior to submitting bid.
B.
All costs arising from site conditions and/or preparation shall be included in the base
bid. No additional charges will be allowed due to inadequate site inspection.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.6
A.
Perform work in accordance with all governing codes, rules, and regulations including
the following minimum codes (latest editions or as otherwise accepted by the
Authorities Having Jurisdiction):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
National Electric Code (NEC)
International Building Code (IBC)
International Fire Code (IFC)
International Mechanical Code (IMC)
International Plumbing Code (IPC)
American Disability Act (ADA)
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
Local Codes and Ordinances
Comply with all standards where applicable for equipment and materials including the
following minimum standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
American Society for testing Materials (ASTM)
Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM)
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
National Electrical Manufacturer's Institute (NEMA)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
American Institute of Electrical Engineer's Electrical Power
Systems and Grounding in Commercial Construction
Illuminating Engineers Society (IES)
C.
Provide new electrical equipment conforming to all requirements as set forth in the
above standards. Provide UL labeled equipment where such label is applicable.
D.
Comply with all state and local codes and ordinances. When conflicts occur among
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 260001 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
codes, standards, drawings, and/or specifications, the most stringent requirements
shall govern.
E.
Obtain all permits, inspections, etc. required by authority having jurisdiction. Include all
fees in bid. Provide a certificate of approval to the owner's representative from the
inspection authority at completion of the work.
F.
Provide only first-class workmanship from competent workers, conforming to the best
electrical construction practices.
G.
The contractor shall have a current state contracting license applicable to type of work
to be performed under this contract.
SUBMITTALS:
1.7
A.
The contractor shall submit complete shop drawings and other required submittals.
Incomplete submittals will be returned to the contractor unreviewed. No time
extensions or cost increases will be allowed for delays caused by the return of
incomplete submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: After the contract is awarded, but prior to manufacture or installation
of any equipment, submit eight (8) complete sets of shop drawings. Partially complete
sets of shop drawings are not acceptable. Submit all shop drawings in one complete
submittal package. Prior to submitting shop drawings, review and certify that they are
in compliance with the contract documents; Sign all approved shop drawings. Allow a
minimum of two weeks for architect/engineer to review shop drawings. Refer to
architectural general provision section for additional requirements.
C.
Provide equipment catalog “cut sheets”, brochures and/or drawings which clearly
describe the proposed equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, isometrics, and
detailed engineering and dimensional information as applicable including equipment
room layouts. Electrical room layouts are required to show all electrical equipment
locations for all projects that include electrical rooms. Do not submit catalog sheets
which describe several different items in addition to those items to be used, unless all
relevant information is clearly identified. Bind each information set in three ring binder
or binders of sufficient size or sizes to enclose all information. Organize all information
by section. Provide separate tabbed covers for each section of Divisions 26, 27, and
28, indicating section number for each section requiring submittals.
D.
Include on front cover of binder or binders the name and location of the project,
architect, electrical engineer, general contractor, electrical contractor, subcontractors,
supplier/vendor, order number, volume, date, and any other applicable information.
Certify that shop drawings are submitted in accordance with the contract documents
with a written statement indicating compliance. Submittals will be reviewed and
comments produced two times maximum. Additional reviews will be billed at current
rates.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
1.8
A.
Submit four (4) complete sets of operating instruction and maintenance manuals for all
equipment and materials provided under Divisions 26, 27, and 28.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 260001 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions,
cleaning and servicing requirements, serial and model number of each piece of
equipment, complete list of replacement parts, performance curves and data, wiring
diagrams, warranties, and vendor's name, address, and phone numbers. Do not
submit information which describes several different items in addition to those items to
be used, unless all relevant information is clearly identified. Assemble all data in
completely indexed volume or volumes. Engrave the job title, and name, address, and
phone numbers of the contractor on the front cover and on the spine. Incomplete O&M
manuals will be returned to the contractor for corrections / additions.
RECORD DRAWINGS:
1.9
A.
Maintain on a daily basis a complete set of "Red-Lined Drawings", reflecting an
accurate record of all work including addendums, revisions, and changes. Indicate
precise dimensioned locations of all concealed work and equipment, including
concealed or embedded conduit, junction boxes, etc. Record all "Red-Lined Drawing"
information on a set of full sized prints of the contract drawings.
B.
Certify the "Red Lined Drawings" for correctness. Indicate on each drawing the name
of the general and electrical contractors with signatures of each representative
responsible for the work.
C.
The electrical engineering design firm will create record (as-built) drawings from the
certified red-lined drawings; however, the general and electrical contractors retain the
responsibility for the accuracy of the record drawings.
1.10
WARRANTY:
A.
Ensure that the electrical system installed under this contract is in proper working order
and in compliance with drawings, specifications, and/or authorized changes and is free
from electrical defects. Without additional charge, replace or repair, to satisfaction of
the owner's representative, except from ordinary wear and tear, any part of the
installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1)
year after final acceptance or as otherwise indicated in individual sections, but in no
case less than one year. Warranty incandescent and fluorescent lamps only for a
period of two months from the date of substantial completion.
B.
Provide complete warranty information for each item including beginning of warranty
period, duration of warranty, names, addresses, and telephone numbers and
procedures for filling a claim and obtaining warranty services. Written warranties and
guarantees are to be submitted separately as:
1.
2.
Originals bound in a binder clearly identified with the title, “WARRANTIES AND
GUARANTEES,” the project name, the project number, and the Contractor’s
business name.
Electronic documents in *.pdf format.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 260001 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
GENERAL:
2.1
A.
All materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trade name, and
the approved testing laboratory such as the UL label in every case where a standard
has been established for that particular material. Used materials are acceptable only if
specifically indicated on drawings.
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS:
2.2
A.
Provide only specified products or products approved by addendum. Substitutions will
be considered if two copies of the proposal is received at the architect's/engineer's
office eight (8) working days prior to the bid day. Include in the proposal the specified
and proposed catalog numbers of the equipment under consideration and a catalog cut
sheet(s) with pictorial and descriptive information. Certify that the equipment proposed
is equal to that specified, that it has the same electrical and physical characteristics,
compatible dimensions, and meets the functional intent of the contract documents.
B.
It is the responsibility of the contractor to make all substituted equipment comply with
the intent of the contract documents and bear all cost associated with conflicts arising
form the use of substituted equipment.
C.
Provide samples if so required by the architect or engineer before or after bid day.
SPARE PARTS:
2.3
A.
Provide spare parts as specified in Divisions 26, 27, and 28 sections. Deliver all spare
parts to owner's representative prior to substantial completion.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
GENERAL:
3.1
A.
Workmanship: Provide only first class workmanship from competent workers.
Defective materials or workmanship will not be allowed on the project. Provide
competent supervision for the work to be accomplished. Keep same foreman on the
job, unless a change is authorized by the engineer.
B.
Coordination: Prior to construction, layout electrical work and coordinate work with
other trades. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installation of materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the work. Coordinate the installation of required
supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other
structural components, as they are constructed. Install electrical equipment to facilitate
maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. Coordinate the
installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension
system, mechanical equipment and systems, and structural components. Coordinate
with all utilities including power, communication, and data installations.
C.
Provide cutting, drilling, channeling, etc. only as necessary for proper completion of the
work. Do not cut structural members unless authorization is issued in writing by the
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 260001 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
architect/engineer.
D.
Repairs: Repair damage to building, grounds, or utilities as a result of work under this
contract at no additional cost to the owner.
E.
Dimensioning: Electrical drawings indicate locations for electrical equipment only in
their approximate location, unless specifically dimensioned. Do not scale electrical
drawings for dimensional information. Refer to architectural drawings and shop
drawings where applicable for locations of all electrical equipment. Field verify all
dimension on the job site.
F.
Provide block-outs, sleeves, demolition work, etc., required for installation of work
specified in this division.
G.
Standards: Provide electrical installation in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's
"Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that products fulfill requirements.
H.
All workmen doing work of any nature on State of Utah projects must at all times carry
their electrician's license with them and show it upon request. The acceptable ratio of
apprentice to journeyman electricians on the job is 1:1.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION:
3.2
A.
When it is clearly apparent that information is not adequately described in the
construction documents or when a coordination problem exists, submit a request for
information (RFI) through proper contractual channels. The electrical engineering
design firm will provide a response through its contractual channel. Although verbal
direction may be given to expedite changes, responses are not considered part of the
contract documents until a change order has been issued and signed by the Owner or
his designated representative. The Contractor shall bear all costs associated with
proceeding on any change order that has not been approved by the Owner or his
designated representative.
B.
Any damages caused by construction delays due to frivolous RFI’s, will be born solely
by the Contractor.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS:
3.3
A.
Provide all necessary guards or construction barriers and take all necessary
precautions to insure the safety of life and property.
CLEAN:
3.4
A.
Clean up all equipment, conduit, fittings, wire, packing cartons, plastic, and other debris
that is a direct result of the installation of the work of this division, both during the
execution, and at the conclusion, of the project. Keep the site clean and safe during
the progress of the work. Clean fixtures, interior and exterior of all equipment, and
raceways prior to final acceptance. Vacuum interior of all electrical panels and
equipment. Correct any damaged equipment. Touch-up or repaint if necessary.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 260001 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
TEMPORARY POWER:
3.5
A.
Make arrangements with the proper institution authority for all temporary electricity.
B.
Provide temporary power, complete with metering and wiring for lighting and power
outlets for construction tools and equipment. Report the initial meter reading to the
owner/institution, or otherwise as may be directed.
C.
Service shall be provided with a main disconnect and all 20 ampere receptacles
protected by 20 amp GFI, single-pole breakers. No attempt is made herein to specify
construction power requirements for equipment in detail. Provide all electrical
equipment and wiring as required.
D.
As soon as permanent power and metering is available, the temporary power supply
shall be disconnected and removed from the project site.
E.
All temporary wiring shall meet the requirements of NEC Article 305 and the State
Industrial Commission.
POWER OUTAGES:
3.6
A.
All power outages required for execution of this work shall occur during non-standard
working hours and at the convenience of the owner. Any electrical service interruption
will be coordinated at least 7 days in advance of the power shut-off. Include all costs
for overtime work in bid. Coordinate all outages and proceed only after receiving
authorization from the owner's representative. Keep all outages to an absolute
minimum.
STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS:
3.7
A.
Provide storage space for storage of materials and apparatus and assume complete
responsibility for all losses due to any cause whatsoever. Lost or damaged materials
will be replaced at no additional cost to owner. Do not store materials and apparatus in
any public thoroughfare or in any area on the site where such storage would constitute
a hazard to persons in the vicinity. Protect completed work, work underway, and
apparatus against loss or damage.
EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK:
3.8
A.
Verification: Prior to excavating, locate and protect existing utilities and other
underground work in a manner which will ensure that no damage or service interruption
will result from excavating and backfilling. Observe all State and Local codes prior to
excavating. Do not disturb walls, footings, and other structural members in any way.
B.
Protection: Provide barricades, warning signs, and illumination to protect persons
from injury at excavations. Provide temporary coverings and heat as necessary to
protect bottoms of excavations from freezing and frost action. Do not install electrical
work on frozen excavation bases or subbases.
C.
Coordination: Do not excavate for electrical work until the work is ready to proceed
without delay.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 260001 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
D.
Excavated Materials: Temporarily store excavated materials near excavation in
manner which will not interfere with or damage excavation or other work. Dispose of
and remove excavated materials which are either in excess of quantity needed for
backfilling or do not comply with the requirements for backfill material.
E.
Burial Depths: Burial depths must comply with NEC Section 300-5 (or State of Utah
requirements, whichever is more stringent), unless noted otherwise on drawings.
F.
Excavation Permits: Obtain all shut-down and excavation permits as may be required
for proper completion of the work.
BACKFILL MATERIALS:
3.9
A.
For buried conduits or cables (other than below slab-on-grade, or concrete-encased),
provide 2" thickness of well-graded sand on all sides of conduits or cables.
B.
For trench backfill to within 6" of final grade, provide soil material suitable for
compacting to required densities.
C.
For top 6" of excavation, provide top soil.
D.
Backfill excavations in 8" high courses of backfill material, uniformly compacted to the
following densities (percent of maximum density, ASTM D 1557), using power-driven
hand-operated compaction equipment:
1.
2.
E.
3.10
A.
3.11
Lawn/Landscaped Areas: 85 percent for cohesive soils, 95 percent for
cohesionless soils.
Paved Areas, other than roadways: 90 percent for cohesive soils, 95 percent for
cohesionless soils.
Where subsidence is observable at electrical work excavations during project warranty
period, remove surface, add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment.
Restore surface to original condition.
ROOF PENETRATIONS:
Where raceways and/or cables penetrate roofing, provide 26 gauge galvanized iron
roof jack, sized to fit tightly to raceway and/or cable for weather-tight seal, and with
flange extending a minimum of 9" under roofing on all sides. Seal opening between
raceway and roof jack with approved sealant. Coordinate all work with division 7.
FIRE PENETRATION SEALS:
A.
Seal all raceway and/or cable penetrations through fire-rated floors, wall, and ceilings
to prevent the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration either
before, during or after fire. Provide penetration sealants and fittings of ratings to
match the rating of the penetrated materials so that the original fire rating of the floor or
wall is maintained as required by Article 300-21 of the NEC.
B.
Sealant Systems: Provide sealants, wall wraps, partitions, caps, and other
accessories complying with UL 1479 (ASTM E-814) from the following where
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 260001 – Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3M Fire Barrier Sealing Penetration System
Chase Foam Fire Stop System
Thomas and Betts Flame Safe Fire Stop System
Nelson Fire Stop Products
C.
Fittings: Where applicable, provide OZ Type CFSF/I and CAFSF/I fire seal fittings for
conduit and cable penetrations through concrete and masonry wall, floor, slabs, and
similar structures.
D.
Install sealants and fittings in accordance with all manufacturer's written instructions.
3.12
A.
LABELING:
Engraved black plastic laminated, with white-core labels, 1/16" thick, shall be
permanently attached on both the interior and exterior the following electrical
equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
3.13
A.
The labels shall have 1/4" high, engraved letters, such as EF-1, AC-1, Panel A, etc.
CONCRETE BASES:
Housekeeping Pads: Unless otherwise noted, provide 4" high reinforced concrete
bases for all floor-mounted or floor-standing electrical equipment, including but not
necessarily limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Branch panels
Switchgear
Disconnect switches
Motor starter and controls junction boxes (power and auxiliary)
Push buttons
Thermal switches
Time switches
Motor control centers
Transformer
Similar equipment.
Lighting contactors and associated switches
Junction boxes larger than 4x4x1/2.
Transformers
Switchgear
Motor control centers
Generators
Battery racks
Similar Equipment
Extend bases 6" beyond equipment or mounting rails on all sides or as shown on the
drawings. Not withstanding this requirement, coordinate with equipment
manufacturer, shop drawings, and height of base to ensure compliance with NEC 38082.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 260001 – Page 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
C.
Concrete bases: Refer to Section 260551 – Exterior Area Lighting.
D.
Transformer Pads: Provide and locate properly sized concrete pads for power
company furnished pad mounted transformers in accordance with power company
clearance requirements.
3.14
A.
3.15
TESTS:
Notify engineer prior to all testing specified herein at least three business days prior to
testing. Engineer shall observe all tests to insure the proper operation of the electrical
system.
PROJECT FINALIZATION AND START-UP:
A.
Upon completion of the work, have each factory representative and/or subcontractor
assist in start-up and testing of their respective systems.
B.
Have each representative give personal instructions on operating and maintenance of
their equipment to the owner's maintenance and/or operation personnel.
C.
Have representatives certify each system with a written statement indicating that they
have performed start-up and final check out of their respective systems.
3.16
A.
FINAL REVIEW:
Have the project foreman accompany their reviewing parties and remove coverplates,
panel covers, access panels, etc. as requested, to allow review of the entire electrical
system.
END OF SECTION 260001
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 260001 – Page 10
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 260070 – ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division
26, 27, and 28 sections making reference to electrical connections.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY:
Extent of electrical connections for equipment include all final electrical connections for
all equipment having electrical requirements including, but not necessarily limited to the
following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Equipment specified under all divisions of the contract. Refer to other divisions
for specific electrical requirements.
Owner-furnished equipment
Kitchen Equipment
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 – Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
B.
SHOP DRAWINGS: Not required.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GENERAL:
Provide all materials for electrical connections including, but not necessarily limited to
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Raceways
Fittings
Conductors
Cords
Cord caps
Wiring devices
Pressure connectors
Lugs (CU-AL)
Electrical insulating tape
Heat-shrinkable tubing
Cable ties
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
Section 260070 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
12.
13.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Wire nuts
Other items and accessories as required.
B.
Crimp on or slip-on type splicing materials designed to be used without wire stripping
are not acceptable.
C.
Power Distribution Blocks: Provide Square D Type LB or Equivalent.
D.
Refer to other Division 26, 27, and 28 Sections for specification of electrical materials
as applicable.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
GENERAL:
Make electrical connections in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's "Standards of
Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products fulfill requirements.
CONNECTIONS:
Permanently Installed Fixed Equipment:
1.
2.
B.
Install conductors in flexible conduit from junction box to equipment control panel
or connection point.
Where such installations are subject to moisture, install in liquid-tight flexible
conduit.
Movable equipment:
1.
Provide wiring devices, cord caps, and multi-conductor cables as required.
C.
Other methods as required by the NEC and/or as required by special equipment or
field conditions.
D.
Power Distribution Blocks: Unless noted otherwise on drawings, provide power
distribution blocks only for tapping of feeders and branch circuits. Locate in junction
box or gutter in NEMA ratings to suit application.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS:
Obtain manufacturer's instruction and wiring diagram regarding electrical connections
of each piece of equipment and provide connections in accordance therewith.
VERIFICATION OF LOAD CHARACTERISTICS:
Verify electrical load characteristics of all equipment prior to rough-in. Review
respective shop drawings of all other Divisions and Owner's equipment manuals.
Report any variances from electrical characteristics noted in the contract documents to
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
Section 260070 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
the Architect/Engineer prior to rough-in.
B.
Value of rough-in work, electrical equipment, etc. installed and/or purchased by the
contractor not meeting equipment requirements shall be credited back to the owner.
END OF SECTION 260070
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
Section 260070 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 260072 – ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY:
1.2
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Seismic restraints for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
DEFINITIONS:
1.3
A.
IBC: International Building Code.
B.
Seismic Restraint: A structural support element such as a metal framing member, a
cable, an anchor bolt or stud, a fastening device, or an assembly of these items used
to transmit seismic forces from an item of equipment or system to building structure
and to limit movement of item during a seismic event.
SUBMITTALS:
1.4
A.
Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and
finish for each type and size of electrical support and seismic-restraint component
used.
1.
2.
B.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with
requirements.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including
attachment and anchorage devices, signed and sealed by a qualified professional
engineer. Include the following:
1.
2.
Fabricated Supports: Representations of field-fabricated supports not detailed
on Drawings.
Seismic Restraints: Detail anchorage and bracing not defined by details or
charts on Drawings. Include the following:
a.
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic
restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b.
Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Section 260072 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
c.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their
strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the
structure during seismic events.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items
and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C.
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical
components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports
and seismic restraints.
D.
Welding certificates.
E.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
F.
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.5
A.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this
Section are more stringent.
B.
Testing of Seismic Anchorage Devices: Comply with testing requirements in Part 3.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS:
2.1
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS:
2.2
A.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five
times the applied force.
B.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-3, factory-fabricated components
for field assembly.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Section 260072 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ERICO International Corporation.
Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit.
GS Metals Corp.
Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
National Pipe Hanger Corp.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Wesanco, Inc.
Finishes:
a.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied
according to MFMA-3.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading and applicable seismic
forces.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
C.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1.
D.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,
designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical
conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of
conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.
Body shall be malleable iron.
F.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel
plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical
items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify suitability of fasteners in subparagraph below for use in lightweight
concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Available Manufacturers:
1)
Hilti, Inc.
2)
ITW Construction Products.
3)
MKT Fastening, LLC.
4)
Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Inc.
In the following subparagraph, use stainless steel anchors in corrosive
environments.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
Available Manufacturers:
1)
Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries.
2)
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc
3)
Hilti, Inc.
4)
ITW Construction Products.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Section 260072 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Powers Fasteners.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable
for attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A
325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
5)
6)
5.
6.
7.
8.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS:
2.3
A.
Rated Strength, Features, and Application Requirements for Restraint Components:
As defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components used shall be at least five times the maximum seismic forces to
which they will be subjected.
B.
Angle and Channel-Type Brace Assemblies: Steel angles or steel slotted-supportsystem components; with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end
and to building structure at the other end.
C.
Cable Restraints: ASTM A 603, zinc-coated, steel wire rope attached to steel or
stainless-steel thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
b.
Loos & Co., Inc.
c.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Seismic Mountings, Anchors, and Attachments: Devices as specified in Part 2
"Support, Anchorage, and Attachment Components" Article, selected to resist
seismic forces.
Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with
internally bolted connections to hanger rod, of design recognized by an agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for
seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of
anchor bolts and studs used.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of
neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES:
2.4
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit
dimensions of supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for
steel shapes and plates.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Section 260072 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 3 – EXECUTION
APPLICATION
3.1
A.
Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment
and systems, except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space
supports for raceways as within 12 inches of coupling, fitting, and box, at each 90
degrees bend, minimum of two supports per ten foot run. Minimum rod size shall be
1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other
support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future
without exceeding specified design load limits.
1.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps,
or as otherwise required by an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
SUPPORT AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT INSTALLATION:
3.2
A.
Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, raceways
may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Install seismic-restraint components using methods approved by the evaluation service
providing required submittals for component.
D.
Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select
sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and
seismic loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for
strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
E.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor
and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the
following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion
anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided
with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4
inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweightaggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS
SP-69 Spring-tension clamps.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Section 260072 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
7.
8.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount
cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction
boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to
substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage
requirements.
F.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid
reinforcing bars.
G.
Do not drill or core cut holes for anchors or use powder-activated fasteners in posttension slabs, joists, and beams.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS:
3.3
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
CONCRETE BASES:
3.4
A.
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and seismic criteria at Project.
B.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
larger in both directions than supported unit, and so expansion anchors will be a
minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of
the base.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete
materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS:
3.5
A.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Section 260072 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
B.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are
attached to wall.
C.
Restraint Cables: Provide slack within maximums recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to
structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
3.6
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Testing: Test pullout resistance of seismic anchorage devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners
selected by Architect.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until
satisfactory results are achieved.
Record test results.
END OF SECTION 260072
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Section 260072 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 260110 – CONDUIT RACEWAYS
PART 1 – GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division
26, 27, and 28 sections making reference to conduit raceways.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.2
A.
Extent of raceways is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of raceways in this section include the followings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Rigid Metal Conduit
PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit
Intermediate Metal Conduit
Electrical Metallic Tubing
Flexible Metal Conduit
Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit
Rigid Non-metallic Conduit
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.3
A.
Standards: Refer to Section 260001 – Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
Provide conduit raceway installation in accordance with recommendations of the
American Iron and Steel Institute "Design Manual on Steel Electrical Raceways", latest
edition.
B.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of raceway of types and
sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory service for not less than three
(3) years.
C.
Shop Drawings: Not required.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
CONDUITS:
2.1
A.
Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC): Provide zinc-coated, hot-dipped galvanized, rigid metallic
conduit in accordance with Federal Specification WW-C-0581 and ANSI C80.1.
B.
PVC Externally Coated Rigid Metal Conduit: Provide hot-dipped galvanized, rigid
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
Section 260110 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
metallic conduit externally coated with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) in accordance with
ANSI C80.1 and NEMA Std. Pub. No. RN 1.
C.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Provide hot-dipped galvanized, intermediate metal
conduit in accordance with Federal Specification WW-C-581.
D.
Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): Provide electric metal tubing in accordance with
Federal Specification WW-C-563 and ANSI C80.3.
E.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide zinc-coated, flexible metal conduit in accordance with
Federal Specification WW-C-566.
F.
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit,
constructed of single strip, flexible continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel,
galvanized inside and outside, coated with liquid-tight jacket of flexible Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC).
G.
Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Provide rigid non-metallic conduit (PVC) in accordance
with ANSI/NEMA TC 2, Type 1 for concrete encasement, Type 2 for direct burial.
FITTINGS:
2.2
A.
Rigid Metal Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit, and PVC Externally Coated Rigid
Metal Conduit: Provide fully-threaded, malleable steel fittings, rain-tight and concretetight as applicable. Provide double locknuts and metal bushings at all conduit
terminations. Install OZ Type B bushings on conduits 1-1/4" and larger.
B.
Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide insulated throat, non-indenter, set screw, malleable
steel fittings. Screws must have a full set. Provide concrete-tight compression-type
fittings in suspended slabs. All EMT fittings shall be fabricated from steel. Die-cast
fittings or fittings made from pot metal shall not be allowed. Indenter type fittings are
not acceptable. Install OZ Type B bushings on conduits 1" and larger.
C.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide flexible metal conduit fittings in accordance with
Federal Specification W-F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and Style A. Commercial "greenfield"
not less than 1/2" diameter or as otherwise specified on drawings is acceptable.
D.
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings in
accordance with Federal Specification W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G.
E.
Non-Metallic Conduit: Provide non-metallic conduit fittings (PVC) in accordance with
ANSI/NEMA TC 3 to match conduit types and materials.
F.
Expansion Fittings: OZ Type AX, or equivalent to suit application.
G.
Sealing Bushings: Provide OZ Type FSK, WSK, or CSMI as required by application.
Provide OZ Type CSB internal sealing bushings.
H.
Cable Supports: Provide OZ cable supports for vertical risers, type as required by
application.
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
Section 260110 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SIZES:
2.3
A.
Provide conduits in sizes as indicated in contract documents or as otherwise specified
herein, but not less than 3/4".
PART 3 – EXECUTION
GENERAL:
3.1
A.
Install raceway and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's "Standards of
Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products fulfill requirements.
LOCATIONS:
3.2
A.
Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings: Use for conduit bends greater than 22 degrees
where buried below grade or slab on grade. Install RMC where raceway passes
vertically through slab-on-grade. Where raceways penetrate building, manholes, or
vault walls and floors below grade, provide RMC for a minimum distance of 10' on the
exterior side of the floor or wall. Use RMC for exposed runs where conduit is subject to
moisture, weather, or mechanical injury. Use in hazardous locations in accordance
with all NEC requirements.
B.
Intermediate Metal Conduit and Fittings: Use for exposed runs where conduit is
subject to moisture, weather, or mechanical injury. Use in hazardous locations in
accordance with all NEC requirements.
C.
Electric Metal Tubing and Fittings: Use for above-grade feeders, branch circuits, and
signal and control circuit, unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings. Install in
suspended slabs subject to local code requirements and fire rating considerations.
D.
Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: Use as whips for lighting fixtures, fixed equipment
where not exposed to weather of moisture, other devices where required by NEC, and
as requested by the Engineer. Maximum length not to exceed 6', unless specifically
approved by the Electrical Engineer.
E.
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: Use for connection to motor terminal
boxes, fixed equipment where subject to moisture or weather, and other equipment
subject to movement or vibration. Maximum length not to exceed 6', unless specified
otherwise.
F.
Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit and Fittings: Use for below-grade service entrances,
feeders, branch circuits, and signal and control circuit, unless specifically noted
otherwise on drawings. Do not use above grade.
METHODS:
3.3
A.
Maintain a minimum of 12" clearance between steam or hot water lines or other hot
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
Section 260110 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
surfaces. Where such clearance is impractical, insulate conduit with approved
materials.
B.
Install conduits parallel with or at right angles to lines of the structure. Route conduits
symmetrically where possible.
C.
Field bends and offsets shall be made without flattening, kinking, rippling or destroying
the smooth internal bore or surface of the conduit and to not less than NEC minimum
radius. Conduit that shows signs of rippling or kinking shall not be installed. Conduits
installed with wrinkles or kinks or otherwise in an unworkmanlike manner shall be
replaced at no additional cost to owner.
D.
Precaution shall be exercised to prevent accumulation of water, dirt or concrete in the
conduits during the execution of the project. Conduits in which water or foreign matter
has been permitted to accumulate shall be thoroughly cleaned or the conduits runs
replaced where such accumulation cannot be removed by methods approved the
engineer.
E.
Any conduit which pierces airtight spaces or plenums shall be sealed to prevent air
leakage with mastic acceptable to the Architect.
CONCEALING:
3.4
A.
All raceways shall be concealed within the ceilings, walls, and floors, except in
locations where exposed raceways are specifically permitted, such as equipment
rooms and unfinished storage areas. In equipment rooms, if lighting raceways are run
exposed, installation shall not be done until piping and duct work layout has been
determined in order that lighting boxes may be located so as to avoid being covered by
overhead ducts and piping. If lighting raceways in equipment rooms are concealed in
the structural ceiling slab, after mechanical work is complete, exposed conduit
extensions shall be run to locate lighting fixtures where they are not obscured by work
of other trades.
BURIED CONDUITS:
3.5
A.
Comply with all burial depths as defined in NEC Section 300-5. Bury all conduits at
least 24" below grade, unless specifically indicated otherwise on drawings. Provide
magnetic 6" wide “Yellow Warning" ribbon 12" directly above conduit and 6" below
finished grade measured from the top of the conduit or duct bank. Where multiple
small lines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16",
install a single marker.
B.
Slope all conduits toward manholes or pull boxes for proper drainage. Use weep
holes. Gravel drainage pockets are not permitted.
C.
Coat all metal conduits with an approved asphaltic compound or wrap with two layers
of PVC tape.
D.
Under Concrete Slab on Grade: Horizontal conduit must be installed a minimum of 2”
below the bottom of the concrete slab. Conduits should not be installed in concrete
slabs.
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
Section 260110 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
E.
Concrete Encasement: Where concrete-encasement is indicated on drawings,
provide ductbank construction using red 3000 psi at 28 day strength concrete. Provide
minimum 4" cover on all sides of exterior conduits. Provide conduit spacers where
applicable. Coat all metal conduits with an approved asphaltic compound or wrap with
two layers of PVC tape.
F.
Where conduits are extended for future use, cap and clearly mark.
ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY:
3.6
A.
Provide electrically continuous conduit systems throughout.
FIELD CUTS AND THREADS:
3.7
A.
Cut all conduits square. Remove all sharp or rough edges and ream all burrs, inside
and outside. Provide clean sharp threads on RMC and IMC.
B.
Engage at least five full threads on all RMC and IMC fittings. Before couplings or
fittings are attached, apply one coat of red lead or zinc chromate to male threads of
RMC or IMC. Apply coat of red lead, zinc chromate or special compound
recommended by manufacture to conduit where conduit protective coating is damaged.
SUSPENDED SLABS:
3.8
A.
When conduit is installed in the suspended slab, it shall be limited to conduits having a
diameter of 1" (25 mm) or less, or less than 1/3 the concrete cover, and no crossovers
occur, and conduit spaced at least 18" (450 mm) apart with a 3/4" (20 mm) cover.
CONDUIT ENDS:
3.9
A.
3.10
Cap all spare conduits. Cap or plug conduit ends during construction to prevent
entrance of foreign material.
SPARE CONDUITS:
A.
Provide five (5) 3/4" empty conduits from panel stubbed into accessible ceiling space
and five (5) 3/4" conduits into accessible floor space. When floor is not accessible,
provide six (6) 3/4" empty conduits from panel stubbed into accessible ceiling space.
Cap and label all conduits.
B.
Install a 200 lb. polypropylene pull cord in each empty conduit run.
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:
Install RMC and IMC in all hazardous locations as defined by the NEC. Provide
suitable fittings, seal-offs, boxes, etc. to comply with all NEC requirements and/or as
shown on the drawings. Provide inspection fittings with hazardous location rated
drains to prevent water from accumulating in conduit runs.
CLEANING:
Pull mandrel and swab through all conduits before installing conductors.
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
Section 260110 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
END OF SECTION 260110
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
Section 260110 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 260120 – CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 – GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division
26, 27, and 28 sections making reference to conductors and cables.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.2
A.
This section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices,
and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
B.
Types of conductors and cables in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Copper Conductors.
Aluminum Conductors.
MC Flexible Metal Clad Copper Cables.
MC Jacketed Flexible Metal Clad Copper Cables
MC Flexible Metal Clad Aluminum Cables.
Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables.
Flexible Cords.
Applications for conductors and cables required for project include:
1.
2.
3.
Electrical service.
Feeders.
Branch Circuits.
SUBMITTALS:
1.3
A.
Product Data: For each type of conductor and/or cable indicated.
B.
Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor. Refer to Section 260001 –
General Electrical Provisions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.4
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Section 260120 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
GENERAL:
2.1
A.
Manufacturers: In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists,
provide products by the manufacturer specified, subject to compliance with
requirements.
B.
Ambient Conditions: Conductors used for branch circuits in areas where the ambient
conditions exceed 30 degree C. shall be provided with insulation approved for that
temperature.
C.
Wire Sizes: As indicated on electrical drawings or as specified herein, but in no case
less than No. 12 AWG.
COPPER CONDUCTORS:
2.2
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cerro Wire & Cable Company.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
Encore Wire Corporation.
Southwire Incorporated.
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Cable Applications" Article for application requirements.
C.
References and Ratings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ICEA S-95-658 / NEMA WC70.
ASTM.
UL Standard 83.
UL Standard 1063 (MTW).
Federal Specification J-C-30B.
NEC.
D.
Conductor Material: Copper.
E.
Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 12 AWG, stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.
F.
Conductor Insulation Types: Thermoplastic-insulated, Type THHN / THWN-2.
ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS:
2.3
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div.
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Cable Applications" Article for application requirements.
C.
References and Ratings:
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Section 260120 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
2.
3.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ICEA S-95-658 / NEMA WC70.
Federal Specification J-C-30B.
ASTM Standards B 800 and B 801.
D.
Conductor Material: Aluminum.
E.
Stranding: STABILOY compact stranded conductor (AA-8000 Series aluminum alloy).
F.
Conductor Insulation Types: Black cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), Type XHHW-2.
MC FLEXIBLE METAL CLAD COPPER CABLES:
2.4
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Cable Applications" Article for application requirements.
C.
References and Ratings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
UL 83, 1479, 1569, 1581, File Reference E80042.
NEC 230-43, 300-22(c), 318, 321, 334, 518, 520, 530, 645.
Federal Specifications J-C-30B.
Meets all applicable OSHA and HUD requirements.
May be surface-mounted or embedded in plaster.
UL rated for Cable Tray and Environmental Air-Handling Space installation; 1, 2
and 3-hour through-penetration Fire Wall rated.
D.
Conductor Material: Copper.
E.
Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
F.
Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN.
G.
Armor: Galvanized steel.
H.
Assembly Covering: Mylar Tape.
I.
Grounding: Insulated green grounding conductor.
MC JACKETED FLEXIBLE METAL CLAD COPPER CABLES
2.5
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
B.
Refer to Part 3 “Conductor and Cable Applications” Article for application requirements.
C.
References and ratings:
1.
UL 62, 83, 1569, 1581, File Reference E80042.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Section 260120 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
NEC 230-43, 318, 321-3(a), 334, 501, 502, 503, 511-6, 513-4(a), 514-4, 515-4,
516-7(a), 680-25(c).
Federal Specification J-C-30B.
Passes UL 210,000 BTU Vertical Tray Flame Test.
UL Cable Tray rated.
UL rated for DIRECT BURIAL in earth or concrete.
UL rated for Sunlight Resistant.
UL rated for Oil Resistant.
D.
Conductor Material: Copper.
E.
Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
F.
Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN/THWN.
G.
Armor: Galvanized steel with gray PVC jacket.
H.
Assembly Covering: Mylar Tape.
I.
Grounding: Insulated green grounding conductor.
MC FLEXIBLE METAL CLAD ALUMINUM CABLES:
2.6
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div.
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Cable Applications" Article for application requirements.
C.
References and Ratings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ICEA S-95-658 / NEMA WC70.
Federal Specification J-C-30B.
ASTM Standards B 800 and B 801.
UL 1479, 1569.
Low smoke rating per FT4/IEEE 1202.
D.
Conductor Material: Aluminum.
E.
Stranding: STABILOY compact stranded conductor (AA-8000 Series aluminum alloy).
F.
Conductor Insulation Types: Black cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), Type XHHW-2.
G.
Armor: Aluminum.
NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLES:
2.7
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Cerro Wire & Cable Company.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Section 260120 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.
4.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Encore Wire Corporation.
Southwire Incorporated.
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Cable Applications" Article for application requirements.
C.
References and Ratings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
UL 83.
UL 719.
Federal Specification J-C-30B.
600 Volts.
D.
Conductor Material: Copper.
E.
Stranding: Solid conductor.
F.
Conductor Insulation Types: 90 Degree C. - rated polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nylon
jacketed, color-coded.
G.
Outer Sheath: Moisture-resistant, flame-retardant, PVC jacket.
H.
Grounding: Insulated green grounding conductor.
FLEXIBLE CORDS:
2.8
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cerro Wire & Cable Company.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
Encore Wire Corporation.
Southwire Incorporated.
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Cable Applications" Article for application requirements.
C.
References and Ratings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ASTM.
ICEA.
UL 62.
Pendant or portable.
Damp locations.
600 Volts.
NEC Article 400.
D.
Conductor Material: Copper.
E.
Stranding: Class K, flexible stranded conductor.
F.
Conductor Insulation Types: Heat- and moisture-resistant TPE insulation.
G.
Fillers and Wrapping: Non-wicking polypropylene fillers, with tissue-paper separator
wrapped around the assembly.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Section 260120 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
H.
Outer Jacket: Black-colored, heat-, moisture-, and oil-resistant TPE jacket.
I.
Grounding: Insulated green grounding conductor.
J.
Cord Type: SO, hard-usage.
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES:
2.9
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
AMP Incorporated/Tyco International.
Hubbell/Anderson.
O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
B.
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,
material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
C.
Splices for wire sizes #10 and smaller shall be screw-on type similar to scotch or ideal
wing nut connectors. Crimp-on splices designed to be used without wire stripping are
not acceptable.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
GENERAL:
3.1
A.
Install conductors, cables, and accessories as indicated, in compliance with
manufacturer's written instruction, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standards
of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products fulfill requirements.
CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS:
3.2
A.
Service Entrance: As indicated on the electrical drawings.
B.
Feeders: As indicated on the electrical drawings.
C.
Branch Circuits:
1.
2.
Exposed, including in crawlspaces: Copper conductors in raceway.
Concealed in ceilings, walls, and partitions: Copper conductors in raceways.
3.
Concealed in concrete and below slabs-on-grade: Copper conductors in
raceway.
D.
Cord Drops, Reels, and Portable Appliance Connections: Flexible cord.
E.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Copper conductors in raceway.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Section 260120 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
INSTALLATION:
3.3
A.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;
compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C.
Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips
that will not damage cables or raceway.
D.
When raceway is not required, install concealed cables parallel and perpendicular to
surfaces of structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
E.
Support cables according to other applicable specification sections.
F.
Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements to comply with applicable fire stop
specification sections.
G.
Color Coding: Color code secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors.
Colors shall remain consistent throughout the project and shall match existing coding
system where applicable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Conductor sizes No. 6 AWG and smaller: Colored insulation.
Conductors sizes No. 4 AWG and larger: 2 inch (51 mm) band of Colored
adhesive marking tape applied at all terminations, junction boxes, and pull boxes.
Branch circuit switched-legs and travelers: Colored insulation (in colors other
than those indicated below).
Color-code 120/208V system conductors:
a.
Phase A: Black.
b.
Phase B: Red.
c.
Phase C: Blue.
d.
Neutral A: White with Black stripe.
e.
Neutral B: White with Red stripe.
f.
Neutral C: White with Blue stripe.
g.
Neutral (Shared when allowed): White
h.
Ground: Green.
i.
Isolated Ground: Green with yellow tracer.
Color-code 277/480V system conductors:
a.
Phase A: Brown.
b.
Phase B: Orange.
c.
Phase C: Yellow.
d.
Neutral A: Gray with Brown stripe.
e.
Neutral B: Gray with Orange stripe.
f.
Neutral C: Gray with Yellow stripe.
g.
Neutral (Shared when allowed): Gray.
h.
Ground: Green.
Color-code 120/240V system conductors:
a.
Phase A: Black.
b.
Phase B: Red.
c.
Neutral A: White with Black Stripe.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Section 260120 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
d.
e.
f.
g.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Neutral B: White with Red Stripe.
Neutral (shared when allowed): Gray.
Ground: Green.
Isolated Ground: Green with yellow tracer.
HOMERUN CIRCUITS:
3.4
A.
Homerun circuits may be combined in common conduits at the option of the contractor
in compliance with the following:
1.
2.
Three-Phase Installations: Not more than three single-phase circuits in one
conduit, unless specifically noted otherwise, if each circuit is from a different
phase (a, b, or c).
Single-Phase Installations: Not more than two single-phase circuits in one
conduit, unless specifically noted otherwise, if each circuit is from a different
phase (a or b).
NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS:
3.5
A.
LINE-TO-NEUTRAL BRANCH CIRCUITS: Provide a dedicated neutral for each lineto-neutral branch circuit. Size the neutral conductor the same as the phase conductor.
In each outlet or junction box containing multiple neutral conductors, tag each neutral
to identify which circuit it serves.
SYSTEM FURNITURE CIRCUITS:
3.6
A.
Coordinate system furniture wiring requirements and termination locations with
supplier/installer prior to rough-in. Coordinate placement of connection boxes in walls
and columns (where applicable) to insure that adequate accessibility is maintained.
B.
4-Circuit, 3+D Wiring: Provide a total of 8 conductors to each system furniture
connection consisting of three circuits with shared equipment ground and shared
oversized neutral; and one dedicated circuit with dedicated isolated ground and
dedicated neutral. Size the shared neutral conductor one size (AWG) larger than the
largest phase conductor.
C.
3-Circuit, Shared Neutral Wiring: Provide a total of 5 conductors to each system
furniture connection consisting of three circuits with shared equipment ground and
shared oversized neutral. Size the shared neutral conductor one size (AWG) larger
than the largest phase conductor.
D.
4-Circuit, 3I+1 Wiring: Provide a total of 8 conductors to each system furniture
connection consisting of three circuits with shared isolated ground and shared
oversized neutral; and one dedicated circuit with dedicated equipment ground and
dedicated neutral. Size the shared neutral conductor one size (AWG) larger than the
largest phase conductor.
E.
3-Circuit, Separate Neutral Wiring: Provide a total of 8 conductors to each system
furniture connection consisting of two circuits with two dedicated neutrals and shared
isolated ground; and one dedicated circuit with dedicated equipment ground and
dedicated neutral.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Section 260120 – Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
F.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
4-Circuit, 2+2 Wiring: Provide a total of 8 conductors to each system furniture
connection consisting of two circuits with shared equipment ground and shared
oversized neutral; and two circuit with shared isolated ground and shared oversized
neutral. Size the shared neutral conductors one size (AWG) larger than the largest
phase conductor.
VOLTAGE DROP:
3.7
A.
Provide branch circuit conductors in sizes such that voltage drop for branch circuits do
not exceed 3 percent at the farthest outlet. Provide service, feeder, and branch circuit
conductors so that the voltage drop on the entire electrical system does not exceed 5
percent at the farthest outlet. This shall be strictly followed regardless of the conductor
sizes indicated on the electrical drawings. Increase conductor sizes (and conduits
where necessary to comply with NEC conduit fill requirements) as necessary to
accommodate this requirement. Calculations shall be based on the following:
1.
2.
3.
Lighting Branch Circuits: Connected load plus 25% spare.
Appliance and Equipment Branch Circuits: Nameplate or NEC required load.
120V Convenience Outlet Branch Circuits: 12 amps minimum, but in no case
less than NEC loading requirements. Use the following schedule:
Distance (feet)
Wire Size (AWG)
0-80
81-125
126-200
201-320
4.
#12
#10
#8
#6
Use the NEC method to calculate voltage drop.
CONNECTIONS:
3.8
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess
equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
C.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of
slack. Use pig tails when wiring outlets.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
3.9
A.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a.
Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance
with the electrical construction documents.
b.
Test cable mechanical connections to manufacturer’s recommended
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Section 260120 – Page 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
values with a calibrated torque wrench.
Check cable color coding for compliance with electrical specifications.
Electrical Tests:
a.
Perform insulation resistance test on each conductors for feeders 100
amps and greater with respect to ground and adjacent conductors.
Applied potential shall be 1000 volts dc for 1 minute.
b.
Perform continuity test to insure proper cable connection.
Test Values:
a.
Minimum insulation resistance values shall not be less than two
megaohms.
c.
2.
3.
B.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report and submit to the Electrical Engineer at the
completion of the project. The report shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 260120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Section 260120 – Page 10
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 260135 – ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division
26, 27, and 28 sections making reference to electrical boxes and fittings.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.2
A.
Extent of electrical boxes and fittings work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Outlet Boxes
Junction Boxes
Pull Boxes
Conduit Bodies
Bushings
Locknuts
Knockout Closures
Miscellaneous Boxes and Fittings
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.3
A.
Standards: Refer to Section 260001 – Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
B.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of boxes and fittings
required, whose products have been in satisfactory service for not less than three
years.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings on floor boxes only where required.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES:
2.1
A.
General: Provide one piece, galvanized or cadmium-plated, flat-rolled, sheet steel
interior outlet boxes of types, shapes, and sizes to suit respective location and
installation. Construct with stamped knockouts on back and sides and with threaded
screw holes. Provide corrosion-resistant screws for securing boxes, covers, and wiring
devices. Size all junction boxes in accordance with NEC Table 314.16(A), with a
minimum box size of 4" x 4" x 1-1/2". Where three raceway entries are made, provide
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
Secton 260135 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 2-1/8". Where four or more raceway entries are
made, provide outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 4-11/16". Gangable boxes shall
not be used.
B.
Switch, Telephone, and Receptacle Outlets: Provide outlet boxes not less than 4"
square, with adapting tile or plaster covers where necessary to set flush with finished
surfaces. Where three raceway entries are made, provide outlet boxes with a
minimum depth of 2-1/8". Gang boxes shall be used where more than one switch or
device is located at one point. Sectional Boxes are not acceptable. In masonry walls
where tile or plaster ring cannot be used, install a single-gang 3-1/2" deep box
minimum, unless otherwise noted. Where four or more raceway entries are made,
provide outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 4-11/16".
C.
Lighting Outlets:
1.
2.
Lay-in Grid: Outlets for recessed fixtures in acoustical tile ceilings shall be
located to center on a single tile or at the intersection of four tiles.
Surface-mounted: Provide 4" square octagonal outlet boxes for surfacemounted, ceiling fixture outlets. Mount each box independently of the conduit on
standard 3/8" stud or approved box hangar where applicable. Include backing
and supports as required to carry 200 lbs. Where three or more raceway
entrances are made, use a minimum box depth of 2-1/8".
WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES:
2.2
A.
Provide corrosion-resistant, cast-metal weatherproof outlet boxes, of types, shapes,
and sizes, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal coverplates with spring-hinged
waterproof caps, face plate gaskets, and corrosion-resistant fasteners.
JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES:
2.3
A.
Provide code-gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with removable screw-on
covers and welded seams, of types, shapes, and sizes to suit each respective location
and installation. Size all junction and pull boxes in accordance with NEC 314.28.
Provide stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws, and washer.
CONDUIT BODIES:
2.4
A.
Provide galvanized, cast-metal conduit bodies of type, shapes, and sizes to suit
respective locations and installation. Construct with threaded conduit entrance ends
and removable covers. Provide corrosion-resistant screws.
B.
Aluminum boxes and fitting shall not be permitted.
CONDUIT CONNECTIONS:
2.5
A.
Box connectors 3/4" and larger shall be insulated, throat-type or equal type plastic
bushings. Provide double locknuts and insulating plastic bushings for RMC and IMC
terminating at panels and boxes.
B.
Where RMC penetrates building, manholes, or vault walls and floors below grade,
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
Secton 260135 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
provide sealing bushings with external membrane clamps as applicable. Provide
segmented internal sealing bushings in all raceways penetrating building walls and
slabs below grade, and in all above grade raceway penetrations susceptible to
moisture migration into building through raceway. Where RMC terminates in manhole,
vault, or pull box, provide insulated grounding bushings. Also see Section 260135 –
Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
C.
Install OZ type "B" connectors for all conduits 1" and larger.
D.
Provide cable supports in all vertical risers in accordance with NEC 300-19.
EXPANSION FITTINGS:
2.6
A.
Provide expansion joint fittings in all conduit runs crossing structural expansion joints,
whether above-grade, in slab-on-grade, or in suspended slabs. Provide OZ type "AX"
or approved equivalent, size to the raceway.
ACCESSORIES:
2.7
A.
Provide all accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, bushings, knockout
closures, locknuts, offset connectors, etc. of types, shapes, and sizes to suit respective
locations and installation. Construct of corrosion-resistant steel.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
GENERAL:
3.1
A.
Install electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's written
instruction, applicable requirements of the NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's
"Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that products fulfill requirements.
METHODS:
3.2
A.
Where outlet boxes are subject to weather or moisture, install weatherproof outlet
boxes.
B.
Remove knockouts only for entering conduits. Provide knockout closures to cap
unused knockout holes where blanks are mistakenly removed.
C.
Do not use condulets in place of elbows or junction boxes. Condulets in sizes 2" or
larger shall not be used, unless specifically approved by the electrical engineer.
D.
Install boxes and conduit bodies in readily accessible locations. Install recessed boxes
with faces of boxes or rings flush with finished surfaces. Seal all openings between
outlet box and adjacent surfaces with plaster, grout, or similar suitable material.
E.
For stud construction, install boxes with rigid supports using metal bar hangers, or 2" X
4", 1" X 6" wood bridging between studs with screws. Welding or nailing boxes directly
to metal joist and studs is not acceptable. Boxes set opposite in common wall shall
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
Secton 260135 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
have at least 10" of conduit between them. Securely fasten outlet boxes to structural
surfaces to which attached.
F.
For concrete or masonry construction, solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete and
masonry. Provide box supports as required to keep outlet boxes flush with finished
surfaces.
G.
Coordinate location of all outlet boxes with millwork, back splashes, tackboards, etc.
H.
Install junction boxes or condulets in conduit runs as required at 100 foot maximum
intervals on long runs. This shall apply to concrete junction boxes in grade and
junction boxes within the building.
I.
Provide electrical connections for installed boxes.
IDENTIFICATION:
3.3
A.
Mark circuit number on exterior side of junction boxes located in ceilings such that
circuits numbers are readily identifiable. For outlet boxes in wall, mark circuit numbers
on interior sides of outlet boxes.
B.
Identification labels shall be as follows:
Normal Power
Black with White letters
Emergency Power Red with White Letters
UPS
Orange with White Letters
END OF SECTION 260135
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
Secton 260135 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 260140 – WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division
26, 27, and 28 sections making reference to wiring devices.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.2
A.
Extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Toggle Switches
Receptacles
Special Purpose Outlets
Cord Caps and Connectors
Occupancy Sensors
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.3
A.
STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 – Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
B.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
1.
2.
Submit manufacturer's data on all electrical wiring devices.
Where occupancy sensors are required, provide scaled drawing showing
manufacturer’s recommended locations.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
GENERAL:
2.1
2.2
A.
Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, and electrical ratings for
applications indicated and complying with NEMA standards Pub No. WD 1. nylon
construction, 20 amp rating minimum.
B.
Provide wiring devices in colors selected by Architect/Engineer. Provide red receptacle
outlets and toggle switches where devices are circuited to emergency power. Provide
orange receptacle outlets where devices are circuited to UPS power.
TOGGLE SWITCHES:
WIRING DEVICES
Section 260140 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide toggle switches from one of the following manufacturers (Fed-Spec):
1-Pole
Manufacturer
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Cooper
Bryant
B.
1223
20AC3
1222
2223
4903
4-Way
1224
20AC4
1223
2224
4904
W/Pilot
1221-PL
20AC1-RPL
1221-PLR
2221-PL
4901-PL
Abbreviations are defined as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
HBL1221
20AC1
1221
2221
4901
3-Way
1-Pole - Single-Pole Toggle Switch
3-Way - Three-Way Toggle Switch
4-Way - Four-Way Toggle Switch
W/Pilo - Single-Pole Toggle Switch with Pilot Light
Must be back and side wired, and have color-coded covers, Brass terminal screws,
back wire ground clamp, and self-grounding clip.
RECEPTACLES:
2.3
A.
Provide duplex receptacles from one of the following manufacturers:
Manufacturer
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Cooper
Bryant
B.
5362
5362
5362
5362
5362
GFCI
GF5362
2091-S
8899
VGF20
GFR53FT
IG
5362IG
IG6300
5362-IG
IG5362
5362IG
Abbreviations are defined as follows:
1.
2.
3.
C.
CO
CO- Convenience Outlet Duplex Receptacle
GFCI- Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter duplex Receptacle
IG- Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacle
Must have one-piece Brass back strap and back wire grounding clamp (Does not apply
to GCFI or isolated ground).
SWITCHES (FED-SPEC ECONOMY):
2.4
A.
Provide toggle switched from one of the following manufacturers (Fed-Spec
(Economy)):
Manufacturer
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
WIRING DEVICES
1-Pole
CS1221
CSB20AC1
1221-S
3-Way
CS1223
CSB20AC3
1222-S
4-Way
CS1224
CSB20AC4
1223-S
W/Pilot
CS-1221-PL
20AC1-RPL
1221-PLR
Section 260140 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Cooper
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
CS1221
CS1223
CS1224
CS1221PL
RECEPTACLES (FED-SPEC ECONOMY):
2.5
A.
Provide duplex receptacles from one of the following manufacturers:
Manufacturer
CO
GCFI
IG
Hubbell
CR5362
GF6362
CR5362IG
Pass & Seymour
CRB5362
2091
IG6300
(P&S CRB series not all nylon construction. Operating temperature is lower)
Leviton
5362-S
8899
5362-IG
Cooper
CR5362
VGF15
IG5362
B.
Abbreviations are defined as follows:
1.
2.
3.
CO -Convenience Outlet Duplex Receptacle
GCFI-Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacle
G-Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacle
SWITCHES (COMMERCIAL DECORA):
2.6
A.
Provide rocker switches from one of the following manufacturers (Commercial Decora):
Manufacturer
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Cooper
1-Pole
HBL2121
2621
5621-2
7621
3-Way
HBL2123
2623
5623-2
7623
4-Way
HBL2124
2624
5624-2
7624
RECEPTACLES (COMMERCIAL DECORA):
2.7
A.
Provide duplex receptacles from one of the following manufacturers:
Manufacturer
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Cooper
B.
CO
HBL2182
26352
16352
6352
GCFI
GF5262
2091-S
8898
VGF15
Abbreviations are defined as follows:
1.
2.
3.
CO -Convenience Outlet Duplex Receptacle
GCFI-Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacle
IG-Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacle
SWITCHES (COMMERCIAL):
2.8
A.
Provide toggle switches from one of the following manufacturers (Commercial):
Manufacturer
WIRING DEVICES
1-Pole
3-Way
4-Way
Section 260140 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Cooper
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
CS120
CS120
CS120-2
CS120
CS320
CS320
CS320-2
CS320
CS420
CS420
CS420-2
CS420
RECEPTACLES (COMMERCIAL):
2.9
A.
Provide duplex receptacles from one of the following manufacturers:
CO
Manufacturer
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Cooper
B.
A.
2.11
A.
A.
CO -Convenience Outlet Duplex Receptacle
GCFI -Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacle
IG -Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacle
SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLETS:
Provide special purpose outlets of voltage and ampere ratings, and NEMA
configurations to suit respective application. Refer to drawings for NEMA
configuration. Provide special purpose outlets in amperages at least as large as the
overcurrent protective device from which they are served.
CORD CAPS AND CONNECTORS:
Provide cord caps and connectors of voltage and ampere ratings, and NEMA
configurations which mate and match with outlets specified as required for final
connections for equipment. Provide cord caps and connectors of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.12
GF5352
2091-S
8899
VGF20
Abbreviations are defined as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.10
CR20
CR20
CR20
CR20
GCFI
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Cooper
Bryant
COVERPLATES:
Wall Plates: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices. In all finished areas, provide
nylon or high impact resistant thermoplastic coverplates in colors as selected by
Architect. Provide red coverplates for all receptacle outlets and toggle switches that
are circuited to emergency power. Provide orange coverplates for all isolated ground
receptacle outlets. Provide stainless steel coverplates in commercial kitchens and food
preparation areas. Provide ganged coverplates for all switches and/or dimmers.
Provide pre-marked coverplates for special purpose outlet indicating voltage,
WIRING DEVICES
Section 260140 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
amperages, and phase. Provide raised stamped, galvanized, steel plates in all
unfinished areas. Provide weather-proof coverplates for outlets exposed to weather
and moisture.
B.
Weather-Protecting Device Enclosure: Where required for compliance with NEC 41067 (receptacles installed outdoors for use other than with portable tools or equipment),
provide weather-tight device covers which provide complete protection with the cord
and cap inserted into the wring device. Provide units which mount on either single or
double gang devices. Provide device enclosures manufactured by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.13
A.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS:
General: Provide self-contained, dual technology ultrasonic and passive infrared
motion detectors providing volumetric coverage without gaps within the detection area.
Provide sensors in voltage and wattage ratings required to suit application. Provide
sensors from one of the following manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Intermatic WP1020 or WP1030
Hubbell WP826MP
Pass & Seymore
Lithonia
Cooper Controls
Watt Stopper
Hubbell
Leviton
Wall-Type Occupancy Sensors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The wall switch shall be designed to cover areas up to 300 sq. ft. in one direction.
The unit shall require a pushbutton to be pressed to turn lights on. Lights may
also be turned off with the same pushbutton, or lights shall automatically be
turned off after the pre-set period of time elapses.
There shall be a 10 second "grace" period after the unit turns itself off (because
of lack of motion) during which a new motion will automatically turn light on
without the pushbutton having to be pressed.
Sensitivity and time-on after activation shall be user adjustable through
concealed controls to minimize tampering. Time-on shall be adjustable between
90 seconds and 30 minutes.
Override capability, for use in emergency or during lamp changes, shall be
provided by a three-position switch which allows selection of positive on, off, and
automatic operation.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
GENERAL:
3.1
A.
Install wiring devices and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written
instruction, applicable requirements of the NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's
WIRING DEVICES
Section 260140 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
"Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to
insure that products fulfill requirements.
METHODS:
3.2
A.
Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess
building materials, dirt, and debris. Do not install wiring devices until painting work is
completed.
B.
Replace receptacles and/or coverplates which are damaged, stained, or burned.
GFCI RECEPTACLES:
3.3
A.
Provide separate neutral conductor from panel to each GFCI receptacle circuits.
B.
Install GFCI receptacles for all receptacles installed in restrooms, outdoors, or within
six feet of any sink. All receptacles in kitchens shall be GCFI protected.
C.
Do not wire standard receptacles on the load side of GFCI receptacle - Install GFCI
receptacles.
SURFACE RACEWAYS:
3.4
A.
Provide all receptacles and special purpose outlets required in surface raceways. See
Section 260110 – Conduit Raceways, and Section 260135 – Electrical Boxes and
Fittings.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS:
3.5
A.
Do not locate immediately adjacent to air diffusers. Coordinate exact placement with
Divisions 21, 22, and 23.
GROUNDING:
3.6
A.
Provide electrical continuous, tight, grounding connections for wiring devices.
TESTING:
3.7
A.
Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper
polarity connections. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate
compliance with requirements.
IDENTIFICATION:
3.8
A.
All devices shall be identified on the coverplate with panelboard name and circuit
number.
B.
In each outlet, tag each wire to identify the circuit it serves.
C.
Identification labels shall be as follows:
Normal Power
WIRING DEVICES
Black with White letters
Section 260140 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Emergency Power Red with White Letters
UPS
Orange with White Letters
END OF SECTION 260140
WIRING DEVICES
Section 260140 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 260155 – MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division
26, 27, and 28 sections making reference to motor starters.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1.2
A.
Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Type of motor starters in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters
Two-Speed Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters
Combination Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.3
A.
STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 – Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
B.
SUBMITTALS:
1.
2.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's data and dimensional details on motor
starters including voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and
overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure
details.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under regulatory
requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, installation, and starting of products.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
GENERAL:
2.1
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products of on of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Allen Bradley
Cutler-Hammer
General Electric
MOTOR STARTERS
Section 260155 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
4.
5.
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Siemens
Square D
Maintenance, Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses,
amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than 3 units of each, for
both power and control circuit fuses.
THERMAL OVERLOAD UNITS:
2.2
A.
Provide metal alloy, thermal overload units for all motor starters. Size to actual running
full load current, not to motor plate current, after air and water balancing are
completed.
NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS:
2.3
A.
Provide non-reversing magnetic starters equivalent to Square D Class 8536, Type S, of
types, sizes, and electrical characteristics as required to suit applications or as
otherwise indicated on drawings. Provide NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A
magnetic starter for induction motors. Provide encapsulated coil with operating voltage
compatible with control system (coordinate with Divisions 21, 22, and 23). Provide
totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium-oxide power contacts. Contact
inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring.
Provide straight-through wiring with all terminals clearly marked. Provide NEMA ICS,
melting alloy, interchangeable, overload relays with one-piece thermal unit construction
and under voltage protection in all phases. Provide replaceable overload relay control
circuit contacts. Thermal units shall be required for starter to operate. Provide NEMA
ICS 2, 2 each normally open and closed, field convertible, auxiliary contacts in addition
to seal-in contact. Provide rotary-type, hand-off-auto and reset switches, recessed
pushbutton control. Provide red pilot light. Provide control power transformer in each
motor starter with fused primary and secondary. Provide each magnetic starter with
integral phase failure protection that will protect against phase loss, phase unbalance,
phase reversal, and undervoltage. Provide ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosures, or
where subject to weather or moisture, Type 3R.
TWO-SPEED NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS:
2.4
A.
Provide two-speed, non-reversing magnetic starters equivalent to Square D 8810, of
types, sizes, and electrical characteristics as required to suit applications or as
otherwise indicated on drawings. Provide non-reversing magnetic starters with
features as noted above in the description for "NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC
STARTERS" with the following exceptions: Provide high/low pushbutton switches to
select motor speed when operating in the hand mode. Provide green high speed and
red low speed pilot lights. Label lights appropriately. Provide separate overload units
for high and low speed windings. Provide consequent pole and/or separate winding
starters as required to coordinate with motors provided. Coordinate all work with
Divisions 21, 22, and 23.
COMBINATION NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS:
2.5
A.
Provide combination, non-reversing magnetic starters equivalent to Square D 8538,
Type S (non-fusible and fusible disconnect switch type) and Square D 8539, Type S
MOTOR STARTERS
Section 260155 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
(motor circuit protector type), of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics as required
to suit applications or as otherwise indicated on drawings. Provide non-reversing
magnetic starters and/or two-speed non-reversing magnetic starters with features as
noted above in the descriptions for "NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS" and
"TWO-SPEED NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS".
B.
Where Combination Magnetic Starter/Motor Circuit Protector switches are specified,
provide NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in each
pole. Provide circuit breakers with externally operable handles that give positive visual
indication of ON-OFF positions with red and black color coding.
C.
Where Combination Magnetic Starter/Nonfusible Disconnect Switches are specified,
provide NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle and visible
blades. Provide disconnects with externally operable handles that give positive visual
indication of ON-OFF positions with red and black color coding.
D.
Where Combination Magnetic Starter/Fusible Disconnect Switches are specified,
provide NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle and visible
blades. Provide switches with Fuse clips to accommodate Class J fuses. Provide
fuses in accordance with Section 260180 – Overcurrent Protective Devices. Provide
disconnects with externally operable handles that give positive visual indication of ONOFF positions with red and black color coding.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
GENERAL:
3.1
A.
Install motor starters in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable
requirements of the NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation",
and in compliance with recognized industry practices.
METHODS:
3.2
A.
Install overload units so catalog number is visible. Mount chart inside each starter
indicating heater type, size, and ampere ratings available.
B.
Where sizes of starters, disconnect, fuses, motor circuit protectors, heaters, etc. are
not indicated on drawings, size all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
C.
Submit with the record drawings a record of the motor amperage readings of each
electrically-driven unit; show horsepower, full-load amps and service factor.
IDENTIFICATION:
3.3
A.
Provide 1/16" thick black plastic laminate labels with 1/4" high lettering on the exterior
of each starter cabinet. Provide red plastic laminate label for starter supplied by
emergency power. Include mechanical equipment designation, horsepower, voltage,
full-load amps, and service factor of motor. Mark on interior cover the source of power
MOTOR STARTERS
Section 260155 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
by indicating the panel and circuit number.
MOTOR CONNECTIONS:
3.4
A.
Each motor shall be connected to the conduit with a length of flexible, seal-tight conduit
(minimum of 18"), with proper type fittings. All motor supply circuits shall include a
green ground conductor. Check for proper motor rotation on all motors or equipment.
END OF SECTION 260155
MOTOR STARTERS
Section 260155 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 260160 – PANELBOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26, 27, and
28 sections making reference to panelboards.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Extent of panelboard work is indicated by drawings and schedules and is specified herein.
B.
Type of panelboards in this section include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
Power Distribution Panelboards
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 – Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
B.
SUBMITTALS:
1.
2.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing
accurately scaled layouts of enclosures. Include schedule of devices, including, but not
necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground-fault circuit
interrupters, and accessories.
Equipment Room Layouts: Submit dimensioned drawings of all equipment rooms
indicating spatial relationships to other proximate equipment. Insure that all code
required clearances are maintained.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products from one of the follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Cutler-Hammer, Eaton Corp.
General Electric Co.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D Co.
GENERAL:
A.
Provide panelboards, enclosures, and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings
indicated. Provide overcurrent protective devices, etc. as indicated on drawings for a complete
PANELBOARDS
260160 – 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
installation.
B.
2.3
Where "Spaces" or "Blanks" are indicated on panelboard schedules, provide drilled bus and
mounting hardware ready to receive breaker or fusible switch of size indicated on panelboard
schedule.
PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES:
A.
2.4
Provide Code gauge, galvanized or rust-resistant sheet steel enclosures in sizes and NEMA
types to suit respective applications. The size of the wiring gutters and gauge of steel shall be
in accordance with the latest NEMA Standards Publication and latest UL standards for
panelboards. Flush locks shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. Key all enclosures
alike and provide three keys at completion of the project. Fronts shall have adjustable
indicating trim clamps, which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors
shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. A circuit directory frame and card, with
clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory cards shall be
typewritten to identify each circuit service. Provide panel enclosures with doors hinged to
enclosures. Provide ANSI-61 painted finish.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS:
A.
Provide dead-front, safety-type lighting and appliance panelboards of types and electrical
characteristic indicated. Provide copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bus, and ground bus.
Provide insulated/isolated ground buses where indicated. Include overcurrent protective
devices and switches in quantities, ratings, types, and arrangements shown. See Section
260180 – Overcurrent Protective Devices.
B.
Rate devices, bussing, supports, etc. equal to or greater than the short circuit current rating
indicated. Provide fully-rated systems only. Series-rated systems are not acceptable, unless
specifically noted otherwise.
2.5
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS:
A.
Provide dead-front, safety-type lighting and appliance panelboards of types and electrical
characteristic indicated. Provide wall-mounted or floor-standing power distribution panelboards
as indicated. Provide panelboards suitable for use as service equipment where required.
Provide copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bus, and ground bus. Provide insulated/isolated
ground buses where indicated. Include overcurrent protective devices and switches in
quantities, ratings, types, and arrangements shown. See Section 260180 – Overcurrent
Protective Devices.
B.
Rate devices, bussing, supports, etc. equal to or greater than the short circuit current rating
indicated. Provide fully-rated systems only. Series-rated systems are not acceptable, unless
specifically noted otherwise.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable
requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in
compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
PANELBOARDS
260160 – 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.2
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
IDENTIFICATION:
A.
Provide 1/16" thick black plastic laminate labels with 1/4" high lettering on both the interior and
exterior of each panelboard enclosure indicating name of panelboard. Bolt and nut or rivet
labels to enclosure. (Sheet metal screws are not acceptable).
B.
All subpanels shall be labeled to identify the main panel that supplies the feeder circuit.
C.
Provide red plastic laminate label for panelboards supplied by emergency power.
D.
Provide orange plastic laminate label for panelboards supplied by UPS power.
3.3
MOUNTING:
A.
Mount panelboards as indicated, but in no case higher than 6'-6" from finished floor to top of
panel. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces.
B.
Provide 4" high concrete pad under floor-standing power distribution panelboards.
3.4
CIRCUIT DIRECTORIES:
A.
For lighting and appliance panelboards, provide typed panelboard circuit directories. Indicate
load description or name and location. Utilize actual building room numbers, not architectural
room numbers used on drawings. Label the panel and circuit that feed this panel.
B.
For power distribution panelboards, provide 1/16" thick black plastic laminate labels with 1/4"
high lettering for each load served.
1.
2.
3.5
Provide red plastic laminate label for emergency loads.
If circuits are changed in a panel, type the new circuit designation and glue on existing
circuit directory. Do not discard existing panelboard schedule unless all circuits have
been changed.
WIRING METHODS:
A.
Arrange conductors neatly within enclosure, and secure with suitable nylon ties.
B.
Panelboards shall not be used for junction or splicing boxes or as a raceway.
3.6
ARRANGEMENT OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES:
A.
The overcurrent protective devices shall be in the same sequence and labeled as the panel
schedule on the drawings.
END OF SECTION 260160
PANELBOARDS
260160 – 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
A.
Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls
and floors.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Grout.
Silicone sealants.
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed
in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with
and without penetrating items.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SLEEVES
Wall Sleeves:
1.
2.
B.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, plain ends.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed
with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND 260544 – Page 1
CABLING
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
C.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D.
Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E.
Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer
surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
a.
b.
2.2
A.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between sleeve and raceway or cable.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270
mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be
0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more
and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be
0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
CALPICO, Inc.
Metraflex Company (The).
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
Sealing Elements: EPDM (poured in place) or Nitrile (Buna N) (pre-cast and
cored) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Composite.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure
plates to sealing elements.
GROUT
A.
Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in
non-fire-rated walls or floors.
B.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND 260544 – Page 2
CABLING
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
D.
2.4
A.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
SILICONE SEALANTS
Silicone Sealants:
Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric
sealants of grade indicated below.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.
Sealant shall have VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,
expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and
Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:
1.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint
sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material
solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between
sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless
seismic criteria require different clearance.
Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings
are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for
mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND 260544 – Page 3
CABLING
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
5.
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors a
minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Install sleeves during
erection of floors.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1.
2.
Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular
sleeved opening.
Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
E.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with
flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel or cast-iron
pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
G.
Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves.
Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or
cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at
raceway entries into building.
B.
Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for
raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or
cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to
expand and make watertight seal.
END OF SECTION 260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND 260544 – Page 4
CABLING
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division
26, 27, and 28 sections making reference to interior lighting.
SUMMARY
1.2
A.
This section provides general requirements for a complete and fully operational lighting
system including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
Emergency lighting units.
Exit signs.
Accessories
Light fixture support
Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.
B.
Extent of interior lighting work is indicated by drawings and schedules and is specified
herein.
C.
Type of lighting fixtures in this section include the following:
1.
2.
D.
Fluorescent
Lighting Emitting Diode (LED)
Related Sections:
1.
Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting,
including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole
lighting relays and contactors.
REFERENCES
1.3
A.
Conform to Reference Standards by date of issue current on date of Contract
Documents, except where a specific date is established by code.
1.
2.
3.
4.
ANS/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
NFPA 101
Life Safety Code
UL 57
Electrical Luminaires
UL 496
Edison Base Lampholders
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
B.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
UL 542
Lampholders, Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps
UL 924
Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
UL 935
Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
UL 1029
HID Lamp Ballasts
UL 1570
Fluorescent Luminaires
UL 1571
Incandescent Luminaires
UL 1572
High Intensity Discharge Luminaires
UL 773
Plug-In Photo controls for Use with Area Lighting
UBC Standard Section 47.1813 Luminaires
IES LM-79-08 Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid State Lighting
IES LM-80
Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance for SSL Light Sources
Definitions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
BF: Ballast factor.
CCT: Correlated color temperature.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
HID: High-intensity discharge.
LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.4
A.
Comply with requirements of specification section describing Submittal Procedures.
B.
The authorized manufacturer’s representative for the project area shall prepare
submittals for each lighting fixture type. In addition to the fixture submittals, a list shall
be provided identifying the manufacturer representative for each fixture type. Provide
manufacturers’ names, addresses, and telephone numbers. Requests for prior
approval shall also include this information. Submittals or requests for prior approval
without this information will be rejected.
C.
Product Data shall indicate that light fixture lamps, and ballasts fully comply with
contract documents. Data shall be submitted for each type of light fixture indicated,
arranged in order of fixture designation. For standard catalog fixtures provide original
product catalog sheets indicating data on features, accessories finishes, and the
following:
1.
2.
Materials and dimensions of luminaires.
Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on certified results of laboratory tests
complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides of
each lighting fixture type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical
to those indicated for the light fixture as applied in the Project.
a.
b.
Photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing
agency.
Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer’s laboratory with a
current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Emergency lighting unit battery and charger.
Low voltage transformers.
Fluorescent and high intensity discharge ballasts, including BF.
LED power supplies.
Types of lamps, including manufacturer, wattage, Color Rendering index (CRI),
Color Temperature in degrees Kelvin (K), color shift over life, and efficacy
(lumens/watt).
Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling light fixtures, furnish data
required in “Submittals” Article in Section “Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles.”
Sound Performance Data: For air-handling light fixtures, indicate sound power
level and sound transmission class in test report certified according to standards
specified in Section “Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles.”
Shop Drawings shall:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures.
Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components features,
and accessories.
For custom fixtures, modified fixtures, or linear fluorescent fixtures mounted in
continuous rows, submit scaled drawings prepared by the manufacturer showing
all details of construction, lengths of runs, pendant and power feed locations,
accessories, finished, and lists of materials.
Contractor to provide the manufacturer with accurate field dimensions where
required.
Wiring diagrams, power and control wiring.
E.
Wiring Diagrams shall detail wiring for fixtures and differentiate between manufacturerinstalled and field-installed wiring.
F.
Product samples, complete with housing, trim, specified lamp, ballast/transformer, and
8’ cord with plug shall be submitted if requested.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.5
A.
Not Required.
B.
Product Certificates shall be signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that
products comply with requirements.
C.
Dimming Ballast Compatibility Certificates shall be signed by the manufacturer of
ballast certifying that ballasts are compatible with dimming systems and equipment
with which they are used. Product certificates signed by the product manufacturer
shall be provided for each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer controlled fixtures.
D.
Maintenance Data shall be provided for lighting fixtures and equipment to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals specified in specifications section
describing Operations and Maintenance Data.
E.
Field quality control test reports.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
F.
Special Warranties specified in this Section.
G.
Review of luminaire submittals which indicate voltage, mounting condition, or quantities
shall not be considered to be approval of said voltage, mounting condition, or
quantities. Contractor shall field verify voltage and actual mounting condition and
method.
SUBSTITUTIONS
1.6
A.
Comply with requirements of specification section describing Product Requirements.
B.
Lighting fixtures are based on the fixture types and manufacturers specified. If
substitution of fixtures other than those specified is desired, product information must
be submitted to the Lighting Designer/Engineer 8 days prior to the close of the bid
period. No requests for substitution will be accepted after this date.
C.
Substitution requests shall include all information required in paragraph 1.4 – ACTION
SUBMITTALS.
D.
Equipment delivery lead time shall not be held as a valid reason for requesting
luminaire substitution unless luminaire lead time from specified manufacturer is in
excess of 14 weeks. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to determine
necessary equipment lead times, deliver submittals for review in a timely fashion, and
place orders accordingly to ensure timely delivery.
E.
When requesting a substitution, the contractor shall provide unit and extended pricing
for specified luminaire, unit and extended pricing for proposed alternate, and unit and
extended savings to the Owner to be realized by accepting proposed alternate. If
requested, the Contractor shall provide unit pricing for each luminaire type specified to
provide a baseline comparison for substitution requests.
F.
If the substitution request is accepted, approval will be in the form of an addendum to
the contract documents and specifications issued to all registered plan holders.
G.
A maximum of two substitution requests shall be reviewed for any single fixture type. If
a substitution has not been approved following this process, the Contractor shall
provide the specified fixture.
CUSTOM LIGHT FIXTURES
1.7
A.
All custom light fixtures require a prototype to be submitted prior to commencement of
fabrication. The purpose of the prototype will be to review construction, lamp
placement within the fixture, lamp type, optical assembly, finishes, etc. Modifications
may be required as a result of the prototype review. These modifications and others
that do not materially affect the cost of the fixture shall be incorporated at no additional
cost to the Owner.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.8
A.
STANDARDS: Refer to Section 26 00 01 - Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
Provide fluorescent-lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturer's
Association standards and carry the CBM label.
B.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an
independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
C.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by
manufacturers’ laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer
Laboratory Accreditation program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
F.
FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous location shall be listed and
labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
G.
Luminaires, ballasts, lamps and other components and controls shall equal or exceed
the requirements of all applicable state and/or municipal energy codes.
H.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's data on interior lighting fixtures. Submit
dimensioned drawings of all lighting fixtures. Identify light fixtures by type and submit
in alphabetical order.
COORDINATION
1.9
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of light fixtures with ceiling system and other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them including mechanical
system, fire suppression, AV, and partition assemblies.
B.
Provide all frames, supplementary support structures, hangers, spacers, stems aligner
canopies, auxiliary junction boxes and other hardware as required for a complete and
proper installation. Recessed fixtures shall have frames that are compatible with the
ceiling systems.
C.
Coordination Meetings: Meet with the ceiling installer to coordinate each light fixture
mounting condition with ceiling type, and to coordinate fixture layouts in each area.
Meet with the mechanical systems installer prior to fabrication and installation of
ductwork. Coordinate depth and location of all light fixtures and ductwork in all areas.
1.10
WARRANTY
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
A.
1.11
A.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under the provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, Louvers, and Other Optical Parts: 10% or
one dozen (whichever is less) of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
Globes and Guards: 5% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type.
Lamps: 15% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
Ballasts: 2% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Provide light fixtures of types as indicated on drawings or as approved by addenda.
Provide complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders,
reflectors, ballasts, starters, wiring, etc. Provide all light fixtures with safety latches
where applicable.
B.
Provide all detachable fixture parts, luminous ceiling accessories, louvers, diffusers,
lenses, and reflectors with locking catches, screws, safety chains, or safety cables.
C.
Provide all light fixtures and support accessories as required for a complete system.
D.
Consult architectural drawings for louvers (if any) to be provided by Division 26.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Catalog numbers specified represent the full catalogue number of the fixture. The
fixture size shall correspond with the wattage indicated in the Light Fixture Schedule or
the actual length of the fixture as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Acceptable manufacturers and full catalogue numbers are listed. The manufacturer
listed shall provide complete fixtures equaling or exceeding the written specification.
Verify these requirements and order fixtures as required for a complete and fully
operational installation per the contract documents and per code.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.3
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIRMENTS
A.
Fixtures shall be free of light leaks while providing sufficient ventilation of lamps to
provide the required photometric performance. Ballasts and transformers shall be
adequately vented.
B.
Lamp-holders shall hold lamps securely against normal vibration and maintenance
handling.
C.
Light fixtures containing lamps which require protective shielding shall be furnished
with a tempered glass lens or approved unbreakable lens UL listed for the application.
D.
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed
fixtures.
E.
Metal Parts shall be free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. Metal work shall be
free from tool marks and dents and shall have accurate angles bent as sharply as
compatible with the gauges of the required metal. Intersections and joints shall be
formed true and of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion
after assembly. All miters shall be in accurate alignment with abutting intersection
members.
F.
Sheet Metal Components shall be steel, unless otherwise indicated. Components shall
be formed and supported to prevent warping and sagging. Luminaires to be painted
after fabrication. Finish ferrous mounting hardware and accessories to prevent
corrosion and discoloration to adjacent materials.
G.
Fixture hardware to comply with the following material standards: For steel and
aluminum fixtures, all screws, bolts, nuts and other fastening and latching hardware
shall be cadmium or equivalent plated. For stainless steel fixtures, all hardware shall
be stainless steel. For bronze fixtures, all hardware shall be stainless steel or bronze.
H.
Doors, Frames, and other internal access shall be smooth operating, free from light
leaks under normal operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use
of tools.
I.
Provide supplemental safety device or arrange doors, frames, lenses diffusers, and
other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in
operating position. Safety devices shall be detachable if necessary and shall not
interfere with fixture performance, maintenance, or the seating of any fixture element.
Safety device shall not be visible during normal fixture operation and from normal
viewing angles.
J.
Luminaires provided must have means for disconnection from power during service, as
required in the NEC Article 410.
K.
Reflecting Surfaces of light fixtures: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise
indicated;
1.
2.
White Surfaces: 85%.
Specular Surfaces: 90%.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.
4.
L.
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75%.
Laminated Silver Metalized Film: 90%.
Reflector cones shall adhere to the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
M.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Cones designed for vertically mounted lamps shall provide a minimum of [45]
degree cutoff of lamp and lamp image. Cones designed for horizontally mounted
lamps shall provide a minimum of [55] degree cutoff of lamp and lamp image.
There shall be no visible lamp flashing in the cone.
Plastic material shall not be used for reflector cones, unless otherwise specified.
Cones shall not be permanently fastened to the housing or ceiling and shall be
removable without tools. Retention devices shall not deform the cone or be
visible from normal viewing angles.
Trim shall be flush to the finished ceiling without gaps or light leaks. Where the
flange trim is separate from the cone, it shall have the same finish as the reflector
cone.
Reflector cones shall be of uniform gauge, not less than 0.032” thick, high purity
aluminum [Alcoa 3002] alloy. Cones shall be free of spin marks or other
defects.
Manufacture cone using the Alzak process. Refer to the fixture schedule for
cone color and finish (i.e. specular or diffuse) requirements. For compact
fluorescent fixtures, finish shall eliminate iridescence.
Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes shall be 100% virgin acrylic plastic or annealed
crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Plastic, polycarbonate and acrylic shall be UV stabilized and shall have high
resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat and
ultraviolet radiation.
Lens Thickness shall be a minimum of 0.125” unless other thickness is indicated.
Lenses shall have uniform brightness throughout the entire visible area.
N.
Adjustable light fixtures shall have positive locking devices to fix the aiming angle.
Fixtures shall be capable of being relamped without adjusting the aiming angle.
O.
Each lighting fixture that has a lamp with an oval shape beam pattern or a spread lens
that defines beam orientation shall contain lamp or lens locking devices to ensure that
lamp or lens orientation is not disturbed during future lamp replacement or cleaning.
P.
All fixtures and ballasts must operate within the temperature limits of their design and
as specified by Underwriter’ Laboratories, Inc. in the applications and mounting
conditions herein specified.
Q.
Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and
ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel,
but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1.
Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
a.
b.
“USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin,
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
c.
d.
e.
f.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and
compact fluorescent luminaires.
Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or
coated) for HID luminaires.
Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and
compact fluorescent luminaires.
ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
R.
Fixtures recessed in suspended ceilings where the space above the ceiling is either an
air supply or return plenum shall conform to NEC Article 300-22.
S.
Provide plaster frame for recessed light fixtures mounted in other than T-bar ceilings.
Verify mounting with architectural reflected ceiling plan before ordering light fixtures.
T.
Air-Handling Fluorescent Fixtures shall be for use with plenum ceiling for air return and
heat extraction and for attaching an air-diffuser-boot assembly specified in Section
“diffusers, Registers, and Grilles.”
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Air supply units shall have slots in one or both side trims to join with air-diffuserboot assemblies.
Heat removal units shall have air paths through the lamp cavity.
Combination heat removal and air supply unit shall allow heat to be removed
through the lamp cavity at both ends of the fixture door with air supply the same
as for air supply units.
Dampers shall be operable from outside the fixture for control or return-air
volume.
Static fixture shall have air supply slots blanked off, and fixture appearance shall
match that of active units.
U.
Fixtures for use in areas designated as damp locations shall be suitably gasketed to
prevent the entrance of moisture. Provide approved wire mesh screens for ventilation
opening. Dissimilar metals shall be separated by non-conductive material to prevent
galvanic action.
V.
Welding shall be done with electrodes and/or methods recommended by the
manufacturers of the metals being welded. Welds shall be continuous, except where
spot welding is specifically permitted. Welds exposed to view shall be ground flush
and dressed smooth. All welds on or behind surfaces which will be exposed to view
shall be done so that finished surface will be free of imperfections such as pits, runs,
splatter, cracks warping, dimpling, depressions or other forms of distortion or
discoloration. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from all welded surfaces.
2.4
FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A.
Housing shall be minimum code gauge steel or rigid aluminum construction painted
after fabrication with high reflectance white paint unless otherwise indicated in the Light
Fixture Schedule.
B.
Shielding shall adhere to the following criteria:
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Eggcrate louvers shall be aluminum, continuously bound in a perimeter channel
frame. Frame, louver, and support shall be painted to finish as selected by
Architect.
Parabolic louvers shall be Alzak aluminum with a low iridescent finish, specular
or semi-specular as indicated in the Light Fixture Schedule.
Flat translucent diffuser shall be 100% virgin acrylic and shall have matte finish
on the exterior side. Diffuser shall be of sufficient density to completely obscure
lamp image.
Flat clear lenses shall be injection molded 100% virgin acrylic or clear tempered
glass, thickness as specified in the Light Fixture Schedule.
Clear patterned lenses shall be injection molded 100% virgin acrylic. For lenses
with convex pattern or prisms or cones, specified minimum thickness refers to
distance from the flat surface to the base of the pyramids or cones, or to the
thickness of undisturbed material. For lenses with concave pattern, specified
minimum thickness refers to overall thickness of the material. Lenses shall fully
eliminate lamp image when viewed from all directions between 45-90 degrees
from vertical. From 0-45 degrees the ratio of maximum brightness to minimum
brightness shall not exceed 3:1. Minimum thickness shall not be less than 0.125”
with a minimum weight of 8 ounces per square foot.
C.
Doorframes shall be supplied with concealed hinges and latching. Provide mitered
corners with no gaps or light leaks.
D.
Lamp mounting shall adhere to the following criteria:
1.
2.
E.
2.5
A.
Lamps used in rapid start circuits 430 ma and below shall be mounted within ½”
of grounded metal or equal length to the lamp. For lamps operating at 800 ma
and 1500 ma, mount within 1” of grounded metal or equal length to the lamp.
Provide one grounding lamp holder per lamp for rapid start circuits using single
lamp ballasts.
Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and
NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
General Requirements; features that include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.
Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.
Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bilevel control is indicated.
Sound Rating: Class A
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or
better.
Operating voltage: shall match voltage of circuit. Confirm voltage requirements
with Electrical Drawings. Ballasts shall operate lamps correctly within 10%
voltage variation without damaging ballasts.
Operating Frequency: 60Hz at voltage of circuit indicated on drawings.
Flicker: Ballasts shall operate lamps with no visible flicker.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 10
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
BF: 0.85 or higher unless indicated otherwise.
Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
Operating Temperatures: Ballasts shall operate in ambient temperatures up to
105 degrees Fahrenheit (40 degrees Celsius) and shall have thermal protection.
Lamp end of life detection and shutdown circuit.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11
and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or
more lamps fail.
B.
Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.
C.
Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5, T5HO, and T8 Lamps: Comply with
ANSI C82.11 and the following:
1.
2.
D.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor,
Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection.
1.
Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
E.
Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements
and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or
rewiring in the field.
F.
Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:
1.
2.
Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0
deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp
types.
Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type
rated for minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C) starting and operating temperature
with indicated lamp types.
G.
Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR 18,
Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference
for consumer equipment.
H.
Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.
Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control
system and lamp type indicated.
Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the
ballast, controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 11
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
I.
Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
1.
Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light
output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.
a.
b.
J.
Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.
3.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control
system and lamp type indicated.
Ballasts for Tri-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light
output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.
a.
b.
2.
3.
A.
High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.
Low-Level Operation: 30 and 60 percent of rated lamp lumens.
Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific tri-level control
system and lamp type indicated.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide products manufactured by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.
Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.
2.
1.
K.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Osram/Sylvania
Universal Lighting technologies
Advance
General Electric
BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with
ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be
designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
Sound Rating: Class A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or
better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.
Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 12
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide products manufactured by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
A.
Osram/Sylvania
Universal Lighting technologies
Advance
General Electric
EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT
Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within
lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.
1.
2.
3.
Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at a
minimum output of 1400 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to batteryinverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.
Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening
fixture or entering ceiling space.
a.
b.
4.
5.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A.
Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability.
Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates
trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power
transfer relay.
External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one
or more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924.
1.
2.11
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect
unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture
continuously.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.
Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability.
LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
EXIT SIGNS
General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,
luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 13
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
B.
Internally Lighted Signs:
1.
2.
Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a selfcontained power pack.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit
voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal
voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is
automatically recharged and floated on charger.
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of
normal power and demonstrates unit operability.
LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates
trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
Master/Remote Sign Configurations:
a.
b.
2.12
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs,
and provide additional capacity in [LED power supply] [ballast] [battery]
for power connection to remote unit.
Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs,
except omit power supply, battery, and test features. Arrange to receive
full power requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently
with master unit as a unified system.
LAMPS
A.
Lamp each fixture with the proper quantity of lamps of the type specified in the Light
Fixture Schedule.
B.
Fluorescent Lamps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
All fluorescent lamps shall be tri-phosphor technology.
Correlated Color Temperature: 3500 K unless otherwise indicated in the Light
Fixture Schedule.
Minimum Color-Rendering Index: 85 CRI unless otherwise indicated in the Light
Fixture Schedule.
Fluorescent Lamps provided are required to have passed Federal TCLP testing.
Seasoning: Lamps used in dimmable fixtures shall be seasoned after installation
by operating lamps at full output for approximately 100 hours without turning off.
Comply with EPA’s toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less
than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220
mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.
T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610
mm), 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 14
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
9.
10.
11.
T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches (1150
mm), 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.
T5HO rapid-start lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches
(1150 mm), 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and
suitable for use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
I.
2.13
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).
18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).
All lamps of the same type are to be provided by the same manufacturer.
SOCKETS
A.
Incandescent sockets shall be porcelain for medium or mogul screw base. For other
lamp types, as required by base type.
B.
Fluorescent sockets shall be suitable for lamp and ballast type specified.
C.
HID sockets shall be porcelain for mogul or medium base lamps, pulse-rated as
required. Sockets shall be keyed for all position oriented lamps. For other lamp types
as required by base type.
2.14
WIRING
A.
All wiring shall be as required by code for fixture wiring.
B.
All flexible cord wiring between fixture components or to electrical receptacles and not
in wireways shall have a minimum temperature rating of 105 degrees Celsius.
C.
Cords shall be fitted with proper strain reliefs and watertight entries where required by
application.
D.
No internal wiring shall be visible at normal viewing angles.
E.
For Tandem Wired fixtures in continuous rows and where required on Electrical
Drawings or in the Light Fixture Schedule, supply ballasts and wiring to control all
inboard lamps together and all outboard lamps together.
F.
Provide #18 AWG, 3-wire flexible conduit connections (whips) for dual-level switching
as shown on electrical Drawings for light fixtures recessed in accessible suspended
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 15
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
ceiling. Provide 3-wire whips for all dual-level switching. Wire count on wire whips is
not shown on Drawings and shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide
proper wire count for the lighting control as shown on Drawings.
2.15
LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with Section pertaining to General Electrical Provisions, paragraph entitled
Equipment anchorage, Support, Seismic Restraint, and Bracing for fixture support and
bracing.
B.
Where the ceiling is of insufficient strength to support the weight of the lighting fixtures,
provide additional framing from building structure to support luminaires as required. Do
not support fixtures from ceiling T-Bar system.
C.
Single-Stem Hangers shall be ½ –inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and
ceiling canopy. Finish shall be the same as the luminaire.
D.
Twin-Stem Hangers shall be two, ½ inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy
arranged to mount a single fixture. Finish shall be the same as the luminaire.
E.
Rod hangers shall be 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated threaded
steel rod.
F.
Wires shall be ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc coated steel, 12 gauge
(2.68-mm).
G.
Wires for humid spaces shall be ASTM A 580/A 580M, composition 302 or 304,
annealed stainless steel, 12 gauge (2.68-mm).
H.
Hook Hangers shall be integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and
equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
I.
Aircraft Cable Support shall use cable anchorages, and intermediate supports
recommended by fixture manufacturer.
J.
Hangers for Pendant Industrial Fixtures shall be heavy duty No. 8 jack chain with
hangers, “S” hooks, mounting, straps, and all required accessories for complete
installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
GENERAL
Install interior light fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of
Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products fulfill requirements.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 16
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.2
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
INSTALLATION
A.
Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to
manufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in
each fixture.
B.
Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent
luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of
luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the
temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.
C.
Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not
exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers,
maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.
D.
Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E.
Mounting height indicated in drawings from finished floor to bottom of pendant light
fixture or to the center of the outlet box for all mounted light fixtures unless otherwise
noted. Verify mounting heights with Architect and Lighting Designer/Engineer.
F.
Mounting height may also be indicated as the length of the pendant below finished
ceiling.
G.
Provide all necessary hanging or mounting devices and accessories for all fixtures.
Verify the types needed for various ceiling conditions. Plaster rings shall be provided
where required.
H.
Verify weight and mounting method of all fixtures prior to ordering and provide suitable
support. Coordinate with General Contractor for fixtures that require additional
blocking or support. Fixture mounting assemblies shall comply with all local seismic
codes and regulations.
I.
Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans for coordination of light fixture locations
with mechanical and fire safety equipment. Where conflicts occur, coordinate with
Architect and Lighting Designer/Engineer prior to installing any of the systems.
J.
In accessible suspended ceilings, fixture wiring connection, including equipment
grounding conductor, is to be through use of 72-inch flexible conduit from a rigidly
supported junction box.
K.
Wire per requirements of branch circuit installation. Properly ground each fixture.
L.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
M.
Light fixtures located in recessed ceilings with a fire resistive rating of 1 hour or more
shall be enclosed in an approved fire resistive rated box equal to that of the ceiling.
N.
Install fixtures with vent holes free of air blocking obstacles.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 17
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
O.
Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting aperture flanges or rings on all recessed
fixtures to be flush with the finished ceiling. Fixture trim shall completely conceal
ceiling opening.
P.
Adjust variable position lampholders for proper lamp position prior to fixture installation.
3.3
FIXTURE SUPPORT
A.
Comply with specifications section describing General Electrical Provisions, paragraph
entitled Equipment anchorage, Support Seismic Restraint, and Bracing for fixture
support and bracing.
B.
Provide all necessary hanging or mounting devices for all fixtures, verify the type
needed for various ceiling conditions. Plaster rings shall be provided where required.
C.
Ceiling Fixture Support: Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of
light fixtures installed, provide additional framing from building structure to support as
required.
D.
Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling
suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm)
from lighting fixture corners.
Electrical Contractor is to provide and install locking clips for all fixtures installed
in suspended ceilings that are UL listed for the application. The locking clip is to
be attached to the fixture with a sheet metal screw or similar device and secured
to the main or supporting T-bar runner to guarantee a secure installation. Clips
shall be located at or near fixture corners.
Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling
plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at
least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on
lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at
a safety factor of 3.
Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit
swinging.
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
Brace suspended luminaires installed near ducts or other elements so that they
do not swing into obstructions.
Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod
for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or
rods to building structure.
Provide two slack No. 9 safety wire hangers or threaded rods for each recessed
mounted fluorescent fixture. Secure form opposite corners of each fixture and fasten
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 18
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
to structure above, independent of ceiling system. Locate supports not more than 6
inches from fixture corners.
G.
Metal decking shall not be pierced for luminaire support.
H.
Wall mounted light fixtures shall be supported from four-square outlet box plaster ring
and from wall at non-feed end with two 1/4 –inch toggle bolts for gypsum board walls or
1/4 –inch bolts to pre-set inserts for concrete wall.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
3.6
IDENTIFICATION
Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes.
Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
COMPACT FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
Install as for incandescent fixture, except where special provisions are required for
ballast arrangement; provide access to ballasts in all cases.
FLUORESCENT FIXTURES:
A.
Recessed Type: support fixtures independent of the ceiling suspension system.
Provide four integral tabs (one at each corner) which rotate into position and lock on
ceiling tees after fixture is lifted into the ceiling cavity or provide four clips similar to
Caddy #535. Provide mounting frames suitable for the ceiling type. In addition, provide
slack earthquake safety wire hangers secured diagonally from opposite fixture corners
to structural members above suspended ceiling. Comply with Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
B.
Wall mounted Type: Support from four-square outlet box plaster ring and from wall at
non-feed end with two ¼- inch toggle bolts for gypsum board walls or ¼-inch bolts to
pre-set inserts for concrete wall.
C.
Fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be switched as shown on electrical drawings. Fourlamp fixtures shown with 2-level switching shall be wired with lamps, 1, 4 and 2, 3 each
on separate switch-legs for 2-level switching. Three-lamp fixtures shown with 2-level
switching shall be wired with lamps, 1, 3 and 2 each on separate switch-legs for 2-level
switching.
D.
If clearance above T-bar system is too restricted to “tip-in” fixture, coordinate with
acoustic ceiling installer by leaving one cross T-bar off until the cross T-bar shall be
secured into its proper place. Fluorescent fixtures installed in hidden-spline-type
ceilings shall have supporting channels installed by Ceiling Contractor to adequately
support the fixture without providing additional hangers from the structural ceiling
above the suspended ceiling.
E.
Install air handling light fixtures with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 19
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
F.
Surface Mounted Type:
1.
2.
G.
2.
3.
3.7
A.
3.8
Where mounted on accessible ceilings, support from structural members above
ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved.
Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Laser sight to ensure fixtures are straight and true
when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where
light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections.
Pendant Mounted Type:
1.
H.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Provide strong back channel entire fixture length unless light fixture is designed
specifically to be self-supporting.
Where suspended below accessible ceiling, provide structural support at
suspended ceiling level from structural members above ceiling. Do not run
hanger rods through ceiling.
Continuous Runs of Light Fixtures: Laser sight to ensure fixtures are straight and
true when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling.
Where light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections.
Install lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are
completed.
LIGHTING CONTROL
Provide branch circuiting in coordination with lighting control requirements of
specification section describing Lighting Control Equipment and as indicated on
Electrical Drawings.
PROTECTION, CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Protect installed and non-installed fixtures from damage during construction period.
B.
Remove protective plastic covers from light fixtures and fixture diffusers only after
construction work, painting and clean-up are completed. Remove, clean and reinstall
all dirty lamps, reflectors and diffusers.
C.
Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer for cleaning Alzak reflectors and other surfaces.
D.
Make final adjustment of aimable light fixtures and adjustable light settings under the
direction of the Lighting Designer during a scheduled period of time prior to the
completion of the project, after normal business hours if required. Include all
equipment and personnel expenses including overtime required for focusing.
E.
Fixtures, reflectors, and accessories which are damaged, blemished or impregnated
with fingerprints shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. All finishes shall be
unmarred upon project completion.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 20
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
3.9
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Coordinate all testing procedures and schedule with the specification section
describing Commissioning Agent – Demonstration and Training. All testing is to be
documented with test procedures, results and initials of witnessing personnel and
submitted to Commissioning Agent.
B.
Coordinate inspection and testing of Light Fixtures with specification section describing
– Lighting Control Equipment.
C.
Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D.
Replace all burned out lamps or inoperative lamps at the end of construction prior to
Owner occupancy.
E.
Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.
F.
Provide instruments to make and record test results.
G.
Test as follows:
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.10
Verify proper operation, switching and phasing of each fixture after installation.
Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify normal transfer to generator and retransfer to normal.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications
indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to the lighting
system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat
procedure until unit operates properly.
SPARE PARTS
A.
Lamps: Provide 15 percent spare lamps, but in no case less than one, of each type,
wattage, and size used for the project.
B.
Acrylic Diffusers: Provide a spare acrylic diffusers and/or glass for each light fixture
type and one for each additional unit for each 10 fixtures. The quantity of any single
type need not exceed 10.
C.
Electronic Ballasts: Provide 2 percent spare electronic ballasts.
3.11
WARRANTY
A.
Lamps: Warranty incandescent and fluorescent lamps for a period of two months from
substantial completion.
B.
Electronic Ballasts: Warranty electronic ballasts for parts and labor for complete
replacement for a period of five years. Warranty shall include an allowance for nominal
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 21
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
replacement labor and replacement of defective product.
END OF SECTION
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - Page 22
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
SECTION 280721 – DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
1.2
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
Manual fire-alarm boxes.
Heat detectors.
Notification appliances.
DEFINITIONS
1.3
A.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
B.
NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.4
A.
Noncoded, addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to firealarm service only.
B.
System shall be UL-listed and factory mutual-approved.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5
A.
Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
SUBMITTALS
1.6
A.
General Submittal Requirements:
1.
2.
Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting
them to Architect.
Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a.
Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.
b.
NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 1
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
c.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C.
Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the
"Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.
Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.
Include battery-size calculations.
Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector,
verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity,
temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and airconditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke
detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement
and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm
indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout,
grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection
diagram.
Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each
addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Section 017823 – Operation and Maintenance Data, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
Chapter in NFPA 72.
Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article
"Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance" Chapter.
Record copy of site-specific software.
Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 2
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
article of the same name and include the following:
Frequency of testing of installed components.
Frequency of inspection of installed components.
Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
Manufacturer's user training manuals.
Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.
Copy of NFPA 25.
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Software operating and upgrade manuals.
Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with
data files.
Device address list.
Printout of software application and graphic screens.
The disks containing fire alarm files shall be supplied to the owner. These disks shall
include all information required to allow the owner to change the fire alarm program
themselves. These computer disks shall contain a minimum of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CAD drawing files of the building fire alarm map.
CAD drawing files of as-build fire alarm component and point-to-point
connections.
General configuration programming.
Job-specific configuration programming.
Tutorial file on complete programming of the fire alarm system.
J.
The system contractor/supplier shall provide a “Certificate of Compliance” to the
Authority Having Jurisdiction in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 72B (1986 Edition),
Section 2-2.6, at the completion of operational acceptance tests, as required herein.
This will be applicable to all types of fire alarm systems.
K.
A complete set of CAD “as-built” drawings showing installed wiring, color coding,
specific interconnections between all equipment, and internal wiring of equipment shall
be delivered to the owner upon completion of the system installation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7
A.
Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for
installation of units required for this Project. Installation shall be by personnel certified
by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician
B.
Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system
from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with,
and operate as, an extension of existing system.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 3
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.8
A.
Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions
and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to
requirements indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
fire-alarm service.
Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written
permission.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
1.9
A.
Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new
equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT
IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into
service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from
the building.
B.
Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing
disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.
1.10
SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A.
Comply with UL 864.
B.
Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support
for two years.
C.
Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and
program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of
Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade
shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.
1.
1.11
A.
Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and
to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of
amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.
Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no
fewer than 1 unit..
Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.
Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed
components.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 4
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
5.
6.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
2.1
A.
Manufacturers / Installers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
Manufacturer
Installer / Telephone
Bosch / Radionics
Cerberus Pyrotronics
Edwards Systems Technology
American Security & Fire, Inc. / (801) 263-6002
Siemens / (801) 571-9601
PST / (801) 649-6696
Wasatch Electric / (801) 487-4511
State Fire Sales and Service / (801) 288-2100
Nelson Fire Systems / (801) 484-9992
Nelson Fire Systems / (801) 484-9992
PCS / (801) 560-6423
BEST / (801) 352-0743
Fire Protection Services Corp. / (801) 363-9696
Alarm Tech / (801) 568-6757
Simplex Grinnell / (801) 262-9406
Fire Control Instruments
Gamewell
Mircom
Mirtone
Notifier
Silent Knight
Simplex Grinnell
B.
Manufacturers for non-system smoke detectors: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
Gentex Corporation.
System Sensor.
SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
2.2
A.
Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices[ and
systems]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Manual stations.
Heat detectors.
Smoke detectors.
Duct smoke detectors.
Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit.
Fire-extinguishing system operation.
Fire standpipe system.
Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1.
Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 5
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
C.
Valve supervisory switch.
Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.
Elevator shunt-trip supervision.
System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and
actions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
E.
Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit[ and remote annunciators].
Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
Activate voice/alarm communication system.
Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm
mode.
Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control
system panel.
Activate stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.
Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.
Activate emergency lighting control.
Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
Record events in the system memory.
Record events by the system printer.
Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and
actions:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signalinitiating devices.
Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.
Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.
Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.
Break in standby battery circuitry.
Failure of battery charging.
Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.
Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and
annunciate at fire-alarm control unit. Record the event on system printer.
MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
2.3
A.
General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall
be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color;
shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box.
If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1.
Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever
type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 6
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
4.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
Station Reset: Key-operated switch.
Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the
top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an
integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm
operation.
Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure
hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
HEAT DETECTORS
2.4
A.
General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
B.
Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F
(57 deg C) or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a
fixed temperature of 190 deg F (88 deg C).
1.
2.
D.
Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature [155 deg F (68 deg C)] <Insert
temperature>. NRTL listed for "regular" service and a standard environment.
Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted together with spring pressure,
wrapped with protective tape, and finished with PVC outer sheath. Each actuator
wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat to allow the
cable twist pressure to short- circuit wires at the location of elevated temperature.
Control Unit: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same system
power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for fire-alarm control
unit.
Signals to Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Any type of local system trouble shall be
reported to fire-alarm control unit as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on
each detection zone shall be individually reported to central fire-alarm control unit
as separately identified zones.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
2.5
A.
General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected
to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals
for system connections.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 7
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a singlemounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals
for system connections.
B.
Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.
C.
Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.
D.
Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a
sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn, using the
coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.
E.
Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or
nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word
"FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Rated Light Output:
a.
15/30/75/110 cd, as indicated in drawings, or
b.
15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.
Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be
determined with guards in place.
Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, [red] [white].
Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an
NRTL.
High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.
Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.
Mounting: semirecessed.
Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of
speaker location.
DEVICE GUARDS
2.6
A.
Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke
detector, gong, or other device requiring protection.
1.
2.
Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device.
Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 8
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
A.
Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.
B.
Power for the panel, battery charger, or any other device which affects the operation of
the system shall be controlled through a single circuit breaker labeled, “Fire Alarm
System – Do Not Turn Off.” Connect to engine generator-supported emergency circuit
where available.
C.
Equipment Mounting: Install wall-mounted fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with
tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.
1.
2.
Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section
260072 – Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints.
Locate fire alarm control unit as directed by the authority having jurisdiction.
D.
Raceway: Install fire alarm conductors in raceway. Fire alarm system conductors from
different zones may be combined in common conduit. Make certain that raceway and
wire quantity, size, and type are suitable for equipment supplied and is within NEC
standards. No wiring other than that directly associated with the fire alarm and
detection systems shall be permitted inside the fire alarm conduits. All conduit,
mounting boxes, junction boxes, panels, detectors, alarm devices, etc., shall be
mounted and fastened with appropriate fittings to insure positive grounding throughout
the system.
E.
Loop wires through each device in zone for proper supervision. Tee-taps are not
permitted. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the maximum extent possible; if needed,
they must be made only in junction boxes. Transposing or changing color-coding of the
wires shall not be permitted.
F.
Provide dust protection for installed and existing (if any) smoke detectors until finish
work is completed and building is ready for occupancy.
G.
Protect conductors from cuts, abrasion, and other damage during construction.
H.
Minimum conductor size shall be 14 AWG, unless otherwise specified. Shielded and/or
stranded conductors shall be provided where recommended by the manufacturer.
I.
Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational
before making changes or connections.
1.
2.
3.
J.
Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.
Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising
station.
Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to
extend existing control functions to the new points. New components shall be
capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance
of either system.
Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:
1.
Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating
Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 9
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating
Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.
Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m).
Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for
high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A or Appendix B in
NFPA 72.
HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or
return-air opening.
Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from any
part of a lighting fixture.
K.
Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each
sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from
normal viewing position.
L.
Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install at +80 inches (2032 mm) above finished
floor, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on
flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a
grille.
M.
Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn at
+80 inches (2032 mm) above finished floor, but at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the
ceiling.
N.
Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
O.
Do not install manual fire alarm boxes close to light switches.
P.
Manual alarm initiating stations shall be provided at all required building exits, boiler
rooms, kitchens, and main administrative offices, and elsewhere to provide a maximum
200’ travel distance to a pull station from any point in the building.
Q.
Post copy of wire identification list inside fire alarm panel door and other area
accessible to fire alarm service personnel.
R.
The control and other panels shall be mounted with sufficient clearance for observation
and testing.
S.
All fire alarm junction boxes shall be identified with zone number and red paint for easy
identification.
T.
Mount remote multi-signialing accessory for non-system duct smoke detector in a
readily accessible location and wire complete.
CONNECTIONS
3.2
A.
Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following
devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet (1 m) from the device
controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is
available at the device or system being controlled.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 10
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at
firefighter smoke-control system panel.
Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.
Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.
Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.
Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel
supplies.
Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler
system.
Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.
Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or
phase-reversal condition.
Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.
IDENTIFICATION
3.3
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements
for identification specified in Section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
B.
Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.
C.
All fire detection devices shall be marked in nominal ½” high letters with the zone and
device number (for example: a mark reading, “1-20,” indicated Zone 1, Device Number
20).
D.
Building Fire Map:
1.
A building fire alarm map shall be supplied to the owner, indicating the exact
location and address of all individual devices. Install the building map adjacent to
the fire alarm panel. Provide a high-quality plastic sign (map holder) with two
layers. The back layer shall be painted black. The front layer shall have a clear
center for viewing the CAD fire alarm drawing. The edges of the sign shall be
colored to match the building interior. The building map shall indicate zoning by
the use of five different colors, minimum.
GROUNDING
3.4
A.
Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a
ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.5
A.
Field tests shall be witnessed by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction .
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 11
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
1.
D.
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections, and to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a.
Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion
Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the
"Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.
b.
Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection"
Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA
72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed
components.
System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of
the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to
manufacturer's written instructions and Authority Having Jurisdiction. Perform
the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements
in ANSI S1.4.
Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to
manufacturer's written instructions and Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's
written instructions and Authority Having Jursidiction.
Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System
Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form"
in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in
NFPA 72.
E.
Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of
added or replaced devices and appliances.
F.
Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
H.
Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly,
monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and
inspections.
I.
Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test firealarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72.
Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
DEMONSTRATION
3.6
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 12
Leonardo Improvements
Catering Kitchen
Bid Docs | August 28, 2014
END OF SECTION 280721
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Section 280721 – Page 13